GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description 01

GBSS15.
0 Optional Feature
Description
Issue
01
Date
2013-2-18
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and
the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be
within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,
information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description
Contents
Contents
1 Voice& Other Services ................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Crystal Voice .................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 GBFD-115701 TFO ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1.2 GBFD-115711 EVAD ............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.3 GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI) ............................................................................................. 4
1.1.4 GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing .......................................................................... 5
1.1.5 GBFD-115709 Smooth Voice Call Handover ......................................................................................... 6
1.2 AMR ................................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.2.1 GBFD-115501 AMR FR ......................................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 GBFD-115502 AMR HR ........................................................................................................................ 9
1.2.3 GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control ..................................................................................................... 11
1.2.4 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment .............................................................................. 12
1.2.5 GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment .................................................... 14
1.2.6 GBFD-115507 WB AMR...................................................................................................................... 16
1.3 Voice Capacity................................................................................................................................................ 17
1.3.1 GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech .......................................................................................................... 17
1.3.2 GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR .................................................................. 18
1.3.3 GBFD-115830 VAMOS ........................................................................................................................ 20
1.3.4 GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification ...................................................................................... 22
1.3.5 GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution ......................................................................................... 24
1.4 Cell Broadcast ................................................................................................................................................ 25
1.4.1 GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23) ............................................................. 25
1.4.2 GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast ............................................................................................ 26
1.5 GSM Trunking ............................................................................................................................................... 28
1.5.1 GBFD-510301 Public Voice Group Call Service .................................................................................. 28
1.5.2 GBFD-510303 Late Group Channel Assignment ................................................................................. 29
1.5.3 GBFD-510305 Single Channel Group Call Originating ....................................................................... 30
1.5.4 GBFD-510306 Talker Identification ..................................................................................................... 31
1.5.5 GBFD-510307 Group Call EMLPP ...................................................................................................... 32
1.5.6 GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call Setup .................................................................................................. 33
1.5.7 GBFD-510309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing ................................................................................ 34
1.5.8 GBFD-510302 Public Voice Broadcast Service .................................................................................... 36
1.5.9 GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment ............................................................................ 37
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

ii
Contents
1.5.10 GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay ............................................................................................................. 38

1.6 LCS ................................................................................................................................................................ 39
1.6.1 GBFD-115404 Lb Interface .................................................................................................................. 39
1.6.2 GBFD-510902 High-Precision TA........................................................................................................ 42
1.6.3 GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for Navigation ...................................................... 43
1.7 Voice Priority.................................................................................................................................................. 44
1.7.1 GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation ................................................................................................... 44
1.7.2 GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP) ..................................... 45
1.7.3 GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority ............................................................................ 47
1.7.4 GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority ............................................................................. 48
1.7.5 GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC) ........................................................................................ 49
1.8 CS domain data service .................................................................................................................................. 50
1.81 GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data ................................................................................... 50
1.8.2 GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data ............................................................................... 51
2 Data Services ................................................................................................................................ 54

2.1 PS Rate Increase ............................................................................................................................................. 54
2.1.1 GBFD-114201 EGPRS ......................................................................................................................... 54
2.1.2 GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access .................................................................................................. 57
2.1.3 GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching ......................................................................................... 58
2.1.4 GBFD-119509 GPRS Fast Transmission .............................................................................................. 59
2.1.5 GBFD-119503 Early TBF Establishment ............................................................................................. 60
2.1.6 GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing priority ............................................................ 62
2.1.7 GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA) .......................................................................... 63
2.1.8 GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes ........................................................................................... 64
2.1.9 GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation .................................................................................................. 66
2.1.10 GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds .................................................... 68
2.1.11 GBFD-510801 MSRD ........................................................................................................................ 69
2.1.12 GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink ......................................................................................... 70
2.1.13 GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A ..................................................................................................... 71
2.1.14 GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A ................................................................................................ 72
2.1.15 GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction...................................................................................................... 74
2.2 PS QoS ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
2.2.1 GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR) ................................................................................................... 77
2.2.2 GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP............................................................................................................ 78
2.2.3 GBFD-119905 PoC QoS ....................................................................................................................... 80
2.2.4 GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS ...................................................................................................... 81
2.2.5 GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority ................................................................................................... 83
2.2.6 GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management .................................................................................. 84
2.3 PS Service Enhancement ................................................................................................................................ 86
2.3.1 GBFD-114151 DTM ............................................................................................................................. 86
2.3.2 GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM ............................................................................................................... 88
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

iii
Contents
2.3.3 GBFD-119404 HMC DTM ................................................................................................................... 89

2.4 Smart Pipe ...................................................................................................................................................... 91
2.4.1 GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement ............................................................................ 91
2.4.2 GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement ......................................................... 92
2.4.3 GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement ....................................................................... 94
2.4.4 GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing ............................................................. 95
2.4.5 GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing ............................................................................................... 97
2.4.6 GBFD-119408 PS Access Congestion Balancing ................................................................................. 98
2.4.7 GBFD-511610 Small Packet Resource Balancing .............................................................................. 100
3 Radio & Performance ............................................................................................................... 102

3.1 Paging Enhancement .................................................................................................................................... 102
3.1.1 GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs ......................................................................................................... 102
3.1.2 GBFD-511502 Layered Paging ........................................................................................................... 103
3.1.3 GBFD-511503 Dynamic Multiple CCCH ........................................................................................... 104
3.1.4 GBFD-511505 RACH Storm Filtration .............................................................................................. 106
3.1.5 GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I ........................................................................................ 107
3.1.6 GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination ........................................................................................... 109
3.2 Mobility Management .................................................................................................................................. 110
3.2.1 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) ............................................................. 110
3.2.2 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) .................................................................... 111
3.2.3 GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status (PSI) ................................................................................................. 113
3.2.4 GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment ....................................................................................... 113
3.2.5 GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) ..................................................................... 114
3.2.6 GBFD-119502 PS Handover ............................................................................................................... 116
3.2.1 GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network ................................................................................... 117
3.2.1 GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) .................................................................... 118
3.2.2 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover .................................................................................................. 119
3.2.3 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover .................................................................................................. 121
3.2.4 GBFD-510105 PS AFC ....................................................................................................................... 122
3.3 Interference Suppression .............................................................................................................................. 123
3.3.1 GBFD-119504 PS Power Control ....................................................................................................... 123
3.3.2 GBFD-115801 ICC ............................................................................................................................. 125
3.3.3 GBFD-115821 EICC ........................................................................................................................... 126
3.3.4 GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping) ............................................... 127
3.3.5 GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping ............................................................................ 129
3.3.6 GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping ...................................................................................... 130
3.3.7 GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX ..................................................................................................... 131
3.3.8 GBFD-119508 PS Uplink DTX .......................................................................................................... 133
3.3.9 GBFD-119510 Um Adaptive Interference Suppression ...................................................................... 134
3.3.10 GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network ..................................................................................... 135
3.3.11 GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling ................................................................................ 137
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

iv
Contents
3.4 Coverage Enhancement ................................................................................................................................ 139

3.4.1 GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology) .................................................................................. 139
3.4.2 GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity ...................................................................................................... 140
3.4.3 GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity .......................................................................................... 141
3.4.4 GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity ...................................................................................... 142
3.4.5 GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology) ................................................................. 143
3.4.6 GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage ........................................................................................ 145
3.4.7 GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing ............................................................................................. 146
3.4.8 GBFD-114001 Extended Cell ............................................................................................................. 148
3.4.9 GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell ............................................................................................................ 150
3.5 Capacity Improvement ................................................................................................................................. 152
3.5.1 GBFD-511611 Duty-Cycle-based PDCH Management ...................................................................... 152
3.5.2 GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell ........................................................................................................... 153
3.5.3 GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO ................................................................................................................. 155
3.5.4 GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing....................................................................... 156
3.5.5 GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation) ......................................................... 157
3.5.6 GBFD-113706 Mega BSC .................................................................................................................. 159
3.6 GSM/UMTS Interoperability ....................................................................................................................... 161
3.6.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability ................................................................................. 161
3.6.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover .................................................................. 163
3.6.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover ...................................................................... 164
3.6.4 GBFD-114323 GSM/WCDMA Cell Reselection Based on MS State ................................................ 165
3.6.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call Release ..................................................... 167
3.6.6 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g ............................................................ 168
3.6.7 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA .......... 169
3.6.8 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g ................................................. 171
3.6.9 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g .................................................. 173
3.6.10 GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search ................................................................................... 175
3.7 GSM/LTE Interoperability ........................................................................................................................... 176
3.7.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE .................................................................. 176
3.7.2 GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage ........................................ 177
3.7.3 GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality ........................................... 179
3.7.4 GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load ....................................... 180
3.7.5 GBFD-511305 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Mode Priority................................. 182
3.7.6 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover ..................................................................... 183
3.7.7 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE ................................................................................... 185
3.7.8 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE ................................................................................ 187
3.7.9 GBFD-511309 SRVCC ....................................................................................................................... 188
3.7.10 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based Handover ................................................ 189
3.7.11 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release ........................................................... 190
3.7.12 GBFD-511313 CSFB ........................................................................................................................ 192
3.8 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability .............................................................................................................. 193
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

Contents
3.8.1 GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability ............................................................................ 193

3.8.2 GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA ........................................................ 194
3.8.3 GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g ... 196
3.8.4 GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH ......................................................................................................... 197
3.8.5 GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA ........................................................................ 198
3.9 GSM/WiFi Interoperability .......................................................................................................................... 200
3.9.1 GBFD- 511608 WLAN Hot Spot Notification.................................................................................... 200
3.9.2 GBFD-511609 Intelligent Wi-Fi Detection and Selection .................................................................. 201
4 Networking & Transmission & Security .............................................................................. 203

4.1 TDM Transmission ....................................................................................................................................... 203
4.1.1 GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR ................................................................................................................ 203
4.1.2 GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points ................................................................................. 204
4.1.3 GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface .................................................................... 205
4.1.4 GBFD-117301 Flex Abis .................................................................................................................... 206
4.1.5 GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization ................................................................................ 208
4.1.6 GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution .................................................................. 210
4.1.7 GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission ................................................................................. 211
4.1.8 GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 ..................................................................................................... 213
4.1.9 GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1 .......................................................................................................... 215
4.1.10 GBFD-117801 Ring Topology .......................................................................................................... 217
4.2 IP Transmission ............................................................................................................................................ 220
4.2.1 GBFD-118620 Clock over IP support 1588v2 .................................................................................... 220
4.2.2 GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet................................................................................................. 222
4.2.3 GBFD-118601 Abis over IP ................................................................................................................ 224
4.2.4 GBFD-118602 A over IP ..................................................................................................................... 227
4.2.5 GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission .................................................................................. 231
4.2.6 GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface ............................................................. 232
4.2.7 GBFD-118603 Gb over IP .................................................................................................................. 233
4.2.8 GBFD-118605 IP QoS ........................................................................................................................ 235
4.2.9 GBFD-118631 A Interface Transmission Pool .................................................................................... 239
4.2.10 GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing ......................................................... 241
4.3 Transmission Efficiency ............................................................................................................................... 245
4.3.1 GBFD-117705 PS Dummy Frame Compression ................................................................................ 245
4.3.2 GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch ...................................................................................................... 246
4.3.3 GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch ...................................................................................................... 249
4.3.4 GBFD-118604 Abis MUX .................................................................................................................. 252
4.3.5 GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC .................................................................................................................. 254
4.4 Satellite Transmission .................................................................................................................................. 255
4.4.1 GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface ................................................................. 255
4.4.2 GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface ...................................................................... 256
4.4.3 GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface .................................................................. 257
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

vi
Contents
4.4.4 GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface.................................................................... 258

4.5 RAN Sharing ................................................................................................................................................ 259
4.5.1 GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing .............................................................................................................. 259
4.5.2 GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell .................................................................................................... 261
4.5.3 GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover ................................................................................................ 262
4.5.4 GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission .................................................................................. 264
4.6 Security ........................................................................................................................................................ 265
4.6.1 GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm .......................................................................................... 265
4.6.2 GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization .......................................................................... 266
4.6.3 GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec .................................................................................................. 267
4.6.4 GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI .................................................................................................. 268
4.7 Reliability ..................................................................................................................................................... 270
4.7.1 GBFD-117401 MSC Pool ................................................................................................................... 270
4.7.2 GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool ................................................................................................................. 273
4.7.3 GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass ................................................................................................................ 274
4.7.4 GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup ......................................................................................... 276
4.7.5 GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy .............................................................................................. 278
4.7.6 GBFD-113726 TC POOL ................................................................................................................... 279
4.7.7 GBFD-113728 OML Backup .............................................................................................................. 281
5 O&M ............................................................................................................................................ 283

5.1 Power Saving ............................................................................................................................................... 283
5.1.1 GBFD-117602 Active Power Control ................................................................................................. 283
5.1.2 GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown .............................................................. 284
5.1.3 GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level ................................ 286
5.1.4 GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control .................................................................................... 287
5.1.5 GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type ............................................................. 288
5.1.6 GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control ..................................................................................................... 290
5.1.7 GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization ................................................. 291
5.1.8 GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off ............................................................................................ 292
5.1.9 GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment ............................................................................. 293
5.1.10 GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation ............................................................ 295
5.2 PICO Management ....................................................................................................................................... 297
5.2.1 GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning ............................................................ 297
5.2.2 GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization................................................................................................ 298
5.2.3 GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning ................................................................................. 299
5.2.4 GBFD-510605 PICO Access Control List (ACL) ............................................................................... 300
5.2.5 GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode ................................................................................................. 301
5.2.6 GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization ................................................................................... 302
5.2.7 GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy .................................................................................. 303
5.3 Micro Management ...................................................................................................................................... 304
5.3.1 GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management ....................................................................... 304
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

vii
Contents
5.3.2 GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and Planning .............................................. 305
5.3.3 GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning ............................................................. 306
5.3.4 GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell Planning and Optimization ........................ 307
5.3.5 GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off ............................................................................... 309
5.3.6 GBFD-510706 Local User Management ............................................................................................ 310
5.4 O&M ............................................................................................................................................................ 312
5.4.1 GBFD-510710 Intelligent Battery Management ................................................................................. 312
5.4.2 GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking ....................................................................... 314
5.4.3 GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection ...................................................................................... 315
5.4.4 GBFD-510901 2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization ..................................................... 318
6 Acronyms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................. 320
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

viii
1 Voice& Other Services
Voice& Other Services
1.1 Crystal Voice

1.1.1 GBFD-115701 TFO
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS6.1.
Summary
With this feature, TFO frames are transparently transmitted and encoding/decoding is
bypassed using the bit stealing scheme between the TCs at two ends. Therefore, the
encoding/decoding process is reduced once.
Benefits
Speech signals deteriorate with each encoding/decoding. Therefore, using TFO to bypass
encoding/decoding can improve the voice quality. In the case of encoding/decoding lower
rates, the voice quality improves more evidently.
Description
In a mobile network system without TFO, speech signals are encoded by the MS on one side
and transmitted over the Um interface. The signals are then decoded by the first TC unit. The
decoded PCM data flow is transmitted to the second TC unit on the 64 kbit/s transmission link
for encoding. After being encoded, the data is transmitted to the MS on the other side over the
Um interface for decoding. As a result, speech signals are transcoded twice during a
conversation, which is called tandem operation.
Transcoding Functions
PLMN A
MS/UE
Encoding
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Transcoding
Function
Transcoding
Function
Compressed Speech
Decoding
ITU-T G.711 A-Law/-Law
Encoding

PLMN B
MS/UE
Compressed Speech
Decoding
The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation,
improving the voice quality. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech
version, in-band signaling negotiation is performed to establish TFO links. In addition, the
least significant bit and the second least significant bit are stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16
kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link to transparently transmit TFO frames so that TC
encoding/decoding is invalidated. In this manner, speech signals are encoded at the MS
initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. Therefore, the
degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality
improves. This process is called tandem free operation (TFO).
Transcoding Functions Bypassed
PLMN A
MS/UE
Transcoding
Function
Transcoding
Function
PLMN B
Compressed Speech
Encoding
MS/UE
Decoding
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The AMR TFO is supported.
GBSS9.0
Conversion between the FR and HR in the TFO:
During the TFO negotiation, if the channel (FR or HR) used by the called party is different
from the channel (HR or FR) used by the calling party, the call is handed over from the FR
channel to an HR channel before the TFO. This feature improves the voice quality of HR
calls.
GBSS14.0
The number of TFO setup failures and the TFO setup duration are measured. This introduces
new methods for network optimization and maintenance.
Dependency
Dependency on BSC hardware
For the dependency on BSC hardware, see GBSS15.0 Feature List.
Dependency on BTS hardware
For the dependency on BTS hardware, see GBSS15.0 Feature List.
Dependency on other GBSS features
This feature cannot be used with the following features:
GBFD-115601 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
GBFD-115602 Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC)
GBFD-115603 Automatic Noise Restraint (ANR)
GBFD-115703 Automatic Noise Compensation (ANC)
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

GBFD-115704 Enhancement Packet Loss Concealment (EPLC)

GBFD-115711 EVAD
GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive Adjustment
AMR Rate Adaptation in GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch
AMR Rate Adaptation in GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-118602 A over IP
GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1
GBFD-115702 TrFO
Dependency on other NEs
None
1.1.2 GBFD-115711 EVAD

Availability
Summary
This feature enhances the encoding effect of downlink music (such as ring back tone (RBT)
service and voice information service) that uses the EFR, AMR FR, or AMR HR speech
versions, improving user experience with regard to the downlink music.
Benefits
This feature helps telecom operators promote their value-added music services.
Description
The earlier Voice Activity Detection (VAD) algorithm may consider soft music as silence and
mistakenly encode music in the downlink. This affects user experience.
The Huawei proprietary Enhanced VAD (EVAD) algorithm increases music recognition
accuracy. It greatly reduces the probability that music is mistakenly considered as silence,
improving user experience.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)


This feature depends on any of the following features:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR
GBFD-113301 EFR
GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Downlink
If EVAD is enabled for a call, the following features cannot be enabled at the same time:
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch
GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch
GBFD-115702 TrFO
None
1.1.3 GBFD-116801 Voice Quality Index (VQI)

Availability
Summary
The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method of measuring the voice quality
of the radio network. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI, the voice quality of
the network is quantified, which provides a reference for future network optimization.
Benefits
The VQI can measure the voice quality of the network rapidly and effectively and therefore
provides a reference for network optimization.
Description
The VQI establishes the mapping between the radio network performance and voice quality.
The VQI value, which helps learn the voice quality, is calculated based on the parameters
related to the radio quality of uplink/downlink speech signals.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

The MOS analysis method is applied in VQI to measure the voice quality. The MOS is used to
assess the quality of the middle-rate and low-rate voice coding. The MOS value ranges from 1
to 5. Based on the MOS analysis method, Huawei further divides the voice quality into 11
VQI levels. The VQI is obtained by analyzing the bit error rate (BER), frame error rate (FER),
longest consecutive sequence of frame losses (LFE), and speech codec mode of
uplink/downlink speech signals. In this manner, the voice quality is quantified to facilitate
voice problem location and network optimization.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Downlink VQI depends on the following feature:
GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)
None
1.1.4 GBFD-115708 Um Interface Speech Frame Repairing

Availability
Summary
This feature applies an enhanced decoding technique to the Um interface to automatically
repair bit-error speech frames over the Um interface, improving the voice quality.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the voice quality. The improvement is more significant when the
carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) is low.
Description
When the bit error rate (BER) is high and the CIR is low, voice quality will deteriorate if
bit-error speech frames are discarded. To solve this problem, an enhanced decoding technique
is used to repair the bit-error speech frames over the Um interface. This technique increases
the success rate of voice decoding, improving the voice quality under a low CIR. After this
feature is applied, the mean opinion score (MOS) increases by 0.1 to 0.2 points under a low
CIR.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
1.1.5 GBFD-115709 Smooth Voice Call Handover

Availability
This feature is introduced in GBSS15.0.
Summary
The Smooth Voice Call Handover feature enables the BTS to send handover commands to
MSs at the most appropriate time when:
A narrowband AMR or enhanced full rate (EFR) voice call is in the discontinuous
transmission (DTX) mode.
Unimportant or no speech frames are transmitted.

Unimportant speech frames refer to frames that have minor impacts on the mean opinion score (MOS).
Benefits
This feature increases the average MOS on the entire network by 0.03 to 0.1 points and
increases the proportion of MOSs higher than 2.8 points by 1% to 3%.
Description
This feature enables the BTS to monitor the types and importance of uplink and downlink
speech frames in real time. The BTS sends handover commands to MSs when unimportant or
no speech frames are transmitted. This reduces the handover's impact on voice calls and
improves voice quality.
After this feature is enabled on the entire network, the proportion of downlink low quality
indicators (LQIs) increases slightly, but the maximum increase is 0.05%.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

This feature does not take effect during full rate (FR), half-rate (HR), and wideband AMR
voice calls.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature depends on the following features:
GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
None
1.2 AMR
1.2.1 GBFD-115501 AMR FR
Availability
Summary
The AMR FR feature provides better voice quality when interference is likely to occur. Under
same conditions, the voice quality in AMR FR is the same as or better than the voice quality
in EFR.
Benefits
This feature provides the following benefits:
Increases system capacity.
Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse patterns.
Improves the network performance counters in an increasingly complex radio

environment in combination with the frequency hopping technology.
Provides better voice quality.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

Description
The AMR is an integration of multiple voice encoding/decoding rates. Different
encoding/decoding rates yield different voice code streams. This enables the BTS and MSs to
select an appropriate encoding/decoding algorithm and to adjust the encoding rate in a
specific radio environment. Therefore, the AMR improves voice quality of the entire wireless
communication system.
When radio channels experience severe interference, better voice quality can be provided in
AMR FR than in EFR or FR. In addition, the system in AMR FR has a higher
anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse patterns.
In the wireless communication system, the higher the original speech rate involved in channel
encoding, the more the information about the speech characteristics carried in the coded
stream, and therefore the higher the speech fidelity. However, the redundant information in
the coded stream decreases, and therefore the coded stream becomes more interference
sensitive. In a poor wireless communication environment, bit errors occur easily and the
speech frames may be lost, leading to discontinuous voices. If the original speech rate
involved in channel encoding is reduced, more redundant information is carried in the coded
stream. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and error correction capabilities,
improving voice continuity.
The AMR FR provides multiple coding rates, as listed in the following table.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/Adaptive full rate speech

(AFS)
12.2 kbit/s
10.2 kbit/s
7.95 kbit/s
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The anti-interference capability of signaling transmission is enhanced.
If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, more redundant
information is carried in the coded stream. Then the coded stream has stronger
anti-interference and error correction capabilities, improving voice continuity. The signaling
transmission performance, however, is not improved. After this feature is enabled, the
transmit power is increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of
signaling transmission. This can avoid voice interruption concerned with signaling
transmission in poor radio environment.
GBSS13.0
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

E-coder is introduced in GBSS13.0 and it is used in A over TDM transmission mode.

E-coder improves the AMR FR speech quality by using the filter enhancement technique
during preprocessing and the Linear Spectral Pairs (LSP) exact-calculate technique. In this
way, E-coder increases the mean opinion score (MOS) by 0.05 to 0.12 points.
E-coder is not supported in A over IP mode or when TFO is enabled.
Dependency
It is recommended that this feature work with the following feature:
GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control
MSs and the CN must support this feature.
Professional Service
It is recommended that this feature be used with the AMR feature introduction service.
1.2.2 GBFD-115502 AMR HR

Availability
Summary
The AMR HR feature provides better voice quality when interference is likely to occur. Under
same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is the same as or better than that in HR. This
feature must be used with the Half Rate Speech feature.
Benefits
Increases system capacity.
Enhances the anti-interference capability to adapt to tight frequency reuse patterns.
Improves the network performance counters in an increasingly complex radio

environment in combination with the frequency hopping technology.
Provides better voice quality.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

Description
The AMR HR feature provides better voice quality when interference is likely to occur. Under
same conditions, the voice quality in AMR HR is the same as or better than that in HR.
Therefore, as long as the voice quality meets the requirements, this feature can be widely used
to increase system capacity. When the network experiences much interference and the voice
quality deteriorates, the system automatically switches to the AMR FR so that the voice
quality and the system capacity are balanced in real time. In this manner, the system can
provide good voice quality to subscribers while expanding system capacity.
The AMR HR provides multiple coding rates, as listed in the following table.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/AHS
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
TCH/AHS 7.95 kbit/s coding rate.
The BTS using the Abis over IP or Abis transmission optimization function can provide the
CS services at the rate of AMR HR 7.95 kbit/s. The following table lists multiple coding rates
provided by AMR HR.
Channel
Coding Rate
TCH/AHS
7.95 kbit/s
7.40 kbit/s
6.70 kbit/s
5.90 kbit/s
5.15 kbit/s
4.75 kbit/s
Enhanced anti-interference capability of signaling transmission
If the original speech rate involved in channel encoding is reduced, the coded stream can
contain more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger anti-interference and
error correction capabilities and the voice continuity is improved as a result. The signaling
transmission performance, however, is not improved. After this feature is enabled, the
transmit power is increased during signaling transmission to increase the success rate of
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

10
signaling transmission. This prevents voice interruption due to signaling transmission in poor
radio environment.
GBSS13.0
E-coder is introduced in GBSS13.0 and it is used in A over TDM transmission mode.
E-coder improves the AMR HR speech quality by using the filter enhancement technique
during preprocessing and the Linear Spectral Pairs (LSP) exact-calculate technique. In this
way, E-coder increases the mean opinion score (MOS) by 0.05 to 0.12 points.
E-coder is not supported in A over IP mode or when TFO is enabled.
Dependency
This feature depends on the following feature:
GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
It is recommended that this feature work with the following feature:
GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control
MSs and the MSC must support this feature.
1.2.3 GBFD-115503 AMR Power Control

Availability
Summary
The AMR Power Control features uses different AMR power control algorithm to provide
better anti-interference capability, larger network capacity, and better voice quality.
Benefits
Reduces the transmit power and prolongs the MS standby time.
Reduces the network interference and improves the frequency usage.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

11
Improves the network quality.
Description
The AMR speech codec can select one of the coding rates according to the radio channel
quality to achieve an optimized combination of speech coding rate and channel coding rate. In
this manner, the AMR speech coding scheme can provide the best voice quality in the current
radio environment and meet the communication requirements in various radio environments.
The coded stream contains more redundant information. Then the coded stream has stronger
anti-interference and error correction capabilities, improving voice continuity. The system
automatically determines whether to use the AMR. If the system uses the AMR, the power
control strategy for AMR calls is different from that for non-AMR calls. This reduces the
network interference and the BTS transmit power, and prolongs the MS standby time.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
It is recommended that this feature work with the following features:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR
None
1.2.4 GBFD-115504 AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment

Availability
Summary
The AMR FR/HR Dynamic Adjustment feature dynamically adjusts AMR HR and AMR FR
in a cell to balance the cell capacity and voice quality.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

12
Benefits
Requires less maintenance workload because the system can automatically adjust the
ratio of AMR FR to AMR HR based on the network capacity and quality.
Expands the network capacity and reduces the network deployment cost without
deteriorating the voice quality.
Description
This feature dynamically adjusts AMR HR and AMR FR in a cell to balance the cell capacity
and voice quality.
After the initial speech coding is used to set up a call, the BSS calculates the radio quality
index (RQI) based on the uplink signal quality measured by the BTS. The BSS then
determines the encoding/decoding scheme used for the uplink based on the uplink quality, the
code sets activated by the BSC, and the corresponding thresholds. In addition, the BSS
dynamically adjusts the voice coding rate in the uplink, and instructs MSs to use the selected
voice coding rate. According to the RQI and parameters such as network capacity, the BSS
determines whether to enable the AMR FR/HR dynamic adjustment in a cell to balance the
voice quality and cell capacity.
This feature applied in different radio environments and capacity configurations helps to
balance the voice quality and cell capacity. Before enabling this feature, ensure that the Half
Rate Speech and AMR HR features have been enabled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

13
1.2.5 GBFD-115506 AMR Coding Rate Threshold Adaptive

Adjustment
Availability
Summary
By setting a target voice quality and monitoring the voice quality in real time, GBSS devices
can adaptively adjust the coding rate adjustment thresholds so that the AMR speech can select
an appropriate coding rate. This enables the voice quality to approach the target voice quality.
Benefits
Enables the AMR speech to select an appropriate coding rate.
Ensures the AMR speech performance.
Description
The AMR speech rate set consists of multiple coding rates. Based on the measured receive
level, receive quality, and carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR), and in combination with a
specific algorithm, the BTS and MS adjust the AMR call control parameters to select a source
speech coding rate that adapts to the current radio environment. This helps achieve an optimal
combination of the channel quality and speech coding rate, maximally improving the voice
quality.
Generally, network planners evaluate the radio channel quality and then set the AMR speech
coding rate adjustment thresholds to fixed values. If the radio channel quality changes or the
network planners' evaluation is inaccurate, the AMR speech will fail to select an appropriate
coding rate and the AMR voice quality is then affected.
With this feature, BSS devices set a target voice quality and monitor the voice quality in real
time. The GBSS devices then adaptively adjust the coding rate adjustment thresholds so that
the AMR speech can select an appropriate coding rate. This ensures the AMR voice quality.
AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds consist of uplink and downlink adjustment
thresholds.
Uplink: After comparing the uplink quality indicator with the coding rate adjustment
threshold, the BTS obtains an appropriate coding rate for an MS. Then, the BTS sends
the coding rate to the MS by using in-band signaling, instructing the MS to adjust the
coding rate.
Downlink: After comparing the downlink quality indicator with the coding rate
adjustment threshold, an MS obtains an appropriate coding rate for the BTS. Then, the
MS sends the coding rate to the BTS by using in-band signaling. The BTS
comprehensively considers the restrictions on the network side and then adjusts the
downlink coding rate. Meanwhile, the BTS notifies the MS of the selected downlink
coding rate, instructing the MS to use the same coding rate for decoding.
GBSS8.1 only supports the AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the uplink.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

14
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
GBSS9.0 supports the AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the downlink. The
details are as follows:
The BTS obtains the frame erase ratio (FER) of the current call from the enhanced
measurement report (EMR) reported by an MS and then estimates the speech quality. If the
estimated speech quality is distinct from the target speech quality, the configured threshold is
inappropriate. When this occurs, the GBSS adjusts the threshold based on a specific algorithm.
The BTS sends the adjusted AMR coding rate threshold to the MS on the robust AMR traffic
synchronized control channel (RATSCCH). Subsequently, the MS adjusts the AMR coding
rate during the call on the basis of this coding rate adjustment threshold.
Dependency
AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the downlink depends on the following
features:
AMR coding rate threshold adaptive adjustment on the uplink and downlink depends on any
of the following features:
GBFD-115501 AMR FR
GBFD-115502 AMR HR
GBFD-115507 WB AMR
This feature does not take effect if any of the following feature is used in a call:
GBFD-115701 TFO
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

15
1.2.6 GBFD-115507 WB AMR

Availability
Summary
Wideband AMR (WB AMR) is a coding scheme that significantly improves the speech quality.
WB AMR supports the rates of 6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s.
Benefits
Provides better speech quality than the narrowband AMR.
Increases the operators' revenue because the speech quality improves and subscribers
tend to spend more time on calls.
Attracts subscribers to wireless networks from fixed networks because the WB AMR
speech quality is better than that of PSTN.
Description
WB AMR can significantly improve speech quality. With WB AMR, the sampling rate is
increased to 16 kHz and the speech frequency range is extended to 50 Hz7 kHz. WB AMR
provides clear and loud voice and high-quality speech compared with the narrowband AMR
(sampling rate: 8 kHz; speech frequency range: 2003400 Hz.
WB AMR uses the Guassian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK) mode and supports the rates of
6.60 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, and 12.65 kbit/s on full-rate TCHs.
End-to-end WB AMR calls are required to achieve ideal speech quality. A one-end WB AMR
call requires PCM coding and decoding twice, which adversely affects the speech quality.
When the end-to-end WB AMR and the TFO are used together, a call only requires coding
once, which helps maintain good speech quality. If an end-to-end WB AMR call cannot be set
up, the BSC will set up an AMR FR call instead of a one-end WB AMR call because the
speech quality and robustness of an AMR FR call is better than a one-end WB AMR call.
Huawei BSS equipment supports the WB AMR feature in Abis over TDM, Abis over IP, and
Abis over HDLC transmission modes.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

16
None
MSs must support this feature. The MGW/MSC server must support this feature.
1.3 Voice Capacity

1.3.1 GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
Availability
Summary
This feature reduces the speech coding rate to half the full-rate speech coding rate using a new
speech coding algorithm. In this manner, a physical channel carrying the service of one MS is
able to carry the services of two MSs.
Benefits
This feature enables operators to expand the network capacity and improve the frequency
usage without increasing the hardware investment. In addition, this feature enables an E1 to
carry a higher traffic volume.
Description
With the increase of GSM subscribers, the frequency resources of the existing GSM network
become insufficient. The half-rate service helps increase the number of speech channels
configured for one TRX. This increases the frequency usage without greatly reducing the
voice quality and expands the network capacity without increasing the hardware investment.
The half-rate service saves resources in the following aspects:
Saving resources on the Um interface

The half-rate speech coding rate is reduced to half the full-rate speech coding rate using
a new coding algorithm. In addition, multiframes on the Um interface are used by two
MSs: One MS receives the even-numbered multiframes and the other MS receives the
odd-numbered multiframes. In this manner, a physical channel that supports one MS in
the full-rate service can carry two MSs in the half-rate service. This requires fewer
timeslots, reducing the entire network interference.
Saving resources on the Abis interface

In half-rate service, one 16 kbit/s channel carries two calls on the Abis terrestrial circuit.
In this manner, a higher traffic volume is carried on the terrestrial link. The load on the
radio signaling link (RSL), however, is heavy because one TRX carries a higher traffic
volume. Therefore, when configuring signaling multiplexing, use the 2:1 mode instead of
the 4:1 mode.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

17
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
The half-rate service is enhanced to save resources on the Ater interface.
When the Flex Ater feature is enabled, the 8 kbit/s circuit is allocated to the half-rate call over
the Ater interface. In this manner, the transmission resources on the Ater interface are saved.
GBSS8.1
Half-rate channels are preferentially allocated when transmission resource congestion

occurs on the Abis interface.
Half-rate channels are allocated based on the resource congestion condition on the Abis
interface. The load on the Abis interface is calculated in real time. When the resources on the
Abis interface are congested, the BSC preferentially allocates a half-rate speech channel to a
call to relieve the resource congestion.
Dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered when resource
congestion occurs on the Um or Abis interface.
The dynamic conversion between half-rate and full-rate channels is triggered based on the
resource congestion condition on the Um or Abis interface. When the resources are congested,
Certain full-rate calls are converted to half-rate calls to relieve the congestion.
Dependency
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater
MSs and the MSC must support this feature.
It is recommended that this feature be used with the VAMOS features introduction service.
1.3.2 GBFD-113402 Dynamic Adjustment Between FR and HR

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

18
Summary
With this feature, full-rate (FR) channels and half-rate (HR) channels are dynamically
converted to automatically adapt to the proportions of FR channels and HR channels in a cell.
This prevents the situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type
of channel is idle.
Benefits
Improves the channel usage because channels are adjusted according to the requirement
of the call.
Improves the voice quality because calls are handed over from half-rate channels to
full-rate channels when the traffic volume is low.
Increase cell capacity because calls are handed over from full-rate channels to half-rate
channels when channels in a cell are insufficient.
Description
If HR channels are configured, the HR and FR channels are dynamically converted to
automatically adapt to the proportions of FR and HR channels in a cell. This prevents the
situation in which one type of channel is congested whereas the other type of channel is idle.
In addition, this helps control the proportions of FR and HR channels in a cell by using related
parameters.
During a call, channels are allocated based on the resources in the MS, MSC, and BSC. If an
HR channel is required but is unavailable, an FR channel is converted into two HR channels.
If an FR channel is required but is unavailable, two HR channels are converted into an FR
channel.
Each time a call is released, the channel attributes are not changed. If the load of a cell is
normal, call automatic adjustment ensures that the proportions of FR and HR channels in the
cell are maintained. If the load of a cell is very heavy or light, HR and FR channels are
converted back and forth.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
During call establishment, the network assigns a half-rate or a full-rate channel to a call based
on the usage of cell resources. If a call lasts for a long period of time, the usage of cell
resources may change:
If the TCH usage is high during call establishment, a half-rate channel is assigned to the
call. After the call lasts for a period, many calls have been released and the TCH usage
decreases. In this case, TCHs in the cell are sufficient and a full-rate channel can be
assigned to the call to improve the voice quality.
If the TCH usage is low during call establishment, a full-rate channel may be assigned to
a call. After the call lasts for a period, many calls access the cell and the TCH usage
increases. In this case, available TCHs in the cell are insufficient.
If this feature is enabled, the half-rate or full-rate channels for established calls can be
adjusted based on the usage of cell resources. The details are as follows:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

19
When the TCHs in a cell are sufficient, full-rate channels are preferably assigned to new
calls and poor-quality calls are handed over from half-rate channels to full-rate channels,
This improves voice quality.
When the TCHs in a cell are insufficient, half-rate channels are preferably assigned to
new calls and good-quality calls are handed over from full-rate channels to half-rate
channels. This increases cell capacity.
Before enabling this feature, ensure that the Half Rate Speech feature has been enabled.
GBSS14.0
If a policy is used that preferentially allocates HR channels to an MS, the BSC determines
whether the receive level is higher than the preset threshold during a handover or a channel
assignment. If the receive level is higher than the threshold, the BSC allocates HR channels to
the MS. If the receive level is lower than the threshold, the BSC preferentially allocates FR
channels to the MS.
Dependency
GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
None
1.3.3 GBFD-115830 VAMOS

Availability
Summary
Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user Orthogonal Subchannels (VAMOS) enables two
users to be multiplexed onto one half-rate (HR) channel to increase network capacity.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

20
Benefits
In a network where refarming is applied and speech channels are insufficient, the GSM
network capacity can be increased by using software without changing the existing GSM
network architecture. Assuming that the SAIC MS penetration rate is 100% and the 4x3
frequency reuse pattern is used, VAMOS increases the network capacity by 20%.
Description
VAMOS is a technology to increase GSM network capacity. The network capacity is
increased by using HR channels and can be increased further by VAMOS applied on the FR
channels. VAMOS introduces a new modulation mode and training sequence, which imposes
new requirements on MSs. Tests tell that the VAMOS performance depends on the penetration
rate of SAIC MSs and the frequency reuse pattern in use.
VAMOS reduces network quality while increasing network capacity. The reduced network
quality should be tolerable for operators because the quality standards for a GSM network
with VAMOS are lower than those for a legacy GSM network, as defined in 3GPP
specifications. The following table lists the VAMOS gains.
Frequency Reuse
Pattern
4x3
3x3
1x3
SAIC MS Ratio (%)
VAMOS Gain (%)
50%
10%-15%
75%
15%-22%
100%
20%-30%
50%
7%-12%
75%
10%-18%
100%
15%-25%
50%
5%-10%
75%
7%-15%
100%
10%-20%
The preceding table tells that the network capacity is not increased when a tight frequency
reuse pattern is used. Therefore, it is recommended that VAMOS be enabled only when a
loose frequency reuse pattern is used.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
The radio resource management (RRM) algorithm is optimized for networks deployed with
VAMOS. The optimization reduces the negative impact of VAMOS on the call drop rate and
handover success rate. In addition, the channel preemption and timeslot combination policies
are modified to reduce the negative impact of VAMOS on ongoing services while increasing
resource usage efficiency.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

21
Dependency
GBFD-115502 AMR HR or GBFD-113401 Half Rate Speech
GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis (in TDM transmission mode)
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 (in IP transmission mode)
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
GBFD-113501 A5/1 and A5/2 Ciphering Algorithm
GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm
GBFD-114803 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX)-Uplink
GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO
GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell
GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization
GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell
MSs must support this feature.
1.3.4 GBFD-115831 Mute SAIC MS Identification

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

22
Summary
The Mute SAIC MS Identification feature identifies SAIC-capable MSs that do not report
their SAIC capability to the BSS so that the MSs can use VAMOS.
Benefits
This feature helps increase the number of MSs that use VAMOS, increasing network capacity.
Description
Some mute SAIC MSs support SAIC but do not report the SAIC capability to the BSS. As a
result, the number of MSs that can be multiplexed by VAMOS is smaller than what it actually
is, and therefore the network capacity is limited.
This feature helps distinguish SAIC-capable MSs from SAIC-incapable MSs so that the
SAIC-capable MSs can use VAMOS.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
VAMOS is enhanced for the Mute SAIC MS Identification feature in GBSS13.0. The M2000
is used to share SAIC MS capability data between BSCs. This minimizes the impact of the
Mute SAIC MS Identification feature on KPIs and improves system reliability by reducing
manual workload.
Dependency
Dependency on other GBSS/RAN features
This feature is used with the following feature:
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature:
GBFD-115701 TFO
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

23
1.3.5 GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution

Availability
Summary
The VAMOS Call Drop Solution feature prevents call drops when MSs are deployed with
VAMOS so that system capacity and voice quality are not affected.
Benefits
This feature increases network capacity while maintaining normal services.
Description
Mainstream multi-mode MSs report the SAIC capability to the BSS. Call drops, however,
frequently occur when the MSs use VAMOS. Tests tell that this is caused by defective
automatic frequency correction (AFC) of the MSs during VAMOS multiplexing. This feature
prevents call drops of SAIC-capable MSs.
This feature is implemented as follows:
1.
The BSS distinguishes normal SAIC-capable MSs from the defective ones.
2.
The BSS takes different measures to process the normal and defective SAIC-capable
MSs to ensure that the defective ones do not experience call drops during VAMOS
multiplexing.
This feature prevents call drops of SAIC-capable MSs without affecting system capacity and
voice quality.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
VAMOS is enhanced for the VAMOS Call Drop Solution feature in GBSS13.0. The M2000 is
used to share SAIC MS capability data between BSCs. This minimizes the impact of the
VAMOS Call Drop Solution feature on KPIs and improves system reliability by reducing
manual workload.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

24
This feature must be used with the following feature:

GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-115701 TFO
1.4 Cell Broadcast

1.4.1 GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
Availability
Summary
The short message service cell broadcast (SMSCB) is a teleservice (TS23). By using this
service, all the MSs in a specified area can periodically receive messages.
Benefits
The SMSCB increases the revenue of operators by providing weather forecast, stock
information, and sales promotion information based on the MS location.
Description
The SMSCB is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a
specified area. Based on different settings, the MSs can continuously or discontinuously
receive short messages, such as weather forecast and traffic information.
The SMSCB allows all the MSs in a specified area to receive short messages. The area may
cover one or more cells, or the entire PLMN. The cell broadcast database (CDB) of the BSC
manages and schedules the short messages from the cell broadcast center (CBC). Then, the
BSC sends the short messages to the BTS. The BTS then periodically broadcasts the messages
to all the MSs in a specified area.
The CDB receives and stores the short messages, schedules and sends the messages according
to a certain algorithm, and responds to the query from the CBC.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

25
MSs can receive the short messages in DRX mode. Specifically, the BSC sends a scheduling
message to notify the MSs that no short message is being sent. Therefore, the MSs do not
need to detect the messages continuously, reducing the power consumption.
The SMSCB supports the BTS flow control. The CDB schedules the order of sending short
messages, but the BTS implements the sending of the messages. Each TRX of the BTS
maintains one message buffer and periodically sends the cell broadcast short message on a
specified channel. If the BTS cannot send the messages in a timely manner, the BTS sends a
LOAD IND message to the BSC, reporting the out-of-synchronization situation. By
controlling the BTS flow, the CDB maintains the balance of the cell broadcast system and
therefore meets the requirements of the message sending.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast
The CBC should be used.
1.4.2 GBFD-113602 Simplified Cell Broadcast

Availability
Summary
The Simplified Cell Broadcast feature uses a built-in cell broadcast processing module in the
BSC when a cell broadcast center (CBC) is not used.
Benefits
This feature reduces the operator's CAPEX because it supports the most commonly used
standard cell broadcast services with low equipment costs and low OM costs.
Description
With the short message service cell broadcast (SMSCB) function, short messages are
broadcast to all MSs in one or several cells, or even in the entire public land mobile network
(PLMN). The MSs can receive the broadcast messages continuously or discontinuously.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

26
Generally, a CBC is responsible for managing and scheduling SMSCB messages.

Huawei introduces the Simplified Cell Broadcast feature. With this feature, a built-in cell
broadcast processing module in the BSC is used to implement the simplified cell broadcast
function, reducing the equipment costs.
This feature is implemented to broadcast messages such as cell names, weather forecast, and
social welfare messages. The detailed functions are described as follows:
Information broadcast
Information is broadcast, such as BTS names, cell names, weather forecast, and any
character string with a maximum of 80 characters.
Information broadcast on schedule

Cell broadcast messages are sent at specified intervals during a specified period of time.
Information management
MML commands are used to:
-
Start or stop sending broadcast messages in specified cells or all cells.
Stop sending a specified cell broadcast message.
Query the cell broadcast status.
A maximum of 16 cell broadcast short messages can be sent simultaneously in a cell.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
A maximum of 64 cell broadcast short messages can be sent simultaneously in a cell.
Dependency
GBFD-113601 Short Message Service Cell Broadcast (TS23)
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

27
1.5 GSM Trunking

1.5.1 GBFD-510301 Public Voice Group Call Service
Availability
Summary
The public voice group call service (VGCS) adopts the half-duplex mode and provides voice
services for a group of predefined MSs in a predefined area.
Benefits
With this feature, operators can provide a new half-duplex voice service for a group of
subscribers to meet the requirement of dispatching services. This service is called GSM
Digital Trunking or Public Access Mobile Radio (PAMR). This service focuses on enterprise
users and government users. Compared with the multiparty communication service, VGCS
greatly reduces the occupancy of radio channels and improves the usage of radio channel
resources.
Description
VGCS simultaneously provides voice services for a group of MSs in a predefined area in
half-duplex mode.
The network side defines the group call number, group members and coverage area. The MS
that has the permission can dial the group call number to originate a group call. All the group
members within the coverage area can be informed to join the VGCS call. One of the group
members can press and hold PTT on the mobile phone to speak to others. During this period,
other group members can listen but cannot speak by pressing PTT. After the speaker releases
PTT, other group members can speak by pressing PTT. After the call is complete, the
originator terminates the VGCS call by pressing the on-hook key and then all the group
members hang up.
In addition, the VGCS provides dispatcher services. The dispatcher is a special subscriber
defined by the network side and can be of the fixed network or the mobile network. During a
VGCS call, the dispatcher has the permission to speak at any time, and originates or
terminates a VGCS call authorized by the network side.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

28

GBFD-118601 Abis over IP in GBSS12.0 and earlier (not exclusive in GBSS13.0 or later)
The MSC, HLR, and MSs must support this feature.
1.5.2 GBFD-510303 Late Group Channel Assignment

Availability
Summary
With this feature, after a voice group call service (VGCS) call is established:
If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the predefined coverage area,
the BSC does not allocate any VGCS traffic channel to the cell.
If a group member accesses the cell during the VGCS call, the BSC allocates a VGCS
traffic channel to the cell.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves radio channel resources when operators promote VGCS-based
services.
Description
During a VGCS call, the voice of the talker is sent to group members on the VGCS channel in
the cell. If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the coverage area, the
VGCS channel is actually idle.
With this feature, the network side sends a VGCS call notification periodically in each cell
within the coverage area and the cell in which group members exist will receive the MS
response. Then, the network side allocates a VGCS channel to the cell and instructs the group
members to join the VGCS call. The network side does not allocate VGCS channels to cells
that do not respond to the VGCS call notification.
In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs in all the cells within the coverage
area. If no group member involved in the VGCS call is in the cell due to some reason, for
example, an outgoing cell handover, the network side reclaims the VGCS channel allocated to
the cell.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

29

1.5.3 GBFD-510305 Single Channel Group Call Originating

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the originating cell needs only one TCH when a VGCS/VBS call is
originated.
Benefits
Improves the usage of frequency resources.
Reduces the TCH congestion rate during peak hours.
Enhances the network QoS.
Description
When a VGCS/VBS call is originated, the originating cell requires two TCHs by default: one
is a VGCS/VBS channel and the other is used for the originator to speak before a VGCS/VBS
call is set up. After the VGCS/VBS call is set up, the network switches the originator to the
VGCS/VBS channel and then releases the TCH that is allocated initially. This is called
dual-channel group call originating.
In single channel group call originating mode, the BSS directly switches the VGCS/VBS
originator from the SDCCH to the VGCS/VBS channel. In the VGCS/VBS originating phase,
no more TCHs are occupied.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

30

1.5.4 GBFD-510306 Talker Identification

Availability
Summary
As a supplementary function of GSM Digital Trunking services, the Talker Identification
feature enables the MSs involved in a VGCS call to display the talker's information in real
time.
Benefits
This feature enables group members to obtain the information of the current talker in real time
and determine whether to initiate PTT preemption within the group.
Description
Similar to the Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP) function, this feature enables
the MSs involved in a VGCS call to display in real time the talker's information such as
telephone number, subscriber name, and priority within the group.
During a VGCS/VBS call, the network side periodically broadcasts the talker's information
including the MSISDN of the talker and the priorities of group members in the cell within the
coverage area. After receiving the information, the MSs of other subscribers display the
information of the current talker, including the MSISDN or subscriber name in the phonebook,
and the priority within the group. After the talker terminates the conversation, the network
side periodically broadcasts the information without the content of the talker and then other
group members clear the information displayed on the MSs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

31

This feature complies with Huawei proprietary protocol and must be supported by the
MSC/VLR, HLR, and MSs.
1.5.5 GBFD-510307 Group Call EMLPP

Availability
Summary
The Group call eMLPP feature implements service/resource preemption to ensure timely
services for high-priority VGCS/VBS/point-to-point call subscribers.
Benefits
Allows operators to provide the VGCS on different levels, improving the user
satisfaction.
Enables operators to quickly respond to requirements during emergencies, guaranteeing

the communications services and fulfilling their social responsibilities.
Description
The enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) feature allows the network to
use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry for the calls with
different priorities when network resources are occupied. Group call eMLPP are categorized
into seven priorities: A, B, and 0-4.
A: highest, for network internal use
B: for network internal use
0: for subscription
1: for subscription
2: for subscription
3: for subscription
4: lowest, for subscription
where A and B are the highest priorities, which are used for network maintenance. When
defining subscribers, operators must define the eMLPP priorities for the subscribers and the
VGCS group.
Group call eMLPP consists of service preemption and resource preemption.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

32
Service preemption
During a VGCS call or point-to-point call, the MS determines whether to accept a new
call (including a paging to the MS or a VGCS/VBS call) based on the priorities of these
two calls. If the MS supports service preemption, the MS determines whether to join a
high-priority call.
Resource preemption
If network resources (such as processing capabilities, signaling channels, and traffic
channels) are insufficient, high-priority calls do not release network resources. In this
case, new high-priority calls can queue or even preempt the resources occupied by
low-priority calls. For details, see the description of the GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi
Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP) feature.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
1.5.6 GBFD-510308 Fast Group Call Setup

Availability
Summary
The Fast Group Call Setup feature optimizes the signaling process for setting up VGCS/VBS
calls and the related data configurations to shorten the time for setting up VGCS/VBS calls.
Benefits
This feature ensures the VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency on some special occasions and
meets the requirements of VGCS/VBS subscribers.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

33
Description
On some special occasions, the time of VGCS/VBS setup needs to be shortened to ensure the
VGCS/VBS scheduling efficiency. To shorten the time of setting up VGCS/VBS calls, the
signaling process for setting up VGCS/VBS calls and the related data configurations are
optimized.
Immediate assignment optimization
In fast group call setup mode, the SABM frame contains the IMMEDIATE SETUP message
when an MS originates a VGCS call. Therefore, the subsequent SETUP procedure can be
omitted and the time of setting up VGCS calls is shortened. The BSS optimizes the channel
assignment procedure by using the "Immediate TCH Assignment" and "Immediate
Assignment Optimization" signaling procedures. In addition, the BSS simplifies the signaling
interworking between the BSC and the BTS before the BSS sends the immediate assignment
command to the MS. At the same time, the MS sets up a link on the TCH more quickly
because the TCH bandwidth is far greater than the SDCCH bandwidth.
Notification channel (NCH) block number optimization
Configuring a large number of blocks occupied by the NCH in a cell ensures that messages
are quickly sent over the Um interface to speed up the VGCS call setup.
Other procedure optimization
Omitting some procedures such as authentication, ciphering, and TMSI reassignment speeds
up the VGCS call setup.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
1.5.7 GBFD-510309 Group Call Reliability Enhancing

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

34
Summary
With this feature, the BTS still supports the VGCS/VBS calls for specified fixed group
numbers within the coverage area even when the BTS is disconnected from the network.
Benefits
This feature enables operators to provide VGCS/VBS services in the area covered by the BTS
even when the BTS is disconnected from the network due to accidents or disasters. This
improves user experience and brand image of the product.
Description
In addition to the system-specific reliability mechanisms such as active/standby switchover
and resource pool, Huawei GBSS VGCS/VBS also provides the fault fallback for the
VGCS/VBS feature to improve its reliability.
When a BTS is disconnected from the network, the BTS enters the fault fallback mode and
supports the VGCS/VBS within the coverage area. In addition, a single cell or several cells
can be configured under a BTS. The BTS automatically switches to the normal working mode
after the transmission recovers.
In fault fallback mode, the BTS initiates a VGCS call that is fixedly configured if the
transmission is interrupted. Then, subscribers can seize the uplink to talk to the subscribers in
other groups within the BTS coverage area. The VGCS call, however, cannot be stopped so
that high-priority calls can be set up automatically when the transmission is interrupted.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

35
1.5.8 GBFD-510302 Public Voice Broadcast Service

Availability
Summary
Public voice broadcast service (VBS) uses the simplex mode to provide point-to-multipoint
voice services for a group of predefined subscribers in a predefined area.
Benefits
This feature enables operators to provide a new broadcast-based voice service for subscribers
and therefore increases the revenue.
Description
VBS is a special type of VGCS. After the network side defines the VBS call number, group
members, and coverage area, the MS permitted can dial the VBS number to initiate a VBS
call. All the group members within the coverage area are informed of the VBS call and join
the VBS call. Only the originator can talk during a VBS call. The originator can talk without
pressing PTT during the call and other members can hear the originator's voice. After the call
is complete, the originator terminates the VBS call by pressing the on-hook key and then all
the group members hang up.
In addition, the VBS provides dispatcher services. The dispatcher is a special fixed-line or
mobile subscriber defined by the network side. The dispatcher can originate or terminate a
VBS call, as authorized by the network side. If the dispatcher is not the originator of the VBS
call, the dispatcher cannot talk during the call.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

36
1.5.9 GBFD-510304 Late Broadcast Channel Assignment

Availability
Summary
After a VBS call is established, if no group member involved in the call is in the cell within
the predefined coverage area, the VBS traffic channel is not assigned. If a group member
accesses the cell during the VBS call, then the network side assigns a VBS traffic channel for
the call.
Benefits
This feature effectively saves radio channel resources when operators promote VBS-based
services.
Description
During a VBS call, the originator's voice is sent to other group members on the VBS channel.
If no group member involved in the call is in the cell within the coverage area, the VBS
channel is actually idle.
With this feature, the network side sends a VBS call notification periodically in each cell
within the coverage area and the cell in which group members exist will receive the MS
response. Then, the network side assigns a VBS channel for the cell and instructs the group
members to join the VBS call. The network does not assign a VBS channel cells that do not
receive any response.
In addition, the network side periodically detects the MSs in all the cells within the coverage
area during a VBS call. If no group member involved in the VBS call exists in a cell due to
some reason, for example, an outgoing cell handover, the network side releases the VGCS
channel assigned to the cell.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

37
1.5.10 GBFD-510310 GSM-T Relay

Availability
Summary
The BSC uses the call differentiation mechanism and forwards trunk calls to the trunk server
so that the equipment on the radio access side supports trunk services.
Benefits
This feature enables telecom operators can use the existing radio networks to provide trunk
services and therefore provides the following benefits:
Eliminate the need for an independent network.
Decreases the radio network investment.
Improves the radio channel usage.
Description
This feature is a solution for quickly achieving the trunk function by using the existing GSM
network. The following figure shows the network topology.
Existing core
network
Public
network
call
GSM trunk
server
Trunk call
Forward
Existing radio
network
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

38
When a subscriber initiates a call, the BSC determines whether it is a trunk call or public
network point-to-point call based on the signaling. If it is a trunk call, the BSC forwards it to
the trunk server. If it is a public network point-to-point call, the BSC forwards it to the MSC
on the existing network so that the public network point-to-point call can be processed
properly. The trunk server does not affect public network services because it is independent of
the MSC on the existing network.
This feature applies to Huawei wireless inventory markets as long as one core network is
deployed and the BSC software is upgraded. This enables fast network construction and
requires low costs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
1.6 LCS
1.6.1 GBFD-115404 Lb Interface
Availability
Summary
Huawei BSS supports the standardized Lb interface and the interconnection between Huawei
BSC and the stand-alone Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) to provide the MS location
services (LCS). The location services can be implemented in CELL ID+TA or assisted Global
Positioning System (AGPS) mode.
Benefits
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

39
Provide LCSs for MSs.
Increase the operators' revenue because the operators can provide various LCSs for an
MS based on the MS location. These LCSs include weather forecasts, trip scheduling,
emergency assistance, stock information, business planning, and transportation
information.
Description
The Lb interface is a standardized interface between the BSC and the SMLC. The SMLC
performs functions such as selecting the location mode and calculating the MS location based
on the measurement results provided by the MS or BSC.
Huawei BSS supports the standardized Lb interface, and therefore can be interconnected with
the SMLC from other vendors to provide LCSs in CELL ID+TA or AGPS mode. The Lb
interface complies with 3GPP TS 48.071, 3GPP TS 49.031, 3GPP TS 44.031, and 3GPP TS
03.71.
Figure 1-1 shows the role of the SMLC in a network.
Figure 1-1 Role of the SMLC in a network
HLR
BTS
BSC
BTS
MSC/
VLR
GMLC
LCS
client
Lb
SMLC
Huawei BSS supports message tracing on the Lb interface and provides the performance
counters related to the LCSs. Huawei BSS supports flow control on LCSs. Specifically, when
the stand-alone SMLC is overloaded or when the number of received location requests
exceeds the predefined threshold, the BSC rejects certain location requests to ensure the
normal operation of the location system.
Generally, Huawei BSC is interconnected to only one SMLC. When the RAN Sharing feature
is enabled, Huawei BSC can be interconnected to four SMLCs from four different vendors.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
The Lb Interface feature supports LCSs in U-TDOA mode only for tests.
Huawei GBSS is used with a Type B location measurement unit (LMU) to provide
high-precision Lb-based LCSs in U-TDOA mode. LCSs in U-TDOA mode are only supported
by a Type B LMU.
LCSs in U-TDOA mode are applied in the following scenarios:
1.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Abis over TDM+Lb over TDM

40
In this scenario, this feature must be used with the GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent
Connection feature.
2.
Abis over IP+Lb over IP
The SMLC, not the BSC, manages and directly communicates with the LMU. The BSC
performs only transparent transmission. The LMU and SMLC must be provided by the same
vendor.
Dependency
GBFD-115402 BSS-Based LCS (Cell ID + TA)
MSs must support the AGPS LCSs.
The CN must support the LCSs.
LCSs in U-TDOA mode are only supported by a Type B LMU.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

41
1.6.2 GBFD-510902 High-Precision TA

Availability
Summary
This feature improves the precision of the timing advance (TA) value reported by the BTS
from 1 to 0.125. This enables the BSC to obtain a more precise geographical distribution of
the terminals and traffic.
Benefits
This feature facilitates subsequent network planning and optimization, such as access control,
site selection, and service promotion.
Description
By performing bottom-layer demodulation and using the synchronization optimization
algorithm, the BTS changes the precision of the TA value from 1 to 0.125. In addition, the
BTS adopts the enhanced filtering algorithm that is based on multiple sampling points within
a measurement report (MR) and the slide window filtering between MRs. This significantly
decreases TA deviation caused by multipath propagation and increases the precision of TA
values in the MRs and traffic statistics.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

42
1.6.3 GBFD-511701 Radio Measurement Data Interface for

Navigation
Availability
Summary
After this feature is enabled, the BSC sends radio measurement data to the Vendor Network
Probe (VNP) on a specified interface, and the VNP sends the data to a navigation service
provider, for example, TomTom. Based on analysis of the radio measurement data, the
navigation service provider provides traffic and congestion information for subscribers.
Benefits
With this feature, the BSC can provide radio measurement data to help telecom operators and
navigation service providers jointly deploy navigation services.
Description
Based on TCP/IP, the BSC reports radio measurement data to the VNP on a specified interface,
which is a private interface currently.
The radio measurement data is reported to the VNP upon any of the following events:
A subscriber accesses a cell under the BSC.
The TA changes.
A cell reselection occurs.
A call connection is released.
An incoming or outgoing BSC handover occurs.
The collection unit (CU) of the navigation service provider then collects radio measurement
data from the VNP.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

43
To support this feature, the BSC can be connected to Huawei Nastar-TS V100R001C00 or
Ericsson VNP. Ericsson VNPs use a message format of Category3 or later versions. Huawei
VNPs use a message format of Category4 versions.
1.7 Voice Priority

1.7.1 GBFD-116001 Resource Reservation
Availability
Summary
This feature reserves a certain number of TCHFs for high-priority users.
Benefits
With this feature, certain channel resources are reserved for high-priority users, which
guarantees the QoS for the VIP users and improves user experience.
This feature provides a segmentation function for operators. With this function, operators can
provide differentiated services for users with different priorities to increase the revenue.
Description
With priority-based resource reservation, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for
high-priority users to ensure the QoS.
Reserving channel resources in a congested cell prevents high-priority users from eMLPP
preemption and queuing. Therefore, the access speeds up and the success rate increases for
high-priority users.
In addition, the half-rate service uses a coding scheme different from that of the full-rate
service. Such services have a coding rate of 5.6 kbit/s and the voice quality deteriorates
accordingly. The MSs used by some low-priority users do not support the half-rate feature.
Consequently, these MSs only occupy the TCHFs and experience high voice quality in the
cells where the half-rate feature is enabled. However, the MSs used by some high-priority
users support the half-rate function. Consequently, these MSs are preferentially allocated the
TCHHs and experience low voice quality. The Resource Reservation feature reserves TCHFs
for these high-priority users to ensure their QoS.
The TCHFs can be reserved for high-priority users as required. During each channel
allocation, if a user's priority is equal to or higher than the defined high priority and the
reserved TCHFs are sufficient, the reserved TCHFs are allocated to the user. If all the reserved
TCHFs have been allocated, the preemption is performed according to the eMLPP rule.
If a user's priority is lower than the defined high priority, the system checks whether the total
number of occupied channels and idle channels is greater than the number of reserved
channels. If yes, the system initiates a common channel allocation. If no, the queuing and
preemption are performed according to the queuing and eMLPP rules.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

44
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature can be used with the GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and
Preemption (EMLPP) feature to effectively improve user benefits and satisfaction.
None
1.7.2 GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and

Preemption (EMLPP)
Availability
Summary
The enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption service (eMLPP) is a supplementary
service that is used to ensure normal conversations for high-priority subscribers by
preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover.
Benefits
This feature ensures the QoS of VIP subscribers and improves their experience.
This feature allows operators to classify subscribers into different categories to provide
different levels of services for subscribers with different priorities, This helps increase
revenue.
Description
The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. The eMLPP service
allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. The network side adopts different
channel assignment policies for the subscribers based on their priorities. If the network is
congested, the calls initiated by high-priority subscribers are processed preferentially.
The eMLPP service requires support from MSs to ensure that subscribers can initiate calls of
different priorities under different situations. Normal conversations of high-priority
subscribers are ensured by preemption, queuing, directed retry, and forced handover. With the
eMLPP service, the high-priority subscribers have an advantage in call setup speed and call
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

45
completion rate over lower-priority subscribers, depending on priority configurations in a

network.
The eMLPP service provides the following mechanisms:
Preemption
The MSC determines whether preemption is allowed. The MSC sends an assignment
request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether preemption
is allowed. If the MSC allows preemption and eMLPP is enabled on the BSC side, the
BSC can forcibly hands over the lowest-priority call to a neighboring cell when TCHs
are congested. This way, resources are released for high-priority calls. However, if
eMLPP is not enabled, the BSC directly releases the resources occupied by any
low-priority call to ensure that high-priority calls can be processed properly.
Queuing
The MSC determines whether queuing is allowed. The MSC sends an assignment
request or handover request message to the BSC to notify the BSC whether queuing is
allowed. If a cell has no idle TCH and the MSC allows queuing, the BSC puts the TCH
request into a queue. When an idle TCH is available, the TCH is allocated to the waiting
call in the queue. When multiple calls are waiting in a queue, the TCH is preferentially
allocated to a high-priority call. If directed retry is allowed, the BSC performs directed
retry before the queue timer expires.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
eMLPP Enhancement:
The preemption and queuing functions are enhanced to further improve the usage of radio
resources.
When an-outgoing BSC better cell handover occurs on a high-priority MS, the BSC notifies
the MSC and the target BSC that they should neither preempt the radio resources that are
allocated to other MSs for the high-priority MS nor queue the high-priority MS. Upon
receiving the incoming-BSC handover request from a high-priority MS, the target BSC
checks the handover type. If the handover is a better cell handover, the target BSC neither
preempts the radio resources that are allocated to other MSs for the high-priority MS nor
queues the high-priority MS. This prevents the high-priority MS from preempting the radio
resources that are allocated to a low-priority MS when the serving cell can provide services
for the high-priority MS.
When an intra-BSC handover (any handover other than better cell handover) occurs on a
high-priority MS, the BSC can preempt the radio resources that are allocated to a low-priority
MS for the high-priority MS. In addition, the high-priority MS can be queued. In this manner,
the BSC ensures the speech quality of the high-priority MS by preempting the radio resources
that are allocated to a low-priority MS when the serving cell cannot provide good services for
the high-priority MS.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

46

None
The MSC and HLR must support this feature.
1.7.3 GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

Availability
Summary
With this feature, flow control is started when service congestion occurs in the GBSC so that
calls initiated in VIP cells are preferentially processed. This ensures normal operation of the
GBSC and maintains the call setup success rate for VIP subscribers.
Benefits
This feature helps operators maintain the speech quality of calls made by VIP users even if the
BSC system is overloaded because of burst traffic in areas populated with VIP users, such as
central business districts (CBDs), saloon bars, and airports. This feature therefore improves
the quality of service (QoS).
Description
The GBSC system is overloaded if MSs initiate a large number of MS-originated calls or the
core network initiates a large number of paging messages within a short period. To prevent the
overload and ensure the normal operation of the GBSC system, the GBSC performs flow
control and discards some access requests and paging messages.
Operators can divide the cells under the BSC into VIP cells and non-VIP cells. When the
GBSC system is overloaded, the call requests initiated in the VIP cells are preferentially
processed. The call requests initiated in the non-VIP cells are processed according to the
common flow control algorithm (GBFD-111705 GSM Flow Control).
Enhancement
None
Dependency
It is recommended that the following features work together:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

47
GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority

GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority
The former one controls uplink flow, and the latter one controls downlink flow.
None
1.7.4 GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority

Availability
Summary
Based on the user priority information in eMLPP, the GBSC adopts different flow control
policies for users in case of network congestion. This ensures service availability for
high-priority users.
Benefits
This feature ensures service availability for high-priority users in case of traffic bursts.
Description
When congestion occurs, the BSC determines whether a user is a VIP user based on the user
priority in eMLPP. The BSC preferentially processes the paging messages from VIP users.
The BSC processes the paging messages from non-VIP users according to the common flow
control algorithm.
To protect the services of high-priority users from being affected by flow control, the GBSC
uses the priority information in eMLPP to identify the signaling priority in flow control. The
signaling of high-priority users will not be affected by flow control, whereas the signaling of
low-priority users may be discarded due to flow control.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-115001 Enhanced Multi Level Precedence and Preemption (EMLPP)
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

48
It is recommended that the following features work together:

GBFD-115002 Flow Control Based on Cell Priority
GBFD-115003 Flow control based on User priority
The former one controls uplink flow, and the latter one controls downlink flow.
None
1.7.5 GBFD-511002 Access Control Class (ACC)

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC can control the number of MSs accessing the network at a certain
time by allowing only the MSs of a certain ACC class to access the network. In this manner,
the BSS overload or MSC overload caused by numerous MSs' simultaneous access to the
network can be prevented. This feature uses a sliding window mechanism to enable the MSs
of all ACC classes to access the network. Therefore, radio services are available for all MSs,
especially in emergency cases.
Benefits
In emergency cases such as natural disasters, the traffic volume in the network sharply
increases. It may increase to an extent that far exceeds the network capacity. In such a case,
users have difficulties in making calls, and the radio network may even be down. The Access
Control Class (ACC) feature controls the number of MSs accessing the network in emergency
cases by allowing only the MSs of a certain ACC class to access the network. It ensures the
normal operation of the radio network.
Description
When a subscriber is registered with the GSM network, it is assigned a common ACC class
and a special ACC class. The MSs of a certain ACC class are informed of being allowed or of
not being allowed to access the network by the GSM system through system information. The
ACC feature uses a window sliding mechanism to allow only the MSs of a certain ACC class
to access the network at a certain time. The size of the sliding window and the speed of
window motion depend on the operator's configuration policy.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

49
None
None
None
1.8 CS domain data service

1.81 GBFD-119405 14.4kbit/s Circuit Switched Data
Availability
Summary
The GBSS equipment supports the transfer of PS services on individual speech channels with
a high rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Benefits
Compared with common CS-based PS services, this feature provides PS services with higher
bandwidth.
Description
Huawei GBSS system supports different types of bearer services specified by GSM
specifications. The GBSS provides lower-layer connections and transmits service data to the
upper layer instead of processing these services. Huawei GBSS system supports the transfer
of the PS services on individual speech channels and the CS-based PS services with a high
rate of 14.4 kbit/s.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

50
The MSC must support this feature.
1.8.2 GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the Huawei GBSS can transmit high speed circuit switched data (HSCSD)
services on up to four TCHs at a rate of up to 57.6 kbit/s.
Benefits
This feature increases the bandwidth for CSD services to support more service types and
improve user experience.
Description
The Huawei GBSS supports multislot binding technology, which binds a maximum of four
TCHs to form a channel group to carry HSCSD services. This increases data transmission
rates from 14.4 kbit/s to 57.6 kbit/s, improving user experience.
The following tables list the HSCSD service rates supported by the Huawei GBSS using
different channel coding modes.
HSCSD service rates using 9.6 kbit/s transparent channel coding mode
Table 1-1 9.6 kbit/s transparent channel coding mode

HSCSD Rate
Binding Mode
9.6 kbit/s
1 x 9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
2 x 9.6 kbit/s
28.8 kbit/s
3 x 9.6 kbit/s
38.4 kbit/s
4 x 9.6 kbit/s
HSCSD service rates using 14.4 kbit/s transparent channel coding mode
Table 1-2 14.4 kbit/s transparent channel coding mode
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
HSCSD Rate
Binding Mode
14.4 kbit/s
1 x 14.4 kbit/s
28.8 kbit/s
2 x 14.4 kbit/s
43.2 kbit/s
3 x 14.4 kbit/s
57.6 kbit/s
4 x 14.4 kbit/s

51
HSCSD service rates using 12 kbit/s non-transparent channel coding mode
Table 1-3 12 kbit/s non-transparent channel coding mode

HSCSD Rate
Binding Mode
12 kbit/s
1 x 12 kbit/s
24 kbit/s
2 x 12 kbit/s
36 kbit/s
3 x 12 kbit/s
48 kbit/s
4 x 12 kbit/s
HSCSD service rates using 14.5 kbit/s non-transparent channel coding mode
Table 1-4 14.5 kbit/s non-transparent channel coding mode

HSCSD Rate
Binding Mode
14.5 kbit/s
1 x 14.5 kbit/s
29.0 kbit/s
2 x 14.5 kbit/s
43.5 kbit/s
3 x 14.5 kbit/s
58 kbit/s
4 x 14.5 kbit/s
Transparent HSCSD calls must satisfy the listed rate requirements. If contiguous idle TCHs
are insufficient in a cell due to congestion, these calls cannot be processed in the cell.
Rates for non-transparent HSCSD calls may change. If contiguous idle TCHs are insufficient
in a cell due to congestion, actual data transmission rates may be lower than the requested
rates. When the cell is idle, additional TCHs are allocated to non-transparent HSCSD calls to
satisfy the requested data rates.
MSs under the Huawei GBSS can initiate the addition or subtraction of TCHs during a
non-transparent HSCSD service process.
Dual-timeslot extended cells do not support HSCSD services. Transparent HSCSD services
cannot be handed over to a dual-timeslot extended cell. If non-transparent HSCSD services
are handed over to such a cell, they have to use a single timeslot.
Currently, no MS supports the 57.6 kbit/s HSCSD service, and therefore this service cannot be
tested.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

52

GBFD-117002 IBCA
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

53
2 Data Services
Data Services
2.1 PS Rate Increase

2.1.1 GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Availability
Summary
The enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) is an enhancement of the GPRS system.
EGPRS uses the 8PSK modulation on the RF layer to increase the maximum rate of a single
channel to 59.2 kbit/s.
EGPRS adopts coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9.
EGPRS modifies the RLC/MAC protocol at the link layer to improve the algorithm for
controlling the link quality.
Benefits
Provides high-speed PS services, increases packet capacity, and reduces the PS delay and
the congestion rate, improving the QoS and user experience.
Fully uses existing frequency resources and reduces the costs per bit, enabling operators
to adopt flexible charging policies.
Provides more multimedia services, attracting more subscribers of PS services and

therefore increasing operators' revenue.
Description
Compared with GSM, Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE) supports a higher
data transmission rate. EDGE provides a set of enhanced standards for the GSM interfaces
and enables the GSM network to carry 3G services. EDGE consists of EGPRS and Enhanced
Circuit-Switched Data (ECSD). EGPRS is an enhancement of the GPRS system. It increases
the rate over packet channels. EGPRS improves the data transmission capability of a single
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

54
2 Data Services
timeslot by adding the 8PSK modulation mode on the Um interface and improves the data
transmission capability of a single user by implementing multislot binding.
Huawei EGPRS has the following characteristics:
2x592
0.36
2x544
54.4
0.76
0.36
2x448
44.8
0.49
1/3
592
544+48
MCS-5
0.37
1/3
MCS-4
1.0
0.53
MCS-3
0.85
0.53
GMSK
12
(kbit/s)
2x6
Data rate
2x12
HCS
MCS-6
Tail Payload
MCS-7
BCS
0.92
Family
MCS-8
Raw Data within

one Radio Block
8PSK
RLC Blocks per

Radio Block (20
ms)
0.36
Mode
Modulation
1.0
Code Rate
MCS-9
Scheme
Header Code Rate
Supports the coding schemes MCS-1 to MCS-9 in the uplink and downlink, as listed in
the following table.
59.2
29.6
27.2
448
22.4
352
17.6
296
14.8
272+24
13.6
MCS-2
0.66
0.53
224
11.2
MCS-1
0.53
0.53
176
8.8
The requirements for the radio transmission quality vary with the transmission rate of the
coding schemes. The higher the transmission rate, the higher the requirements for the radio
transmission quality. During data transmission, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding
scheme based on the radio quality to fully use radio resources and increase the transmission
rate without deteriorating transmission quality.
Currently, the BSS supports nine coding schemes MSC-1 to MCS-9. This feature enables the
BSC to dynamically adjust the uplink rate of the EGPRS user based on the network status.
With this feature, the BSC dynamically adjusts the coding scheme adopted by the PDCH
based on the uplink measurement report (MR) from the BTS. In this manner, the PDCH can
quickly adapt to the changes in the radio condition and therefore the uplink throughput is
increased.
Supports the incremental redundancy (IR) mechanism in the uplink and downlink.
EGPRS adopts two mechanisms for controlling the link quality: link adaptation (LA) and IR.
In addition to the LA mechanism used by GPRS, EGPRS uses the IR mechanism.
The IR mechanism works as follows: Generally, the transmitter uses the coding scheme with a
high rate for data transmission; however, the coding scheme with a high rate always has a
weak protection capability. If incorrect data is received, the transmitter retransmits additional
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

55
2 Data Services
coding information. The receiver combines the new information with the historical
information and then performs decoding. This procedure is repeated until the decoding is
successful.
Supports dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes in the uplink and downlink.
Dynamic adjustment of EGPRS coding schemes is similar to that of GPRS coding schemes.
The GBSS sends system information to an MS. The MS calculates the bit error probability
(BEP) in the downlink and reports the result to the GBSS through the MR. The GBSS then
adjusts the EGPRS coding schemes in the uplink and downlink based on the downlink BEP.
Supports the dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology.
The dynamic additional sub-timeslot technology solves the problem of transmission over the
Abis interface using MCS-3 to MCS-9. This technology statically assigns one main 16 kbit/s
sub-timeslot and dynamically assigns one to three additional 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots to each
PDCH using MCS-3 to MCS-9 on the Abis interface. Using this technology, the BSS that
processes EGPRS services no longer needs to upgrade the hardware of the BTS, BSC, and
PCU to support MCS-3 to MCS-9. In addition, EGPRS maximizes the multiplexing rate over
the Abis interface, saving the investment on the transmission devices over the Abis interface.
The number of 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots varies depending on the coding schemes used by
EGPRS services, as listed in the following table.
Coding Scheme
Number of 16 kbit/s Timeslots Allocated over the

Abis Interface
MCS-1 and MCS-2
MCS-3 to MCS-6
MCS-7
MCS-8 and MCS-9
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The SGSN, GGSN, and MSs must support this feature.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

56
2 Data Services
2.1.2 GBFD-119201 11-Bit EGPRS Access

Availability
Summary
A Packet Channel Request message can be either an 8-bit or 11-bit access burst. This feature
supports the 11-bit EGPRS access. The 11-bit access burst contains the multislot capability of
an MS and therefore enables rapid allocation of more channels. EGPRS MSs support
one-phase 11-bit access. This shortens the access delay.
Benefits
This feature shortens the access delay and increases the access speed of EGPRS MSs,
improving subscriber satisfaction.
Description
With this feature, EGPRS MSs can send 11-bit channel access signaling requests. In this
manner, the system implements only one-phase access. That is, the system can immediately
assign signaling for MSs to establish uplink TBFs and then transmit data. Without this feature,
uplink TBFs can be established only after two-phase access is complete.
Furthermore, this feature shortens the duration for TBF establishment and improves the
performance of small-sized data transmission, such as the Transmission Control Protocol
(TCP) handshake.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

57
2 Data Services
2.1.3 GBFD-119302 Packet Channel Dispatching

Availability
Summary
The GPRS system uses only the GMSK modulation scheme whereas the EGPRS system uses
the GMSK and 8PSK modulation schemes. When EGPRS downlink services and GPRS
uplink services use the same packet channel, the EGPRS downlink data blocks with the USF
should be used to schedule the GPRS uplink services. In this case, the EGPRS downlink data
blocks can use only the GMSK modulation scheme. This greatly affects the downlink
throughput of the EGPRS MS. With this feature, the operator can separate the EGPRS
services from the GPRS services, effectively increasing the downlink throughput of the
EGPRS MS.
Benefits
This feature reduces the probability that the EGPRS services and the GPRS services use the
same channel, increasing the EGPRS service rate, improving the entire network performance,
and enhancing user experience.
Description
Types of Preferred Channels for Packet Services

There are five types of preferred channels: EGPRS dedicated channel, EGPRS preferred
channel, common EGPRS channel, GPRS channel, and non-GPRS channel.
EGPRS dedicated channels serve only EGPRS MSs.
EGPRS preferred channels serve EGPRS MSs in preference to GPRS MSs but can be
used by GPRS MSs when the channels are not occupied by EGPRS MSs. When an
EGPRS MS requests an EGPRS preferred channel, the GPRS MSs that occupy the
EGPRS preferred channels should be transferred to other channels. EGPRS MSs and
GPRS MSs cannot use the same EGPRS preferred channel.
Common EGPRS channels serve either GPRS MSs or EGPRS MSs, whichever occupies
the channel first.
GPRS channels serve GPRS MSs. If a cell is not configured with EGPRS channels,
EGPRS MSs in the cell use these channels to process GPRS services.
Non-GPRS channels are channels that are not used for the PS services.
Channel Allocation Principles

When configuring the channel type on the TRX, you can select the channel type from the
GPRS preferred channel types.
When the BSS allocates PDCHs, the preferred channel type varies with the specific
packet services.
For GPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order:
GPRS channels, common EGPRS channels, and EGPRS preferred channels.
For EGPRS services, the channels are preferentially assigned in the following order:
EGPRS dedicated channels, EGPRS preferred channels, and common EGPRS channels.
Multiplexing of common EGPRS channels may occur when the GPRS MS uses the
uplink channel and the EGPRS MS uses the downlink channel. To avoid this, you can set
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

58
2 Data Services
Allow E Down G Up Switch to Close. If you want to avoid this situation do not
configure common EGPRS channels.
Channels should be used based on the type of the preferred channel. For example, if the
channels on the TRX that supports EGPRS are configured as GPRS channels, these
channels can be used for only GPRS services. EGPRS dedicated channels can be
configured only as static channels whereas the other three preferred channels can be
configured as static or dynamic channels.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
2.1.4 GBFD-119509 GPRS Fast Transmission

Availability
Summary
As defined in the 3GPP specifications, the RLC window size is 64 for GPRS services. With
the GPRS Packet Fast Transmission feature, the RLC window size can be set to a size ranging
from 0 to 127.
Benefits
When some error blocks are transmitted during GPRS downloading services, this feature
effectively increases the downloading rate. Error blocks may be caused by poor Um-interface
quality or tasks such as neighboring measurement (performed by an MS) during data
transmission.
Description
With this feature, a parameter is used to set the RLC window size.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

59
2 Data Services
When the RLC transmit window reaches 64, after the BSC sends an RLC data block in the
NACK state, it continues to send new RLC data blocks until the specified RLC window size
is reached.
When the BSC receives a PACKET DOWNLINK ACK message from an MS, if the MS
confirms that it has not received the earliest RLC data block, the receive window for the MS
does not slide. RLC data blocks sent exceeding the window size (64) are invalid. As a result,
the BSC performs window rollback. If the MS confirms that it has received the earliest RLC
data block, the receive window for the MS has slid. RLC data blocks sent exceeding the
window size (64) are valid. As a result, the transmit window continues to slide.
With the improvement of the MS multislot capability, more channels can be allocated, and
more than 64 data blocks can be sent in a loopback delay. This feature prevents window
stop-and-wait and increases downloading rates when error blocks are transmitted.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
None
2.1.5 GBFD-119503 Early TBF Establishment

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

60
2 Data Services
Summary
The early TBF establishment is a function introduced in 3GPP R7. In the early TBF
establishment feature, the TBF is allocated to the MS prior to data transfer. Therefore, the
service access delay is shortened.
Benefits
In the early TBF establishment feature, the delay of the uplink data is decreased by as much
as hundreds of milliseconds (about the time for TBF establishment) compared with that in the
traditional TBF establishment. This improves user experience of the session services such as
the PoC service and the VoIP service.
Description
The packet transfer delay is a key index of the packet services, particularly the delay sensitive
session services. The early TBF establishment feature supports the pre-allocation of the TBF
before the MS sends data. In this way, the transmission delay of the uplink data is reduced.
Generally, the MS applies for the TBF resources only when the MS has data to transmit. The
BSC then starts to allocate the TBF resources. In the early TBF establishment feature, the
TBF resource application is triggered prior to the data transfer of the MS. The BSC
pre-allocates the uplink TBF resources for the MS and sets the TBF to inactive state. In a
specified period, the MS can send the data directly without the need for establishing the TBF.
After the specified period, the BSC releases the TBF to save the packet transmission
resources.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-119203 Extended Uplink TBF
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

61
2 Data Services
2.1.6 GBFD-119506 GPRS/EGPRS Time slot multiplexing

priority
Availability
Summary
When a GPRS user and an EGPRS user are multiplexed onto the same PDCH, the downlink
rate of the EGPRS user can be increased by adjusting the scheduling priority of the EGPRS
user to a level higher than that of the GPRS user. Based on the downlink rate increase, the
service experience of EGPRS users is improved, and the system throughput is increased.
Benefits
Increases the transmission resource usage, single-timeslot throughput, and EGPRS

service rates.
Improves user experience in PS services and increases the system throughput.
Description
Separation of EGPRS and GPRS services enables the GPRS and EDGE services to be
allocated to GPRS and EDGE channels, respectively. However, GPRS and EGPRS services
may be multiplexed onto the same channel in some circumstances. When this happens, by
setting scheduling weight parameters related to EGPRS and GPRS users in a cell, operators
can adopt different uplink and downlink scheduling strategies for EGPRS users and GPRS
users, thereby improving the service experience of EGPRS users. When an EGPRS user and a
GPRS user are multiplexed onto the same PDCH, the radio block sent in downlink to the
EGPRS user must be in the GMSK modulation mode during the scheduling of the uplink
radio block of the GPRS user. This decreases the downlink rate of the EGPRS user. If the
scheduling priority of the GPRS user is lower than that of the EGPRS user, the number of
times that the downlink radio block of the EGPRS user uses the GMSK modulation mode is
decreased, because scheduling times of the uplink radio block of the GPRS user are less than
the scheduling times of the uplink radio block of the EGPRS user. In addition, the scheduling
times of the downlink radio block of the EGPRS user are more than the scheduling times of
the downlink radio block of the GPRS user. Therefore, the downlink rate of the EGPRS user
and the system throughput are increased.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
When both GPRS and EGPRS services need to be processed on a network, this feature
enables these two types of services to be multiplexed on their own channels.
Compared with GPRS services, EGPRS services require more transmission resources.
Therefore, when EGPRS and GPRS services are multiplexed onto the same channel, they
need to be separated so that EGPRS and GPRS services use transmission resources based on
their own requirements. This increases the transmission resource usage, single-timeslot
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

62
2 Data Services
throughput, and service rates, and avoids the impact of multiplexing using EGPRS services on
the downlink and GPRS services on the uplink on EGPRS services.
Dependency
GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority
GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP
None
2.1.7 GBFD-119401 Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA)

Availability
Summary
EDA helps assign more timeslots in the uplink to the MS, improving the uplink throughput.
Benefits
This feature improves the uplink rate and helps transmit large amount of data in the uplink. In
this way, the user satisfaction is improved.
Description
Generally, the GPRS/EGPRS downlink services outnumber the GPRS/EGPRS uplink services.
However, in some cases, a higher uplink bandwidth is required; for example, a large-sized
email is sent through the GPRS/EGPRS. The EDA feature enables a single MS to be assigned
with four timeslots in the uplink. If the MS high multislot classes feature is supported, the MS
with the high multislot class 34 can be assigned with five timeslots in the uplink, meeting the
high bandwidth requirements in the uplink.
EDA is based on the uplink dynamic allocation. The network assigns multiple timeslots in the
uplink to the MS. The MS listens to all the assigned PDCHs. When the MS hears the assigned
USF on the assigned PDCH, the MS uses the uplink block corresponding to this PDCH and
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

63
2 Data Services
the uplink block corresponding to the assigned PDCH with a greater timeslot number. Once
the MS is able to send uplink blocks, it will not listen to the following assigned channels.
Therefore, the MS can use more uplink channels.
The uplink extended dynamic allocation requires the support from the MS. The MS will
indicate whether it supports GPRS uplink extended dynamic allocation and EGPRS uplink
extended dynamic allocation through the message containing the information about radio
access capability.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
2.1.8 GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes

Availability
Summary
High multislot classes ensure that a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink or downlink are
assigned to a single MS, improving the uplink or downlink throughput of a single MS.
Benefits
The BSS supports the MS with a high multislot class of 30 to 34. A maximum of five
timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If an MS is of the high multislot class 34,
a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. Therefore, compared
with four timeslots in the uplink or downlink, the throughput is increased by 25%.
Description
The BSS supports the MS with high multislot classes from 30 to 34. A maximum of five
timeslots on the downlink can be assigned to an MS. If an MS is of the high multislot class 34,
a maximum of five timeslots in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. For a GPRS MS, the
maximum data rate increases from 85 kbit/s to 107 kbit/s (the throughput at RLC in theory);
for an EGPRS MS, the maximum data rate increases from 236 kbit/s to 296 kbit/s (the
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

64
2 Data Services
throughput at RLC in theory). The total number of timeslots on both the uplink and downlink
cannot exceed six. That is, if five timeslots on the downlink are assigned to the MS, then only
one timeslot in the uplink can be assigned to the MS. The following table lists the multislot
capacity of MSs with multislot classes 30 to 34:
High Multislot
Class
Maximum Number of
Downlink Timeslots
Maximum Number
of Uplink Timeslots
Maximum
Number of
Timeslots
30
31
32
33
34
For an MS with high multislot classes 32 to 34, if more than two timeslots in the uplink are
assigned to the MS, EDA function must be enabled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
If more than two timeslots in the uplink are required, the GBFD-119401 EDA must be used.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

65
2 Data Services
2.1.9 GBFD-119407 Active TBF Allocation

Availability
Summary
Active TBF Allocation monitors temporary block flow (TBF) transmission in real time,
helping users learn about the transmission quality of TBFs and channels in a cell. This
provides guidelines for allocating PDCHs and converting dynamic PDCHs. This feature
enables low-throughput services to preferentially use a tight frequency reuse pattern and
high-throughput services to preferentially use a loose frequency reuse pattern. In addition to
reducing the number of activated PDCHs and improving the efficiency in which PDCHs carry
TBFs, this feature improves user experience with high-throughput services, reduces
interference to CS services and the proportion of HR channels to all channels, and improves
the mean opinion score (MOS) for CS services.
Benefits
Significantly increases the PS service rate when the same number of PDCHs is used.
That is, increases the transmission rate of LLC PDUs on the downlink by 10% to 20%
for GPRS or EGPRS users. This improves user experience.
On the premise that the cell throughput and the user rate on the downlink do not decline,
avoids unnecessary capacity expansion and brings economic benefit because the number
of activated PDCHs is reduced by about 25%, and the efficiency in which PDCHs carry
TBFs is increased by about 20%. Reduces the interference caused by PDCHs on the
network because the number of PDCHs is reduced. The MOS for CS services is
increased because the proportion of HR channels to all channels is reduced by 10%, and
the high quality indicator (HQI) is increased by about 0.2%.
Description
This feature increases the number of TBFs carried over each PDCH without affecting the
network access and transmission performance. This increases the efficiency in which PDCHs
carry TBFs and reduces the number of activated PDCHs.
Only data transmission occupies transmission resources on the Um interface during a TBF
duration, but data transmission time accounts for only part of the life cycle of a TBF. For
low-throughput services, data transmission time accounts for a small part of the life cycle of a
TBF. This leads to a low efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs, which wastes channel
resources.
This feature provides the following functions:
Samples and measures TBF data transmission
This feature monitors the TBF status in real time, quickly samples the TBF status, and record
the data transmission information about each TBF. When an MS accesses a cell or resources
are reallocated, this feature accumulates the TBF transmission traffic for each PDCH, which
is then used for channel allocation.
Manages PDCHs based on the TBF multiplexing rate
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

66
2 Data Services
This feature allocates or reallocates PDCHs based on the obtained TBF data transmission
information. The procedures for allocating or reallocating PDCHs and converting
dynamic PDCHs remain unchanged.
This function applies to hot spots for PS services with the following characteristics:
The throughput is about 3 kbit/s to 5 kbit/s per PDCH.
Instant messaging (IM) services account for more than 40% of PS services, and the
traffic of IM services accounts for about 10% of the total traffic.
The CS traffic is heavy during busy hours.
The traffic carried on HR channels accounts for about 30% of the total traffic.
The TCH congestion rate is about 1%.
In these hot spots, Active TBF Allocation brings the following gains:
Significantly increases the PS service rate when the same number of PDCHs is used.
That is, increases the transmission rate of LLC PDUs on the downlink by 10% to 20%
for GPRS or EGPRS users. This improves user experience.
On the premise that the cell throughput and the user rate on the downlink do not decline,
avoids unnecessary capacity expansion and brings economic benefit because the number of
activated PDCHs is reduced by about 25%, and the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs
(data rate per PDCH at the RLC layer) is expected to increase by about 25%. Reduces the
interference caused by PDCHs on the network because the number of PDCHs is reduced. The
MOS is improved because the proportion of HR channels for CS services is reduced by 10%,
and the HQI for CS services is increased by 0.2%.
If this feature is enabled, ensure that the following items do not deteriorate:
Data rate per user at the logical link control (LLC) layer
Uplink or downlink TBF call drop rate for EGPRS or GPRS services
PS service throughput
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

67
2 Data Services
2.1.10 GBFD-119505 PDCH Dynamic Adjustment with Two

Thresholds
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the conversion between PDCH and TCH can be dynamically performed
according to the traffic load in the cell. This feature ensures the speech quality of the cell,
reduces the possibility of CS services preempting the radio resources of PS services, and
effectively improves the channel utilization.
Benefits
This feature improves the CS access performance (indicated by the call setup success rate and
access delay) and PS retainability performance (indicated by the TBF call drop rate in uplink
and downlink).
Description
If the rate of idle channels in a cell is greater than the higher threshold for CS idle channel rate,
the CS traffic in the cell is light. In this case, idle TCHs can be dynamically converted into
PDCHs to improve the throughput of PS services. If the rate of idle channels in a cell is
smaller than the lower threshold for CS idle channel rate, the CS traffic in the cell is heavy. In
this case, PDCHs can be dynamically converted into TCHs to reduce the possibility of CS
services preempting the radio resources of PS services. If the rate of idle channels in a cell is
greater than the lower threshold for CS idle channel rate and at the same time smaller than the
higher threshold for CS idle channel rate, the CS traffic load and PS traffic load in the cell are
balanced. In this case, the dynamic conversion between PDCH and TCH does not need to be
performed. The higher threshold for CS idle channel rate and lower threshold for CS idle
channel rate are configured on the basis of the traffic load in the cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

68
2 Data Services
None
2.1.11 GBFD-510801 MSRD

Availability
Summary
MSRD is short for Mobile Station Receiver Diversity.
Benefits
Increases the MS receiver sensitivity by about 3 dB and enlarges the downlink coverage
distance.
Improves the downlink anti-interference capability and expands the downlink traffic
capacity when it is used with the dual-antenna interference cancellation (DAIC)
technology.
Description
The MSRD feature improves the signal receiving capability of MSs. With the introduction of
the DAIC technology, MSs obtain enhanced channel diversity. In addition, the GMSK
modulation scheme has an equivalent anti-interference capability with the 8-PSK modulation
scheme. Therefore, this feature increases user rate and system capacity.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
An MS performing GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink cannot perform GBFD-510801
MSRD.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

69
2 Data Services
2.1.12 GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in Downlink

Availability
Summary
Dual Carriers in Downlink is a method of increasing the downlink data rate. By using the
second downlink carrier, the downlink data rate is doubled theoretically.
Benefits
The downlink data rate is greatly increased. In this way, the GSM network can provide
subscribers with data services similar to those provided in a 3G network.
Description
The basic idea of the Dual Carriers in Downlink feature is to increase the number of timeslots
used by the base station to transmit data to an MS in a radio block period. The MS data rate is
increased by increasing the number of reception timeslots. The two carriers must be on the
same frequency band.
Assume that the highest-rate EGPRS coding scheme MCS9 is used. The data rate on each
timeslot is 59.2 kbit/s, and the maximum downlink data rate of an MS is calculated as
follows:
59.2 x 4 = 236.8 kbit/s
If the MS supports this feature, the MS can simultaneously receive data on two carriers in one
radio block period. Assume that MCS9 is used. With this feature, the maximum downlink data
rate of the MS is calculated as follows:
59.2 x 8 = 473.6 kbit/s
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The MS performing GBFD-510801 MSRD cannot perform GBFD-510802 Dual Carriers in
Downlink.
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

70
2 Data Services

2.1.13 GBFD-510803 Uplink EGPRS2-A

Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS9.0.
Summary
The higher uplink performance for GERAN evolution (HUGE) solution is divided into two
phases: EGPRS2-A and EGPRS2-B. The uplink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of the solution.
With 16QAM modulation, this feature increases the rate of PS services by up to 30% in the
uplink theoretically.
Benefits
The rate of PS services in the uplink is increased greatly. When four timeslots are used for
uplink data transmission, the theoretical rate of EGPRS is increased from 230 kbit/s to 300
kbit/s.
Description
One of the aims of the GSM/EDGE radio access network (GERAN) evolution is to increase
the uplink and downlink rate of PS services. For the 3GPP GERAN, the HUGE solution is
used to increase the data rate in the uplink. With the 16QAM modulation, the GSM/EGPRS
network supports higher uplink data rate.
The uplink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of HUGE. With this feature, the rate of PS services in
the uplink is almost increased by 30% in theory. When four timeslots are used for uplink data
transmission, the theoretical rate of EGPRS is increased from 230 kbit/s to 300 kbit/s.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

71
2 Data Services
The new coding schemes supported by EGPRS2-A are listed in the following table.
UAS-11
UAS-10
UAS-9
UAS-8
UAS-7
MCS Coding Scheme

Modulation Scheme
16QAM
Family
Apad10
Apad10
Bit Rate (kbit/s per TS)
44.8
51.2
59.2
67.2
76.8
Number of RLC Data Blocks
Payload (octets)
2x56
2x64
2x74
3x56
3x64
This feature applies only to Abis interface IP networking scenarios, including Abis IP over
E1/T1/cSTM-1 and Abis IP over FE/GE. Does not apply to Abis interface TDM networking
scene, that is, Abis TDM over E1/T1/cSTM-1.
Due to less terminal support Uplink EGPRS2-A, this feature is provided for trial, does not
recommend for commercial use.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization
2.1.14 GBFD-510804 Downlink EGPRS2-A

Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS9.0.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

72
2 Data Services
Summary
The reduced symbols duration/higher order modulation and Turbo codes (REDHOT) solution
is divided into two phases: downlink EGPRS2-A and downlink EGPRS2-B. The downlink
EGPRS2-A is the first phase of the solution. With 16QAM and 32QAM modulation, this
feature almost doubles the rate of PS services in the downlink theoretically.
Benefits
The rate of PS services on the downlink is almost doubled. When ten timeslots are used on the
downlink, the theoretical data rate of EGPRS is increased from 592 kbit/s to 984 kbit/s.
Description
One of the aims of the GSM/EDGE radio access network (GERAN) evolution is to increase
the uplink and downlink rate of PS services. For the 3GPP GERAN, the REDHOT solution is
used to increase the data rate on the downlink. With higher order modulation (16QAM and
32QAM), high symbol rate (1.2 times), and Turbo codes, the GSM/EGPRS network supports
higher downlink data rate.
The downlink EGPRS2-A is the first phase of REDHOT. With this feature, the rate of PS
services on the downlink is doubled in theory. When ten timeslots are used on the downlink,
the theoretical data rate of EGPRS is increased from 592 kbit/s to 984 kbit/s.
The new coding schemes supported by EGPRS2-A are listed in the following table.
Bp
DAS-12
Ap
DAS-11
16QA-M
DAS-10
Family
DAS-9
8PSK
DAS-8
Modulation
Scheme
DAS-7
DAS-6
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
DAS-5
MCS
Coding
Scheme
32QAM
Ap

Bp
Ap
Bp
73
2 Data Services
1x6
8
1x82
2x56
2x68
65.6
81.6
2x82
3x68
DAS-12
1x
56
54.4
DAS-11
Payload
(octets)
44.8
DAS-10
32.8
DAS-9
Number of
RLC Data
Blocks
27.2
DAS-8
22
.4
DAS-7
Bit Rate
(kbit/s per
TS)
DAS-6
DAS-5
MCS
Coding
Scheme
98.4
3x82
Due to less terminal support Uplink EGPRS2-A, this feature is provided for trial, does not
recommend for commercial use.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
2.1.15 GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

74
2 Data Services
Summary
The Latency Reduction feature consists of two sub-features: Reduced Transmission Time
Interval (RTTI) and Fast Ack/Nack Report (FANR).
Benefits
This feature reduces the packet transmission latency and therefore improves the customer
satisfaction.
Description
Latency reduction is important to GERAN evolution. In GERAN, the conversational services,
such as VoIP and Gaming, require short service latency. For the VoIP service that meets
customer requirements, the end-to-end latency should not exceed 300 ms, and the Frame Error
Rate (FER) should not exceed 2%. If the latency is within the permissible range, data can be
retransmitted to meet the FER requirement, improving customer satisfaction. In addition,
short latency can improve the customer experience of interactive and streaming services.
Two technologies can be used to reduce latency: RTTI and FANR.
RTTI: One radio block is still transmitted over four bursts, whereas two timeslots are
combined. Each timeslot transmits radio blocks of 10 ms TTI. In this way, the four bursts are
transmitted on two consecutive TDMA frames.
With the introduction of RTTI, the transmission latency on the Um interface and the TTI in
the access network are reduced. The TTI is reduced from 130 ms (the basic TTI is 20 ms) to
60 ms (the RTTI is 10 ms), and the single retransmission latency is reduced from 185 ms
(Basic TTI) to 95 ms (the RTTI is 10 ms).
FANR: Although RTTI can reduce transmission latency, under the existing Ack/Nack
reporting policy, when an RLC data block is erroneous or missing, this problem is not
immediately reported to the sender and another RLC data block is not retransmitted. As a
result, latency is required for assembling RLC data blocks into an LLC PDU. Therefore, an
efficient Ack/Nack feedback policy helps reduce the LLC PDU reassembly latency. Huawei
BSC supports FANR and enables the immediate feedback of data errors and the
retransmission of RLC data blocks. In this way, the LLC PDU reassembly latency is
decreased and the signaling overhead is reduced.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

75
2 Data Services
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114151 DTM
The BTS and MSs must support this feature.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

76
2 Data Services
2.2 PS QoS
2.2.1 GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)
Availability
Summary
After the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates radio resources to streaming-class
services according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission
rate. When radio resources are insufficient, high-priority users can preempt the radio
resources of lowpriority users.
Benefits
Ensures sufficient and stable bandwidth for streaming-class services.
Enables the bandwidth requirement and service experience to be preferentially ensured

for high-priority users when radio resources are insufficient.
Helps operators to take flexible charging policies.
Description
This feature supports the packet flow management (PFM) procedure, which manages packet
flow context (PFC). The PFM process includes the PFC establishment, modification, and
deletion. In addition, the BSC obtains or modifies the QoS attributes by performing the PFM
procedure.
This feature is enabled to support streaming and push to talk over cellular (PoC) services. If
an MS supports GBR, the BSC allocates resources to the MS according to the GBR of the
QoS. If an MS does not support GBR, the BSC allocates resources to the MS according to the
best effort policy.
The BSC dynamically allocates Um interface resources to an MS based on the radio
environment to ensure that the bandwidth of the MS is permanently greater than or equal to
the GBR. When the radio resources on the Um interface are insufficient, the GBR is reduced.
When the radio resources on the Um interface are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored.
When the BSC needs to reduce or restore the GBR, it requests the SGSN to modify the GBRs
by performing the PFM procedure.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Streaming-class service resource preemption: If the BSC cannot offer sufficient transmission
resources for high-priority users performing streaming-class services, the transmission
resources of low-priority users performing streaming-class services will be preempted. If the
radio resources are still insufficient after preemption, the GBR is reduced. If the radio
resources are sufficient, the reduced GBR is restored. This enhancement ensures that the
high-priority users performing streaming-class services preferentially use the radio resources,
reducing the possibility that the packet service access fails due to insufficient radio resources
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

77
2 Data Services
on the Um interface and improving user experience of high-priority users performing

streaming-class services.
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Note that all PS-related features depend on these two features. They may not be listed in each
PS-related feature.
GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement
GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency Improvement
GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement
GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource Balancing
GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing
MSs and the SGSN must support the PFM procedure and R99 QoS.
2.2.2 GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP

Availability
Summary
After the QoS mechanism is introduced, the BSC allocates radio resources to the users
according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the
QoS. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. To be
compatible with R97/R98 QoS, this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and
R99 QoS.
Benefits
With this feature, the operator allocates the radio resources according to different service
types and user priorities. As a result, the user with higher priority can seize more bandwidth
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

78
2 Data Services
and enjoy higher data rate and better quality of service. This feature provides the following
benefits:
High-priority users can enjoy more bandwidth whereas low-priority users are subject to
bandwidth constraint.
The bandwidth allocation mechanism is more flexible because the operator can allocate
the radio resources according to different service types and user priorities.
The operator can formulate flexible charging policies.
Description
The BSC allocates the radio resources to the MS according the ARP and THP of the QoS. The
higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth.
Interactive services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP and THP of
the QoS. If the ARPs of the users are the same, the users with higher THP are allocated more
radio resources. If the THPs of the users are the same, the users with higher ARP are allocated
more radio resources.
Other services: The BSS allocates the radio resources according to the ARP of the QoS. The
users with higher ARP can be allocated more radio resources.
For the services that do not support the QoS, the BSS allocates the radio resources according
to the BEST EFFORT.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Mapping between R97/R98 QoS and R99 QoS: If the MS supports only the R97/R98 QoS,
that is, the MS does not support the GBR, the BSC maps the R97/R98 QoS to the R99 QoS
according to the 3GPP specifications. After the precedence class of the R97/R98 QoS is
mapped as the ARP of the R99 QoS, the BSC allocates the radio resources based on the ARP.
Configuration of the radio resource allocation priorities: The priorities are configured on the
basis of the service types of the QoS, ARP, and THP. For the services that do not support the
QoS, the priorities are allocated according to the BEST EFFORT. The BSC allocates the radio
resources according to the user priorities. The higher-priority users are allocated more radio
resources. This feature enables the operator to allocate the radio resources according to
different service types and user priorities and therefore the bandwidth allocation mechanism is
more flexible.
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

79
2 Data Services
GBFD-114201 EGPRS

GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority
MSs and the SGSN must support this feature.
2.2.3 GBFD-119905 PoC QoS

Availability
Summary
The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high
bandwidth and delay requirements. To guarantee the service quality and real-time
performance, Huawei GBSS provides the QoS measures such as GBR, reduced data
transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.
Benefits
This feature guarantees the real-time performance of the PoC service, improves the voice
quality of the PoC service, and enhances user experience. It provides the operator with
competitive advantages and enables the operator to provide differentiated services for data
service subscribers. It also increases the service revenue.
Description
The PoC service is a type of group call service implemented on the GSM network. The PoC
service adopts the packet switching technology and is carried on the GPRS/EGPRS network.
The PoC service involves subscriber authentication, conversation establishment, media
dispatching, charging, and strategy control, most of which run on the PoC server in the CN.
The PoC signaling and voice data are carried over GPRS/EGPRS. The GBSS transparently
transfers these packets to the CN for further processing. In contrast to the packet service, the
PoC service carries speech signals and requires low transfer delay. If the transfer delay is high,
user experience is affected. Huawei GBSS is able to identify the PoC service and provides
certain measures to guarantee the QoS. These measures include GBR, reduced data
transmission delay, and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation.
GBR: The resources are allocated based on the GBR. If the GBR cannot be guaranteed, it is
re-negotiated and the resources are then allocated based on the negotiated GBR.
Reduced data transmission delay: The services are scheduled based on the priorities. The
high-priority services are preferably scheduled and the services with the same priority are
scheduled in turn.
Balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation: In most cases, the PoC service requires the
uplink TBF and downlink TBF simultaneously and symmetrical traffic in the uplink and
downlink. Therefore, the balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation enables a similar
number of PDCHs to be allocated in the uplink and downlink if the multislot class of the MS
permits and if the requirements of GBR are met.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

80
2 Data Services
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-119901 Streaming QoS(GBR)
2.2.4 GBFD-119906 Conversational QoS

Availability
Summary
Conversational QoS refers to the QoS of conversational services.
This feature means that when an MS subscribes to a network, the services on the MS are
registered as conversational services. The BSC processes the services on the MS as
conversational services according to the registered QoS information, provided that the MS
supports the reduced latency. In this way, the service transmission delay does not exceed 80
ms and the end-to-end delay does not exceed 300 ms, meeting the high requirements of
conversational services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming for the transmission delay.
Benefits
With the development of IP-based services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming, the users'
requirements for the service transmission delay become increasingly higher. The QoS of
conversational services can achieve enhanced QoS and improved user experience. The details
are as follows:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

81
2 Data Services
Helping operators to achieve enhanced QoS of PS services, improve the competitiveness

of GSM products in the PS domain, and attract more VIP users
Enhancing user experience and improving the core competitiveness of operators
Increasing operators' revenues by improving the performance of PS services and

implementing value-added services such as VoIP and PoC
Description
The conversational service is a type of real-time service and has high requirements for the
transmission delay. As specified by the related protocol, the transmission delay of
conversational services cannot exceed 80 ms. In general, to ensure user satisfaction, the
end-to-end delay for VoIP services cannot exceed 300 ms.
Conversational services use the RTTI TBF so that the requirements of the conversation QoS
for transmission delay are met. The scheduling period of radio blocks based on the BTTI TBF
is 20 ms and the scheduling period of radio blocks based on the RTTI TBF is 10 ms. If the MS
does not support the reduced latency, the BSC also allows the MS to run conversational
services. The BSC allocates the BTTI TBF to the MS and tries to meet the requirement of
conversation QoS for the transmission delay. Because the capability of the MS is limited, the
BSC is unable to guarantee that the MS can meet the requirement of conversation QoS for the
transmission delay.
Because PS services are transparently transmitted on the BSC, the BSC cannot exactly
identify the service type of the MS. Therefore, the BSC can determine the service type only
based on the information that the MS registers in the HLR.
The criteria for checking whether the services on the MS meet the QoS of conversational
services are not the actual services running on the MS but the following two conditions:
1.
Whether conversational services are registered during the registration of the MS
2.
Whether the MS supports the reduced latency
Only when the previous two conditions are met, the transmission delay of services on the MS
over the Um interface may meet the requirement of Conversation QoS.
If the MS supports the reduced latency, employ the policy of binding the RTTI feature and the
FANR feature. The RTTI feature can reduce RTT, and the FANR feature can greatly reduce
the response time of the MS in case that the signal quality on the Um interface is poor.
Because the current GBSS version supports the RTTI and FANR feature only in IP/HDLC
transmission mode, Conversation QoS can be optimally supported in IP/HDLC transmission
mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

82
2 Data Services

GBFD-510805 Latency Reduction
2.2.5 GBFD-119907 PS Service in Priority

Availability
Summary
This feature enables telecom operators to provide subscribers with differentiated services.
Subscribers are classified into three priority levels: gold, silver, and copper. The bandwidth
and delay requirements of high-priority subscribers are preferentially guaranteed.
Benefits
Based on subscriber priority levels, telecom operators provide differentiated services for
subscribers and charge subscribers adopting flexible policies. For example, a telecom operator
charges a gold subscriber based on traffic whereas charges a silver or copper subscriber at a
flat rate monthly.
Description
Subscriber priority levels are represented by parameters, which are set depending on the
traffic class, allocation/retention priority (ARP), and traffic handle priority (THP).
If the priority of a subscriber is high, the scheduling priority is also high. As a result, the
subscriber can use services with high bandwidth and low service delay.
Interactive, background, and best effort (BE) services support differentiated PS services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

83
2 Data Services

GBFD-119902 QoS ARP&THP
MSs and the SGSN must support this feature.
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GSM PS differentiated QoS service.
2.2.6 GBFD-119904 PS Active Package Management

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the
bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links, avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the
IP packet transmission. As a result, the performance of the services such as large-sized email
sending, webpage browsing, and file transfer is improved. In addition, the packet performance
is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously.
Benefits
Improves the downlink throughput when the quality of the radio link is poor.
Reduces the download time when multiple webpages are downloaded simultaneously.
Ensures high bandwidth usage, reduces the delay of the packet service, and enhances the
fairness of the bandwidth seizure of various packet service flows.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

84
2 Data Services
Improves the performance of the packet service. For example, when large-sized files are
involved in the packet service, such as FTP downloading and email sending, this feature
shortens the service delay and therefore improves user experience.
Description
Compared with the reactive queue management (a technique which drops the overflowed
packets only when the queue is full), this feature provides active queue management and
real-time monitoring of the buffer queue to monitor the network congestion. Once the
network is congested, the system drops the data packets proactively and adjusts the sending
rate at the TCP sending end to maintain the buffer queue at a certain length to reduce the
congestion.
Therefore, the throughput of the TCP service is maximized, the data buffer size is reduced,
and the interactive time and response time of the services such as webpage browsing are
saved.
In GSM, the packet service uses the TCP/IP protocol in most cases. When multiple
connections co-exist, the strong connection in a system may result in long transmission time
over the weak connection. For example, a subscriber clicks a button on an HTTP webpage
when FTP downloading is in progress. In such a case, a long time elapses before the
corresponding webpage is displayed because the link resource is occupied by the FTP service.
The PS active package management is applicable to scenarios where congestion may occur
because of bandwidth limitation. It can reduce the network congestion caused by the TCP data
flow, so the service throughput is increased and the service delay is decreased.
The PS active package management performs queue management for only interactive services,
background services, and services that do not support the QoS. The queue management is not
performed for real-time services, such as conversational services and streaming services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

85
2 Data Services
2.3 PS Service Enhancement

2.3.1 GBFD-114151 DTM
Availability
Summary
Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. That
is, a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during the call conversation. The 3G
network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. With DTM, the subscribers in a GSM
network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. In addition, in areas
with insufficient 3G coverage, subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services
through the GSM network.
Benefits
DTM supports concurrent CS service and PS service. That is, a subscriber can provide PS
service without affecting the CS service.
With DTM, the concurrent CS services and PS services which are originally available only in
the 3G network are now available in the GSM network.
With the passage of time and development of technology, the data services are becoming the
new area of profit growth. The concurrent CS service and PS service becomes a new
requirement. Without DTM, only the class A mobile phone with complex hardware supports
concurrent CS service and PS service. However, due to its complexity, few manufacturers
provide such mobile phones. The implementation of DTM is a foundation for the extensive
application of data service. With the interaction between the CS services and PS services and
the multimedia services provided by operators, the call duration is prolonged and a large
amount of data traffic is generated. This considerably increases the revenue of operators.
Description
DTM is a 3GPP-defined standard function. This feature implements the simplified operation
function of the class A mobile phone, that is, concurrent CS services and PS services. In DTM
mode, the CS resource (TCH) and PS resource (PDCH) are assigned to the MS
simultaneously. According to the multislot capacity of the MS, different number of channels
in the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS to meet the requirement for different
bandwidths. DTM supports MS with multislot class 5 and higher classes. According to the
MS multislot capacity, the BSC assigns two channels in the uplink or downlink to the MS:
one for CS services and the other for PS services. The MS multislot class 9 with DTM can be
assigned with one channel for CS service and two channels for PS service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

86
2 Data Services
PS
CS
PS
PS
CS
CS
PS
PS
CS
CS
PS
PS
CS
Downlink
CS
PS
PS
CS
Uplink
PS
Downlink
Uplink
CLASS 5
CLASS 9
After DTM is enabled, the BSC must support BSS paging coordination in packet transfer
mode if the Network Operation Mode II or III is configured in a cell.
For an MS supporting DTM, when the MS initiates a RA update in CS mode, the CS channels
(FACCH or SDCCH) can be used for location update and no PDCH is required. In this case,
the channel resources in PS domain are saved.
In DTM mode, the MS can establish the PS connection only after the PS connection is
established. If an MS providing data service needs to switch to the DTM mode, the TBF must
be released first; then, the MS switches to CS mode and a TBF connection. After that, the MS
switches to DTM mode. The following figure shows the state transition in DTM mode:
Figure 2-1 State transition in DTM mode
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

87
2 Data Services

GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)
GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination
The MSC and MSs must support this feature.
2.3.2 GBFD-119403 Class11 DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on the common DTM feature, Class 11 DTM doubles the bandwidth of the uplink PS
services of the MS. When an MS using Class11 DTM provides mainly uplink service, the
channel assignment of Speech + 1Downlink + 2Uplink is supported. That is, two uplink
PDCHs and one downlink PDCH are assigned to the MS.
Benefits
Based on common DTM, Class 11 DTM doubles the uplink rate. Theoretically, the uplink rate
of the EGPRS MS can reach 110 kbit/s. Class11 DTM provides the bandwidth to support
streaming services.
With the Class 11 DTM function, the uplink rate or downlink rate can be increased according
to requirement, improving user experience. In addition, the increased data flow can also
increase the revenues of operators.
Description
In DTM mode, the MS supports both CS service and PS service simultaneously. Besides
supporting the channel combination of Class11 DTM and Class9 DTM, the MS using Class11
DTM can occupy two uplink PDCHs and one downlink PDCH used with EDA. When the MS
provides mainly the uplink services, Class11 DTM meets the requirements of the MS more
effectively.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
PS
CS
PS
CS
Downlink
PS
Uplink

CLASS
11
88
2 Data Services
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114151 DTM
GBFD-119401 EDA
The MSC must support the DTM feature. The MS must support the Class11 DTM feature.
2.3.3 GBFD-119404 HMC DTM

Availability
Summary
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM improves the bandwidth of the uplink and downlink PS
services of the MS. The MS can occupy a maximum of three uplink and downlink PDCHs
respectively during a call. The following channel assignments are supported: Speech +
3Downlink + 1Uplink, Speech + 2Downlink + 2Uplink, and Speech + 1Downlink + 3Uplink.
Benefits
Based on common DTM, HMC DTM triples the uplink and downlink rates. This improves
user experience and provides bandwidth to support streaming services. In addition, the
increased data flow can also increase the revenues of operators.
Description
The DTM multislot classes defined in 3GPP protocols are classes 5, 6, 9, 10, 11, 31,33, 36-38,
and 4144. The classes higher than class 31 are called High Multislot classes DTM (HMC
DTM). The DTM multislot capacity is in direct proportion to the uplink/downlink rate. The
higher the DTM multislot class supported by the GBSS equipment, the higher the
uplink/downlink rate.
Huawei HMC DTM supports multislot classes 31~33. In other words, based on the multislot
capacity of MS, a maximum of five channels in the downlink can be assigned to the MS. The
maximum number of channels on both the uplink and downlink is six. Except one TCH
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

89
2 Data Services
assigned to the speech in the uplink and downlink respectively, a maximum of three PDCHs
in the uplink or downlink can be assigned to the MS.
The following table lists the multislot capacity of MSs with multislot classes 31 to 33:
Multislot class
Maximum number of slots

Rx
Tx
Sum
31
33
For an MS with multislot classes 32 and 33, if more than three channels in the uplink are
assigned to the MS, EDA must be enabled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 DTM
GBFD-119401 EDA
GBFD-119402 MS High Multislot Classes
The MSC must support the DTM feature. The MS must support the DTM HMC feature.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

90
2 Data Services
2.4 Smart Pipe

2.4.1 GBFD-511603 IM Service Efficiency Improvement
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC provides the following functions to increase channel usage:
Identifies instant messaging (IM) services from various PS services.
Allocates fewer channels to process IM services based on configuration policies.
Multiplexes IM services on a PDCH.
Shortens the delay for releasing downlink TBFs.
Reduces the priority for scheduling IM services.
Benefits
The efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs is increased by 50% to 100% for IM services.
Description
Traditional PDCH management is based on the MS multislot capability and the average
number of MSs using the services carried on a PDCH. To ensure that user experience does not
deteriorate, the BSC allocates as many PDCHs as needed to an MS based on the MS multislot
capability. This is done because the BSC cannot predict the PS service throughput. If the
average number of MSs using the services carried on a PDCH exceeds a specified threshold,
the BSC triggers excessive dynamic PDCH conversions.
Currently, IM services account for a large portion of GSM services, but the TBF transmission
duration is short because of low throughput. As a result, procedures in which no data block is
transmitted, such as TBF establishment, delayed downlink TBF release, and TBF release,
account for a large part of a TBF life cycle. This wastes channel resources.
1.
The BSC identifies IM services from various PS services.
2.
The BSC supports the setting of the following parameters for IM services:
3.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Maximum Number of PDCHs for IM ARP 1
IM ARP1 Scheduling Weight
IM PDCH Multiplexing Weight
IM Downlink TBF Release Delay
The BSC allocates radio resources to IM services based on the configured priority
weight, PDCH multiplexing rate, and delay for releasing downlink TBFs and allocates

91
2 Data Services
channels to IM services during busy hours based on the maximum number of configured
PDCHs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS or GBFD-114201 EGPRS

None
2.4.2 GBFD-511604 Web Browsing Service Efficiency

Improvement
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC provides the following functions to improve user experience with
regard to web browsing services:
Identifies web browsing services from various PS services.
Allocates an appropriate number of channels to process web browsing services.
Sets an appropriate multiplexing weight.
Sets an appropriate delay for releasing downlink TBFs.
Increases the priority for scheduling web browsing services.
Benefits
User experience improves with regard to web browsing services.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

92
2 Data Services
Description
Currently, web browsing services account for a large portion of GSM services. Such services
have medium throughput and a high requirement for delay.
1.
The BSC identifies web browsing services from various PS services.
2.
The BSC supports the setting of the following parameters for web browsing services:
3.
Maximum Number of PDCHs for Web Browsing ARP 1
Web Browsing ARP1 Scheduling Weight
Web Browsing PDCH Multiplexing Weight
Web Browsing Downlink TBF Release Delay
The BSC allocates radio resources to web browsing services based on the configured
priority weight, PDCH multiplexing rate, and delay for releasing downlink TBFs and
allocates channels to web browsing services during busy hours based on the maximum
number of configured PDCHs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

93
2 Data Services
2.4.3 GBFD-511605 Email Service Efficiency Improvement

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BSC provides the following functions to improve user experience with
regard to email services or to increase the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs for email
services:
Identifies email services from various PS services.
Allocates an appropriate number of channels to process email services.
Sets an appropriate multiplexing weight.
Sets an appropriate delay for releasing downlink TBFs.
Increases the priority for scheduling email services.
Benefits
1.
User experience improves with regard to email services.
2.
The efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs for email services is increased.
Description
Currently, email services account for a certain portion of GSM services. Such services have
high throughput and a low requirement for delay.
1.
The BSC identifies email services from various PS services.
2.
The BSC supports the setting of the following parameters for email services:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Maximum Number of PDCHs for Email ARP 1
Email ARP1 Scheduling Weight

94
3.
Email PDCH Multiplexing Weight
Email Downlink TBF Release Delay
2 Data Services
The BSC allocates radio resources to email services based on the configured priority
channels to email services during busy hours based on the maximum number of
configured PDCHs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

None
2.4.4 GBFD-511606 Streaming Media Service Resource

Balancing
Availability
Summary
Identifies streaming media services from various PS services.
Reduces the number of PDCHs allocated to streaming media services.
Multiplexes more streaming media services on a PDCH.
Reduces the priority for scheduling streaming media services.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

95
2 Data Services
Benefits
This feature improves user experience with regard to other GSM services.
Description
Currently, streaming media services account for a small portion of GSM services. Such
services have a large throughput and a high requirement for delay, but the spectral efficiency
of GSM networks is limited. Therefore, the streaming media services are not recommended
for GSM networks.
1.
The BSC identifies streaming media services from various PS services.
2.
The BSC supports the setting of the following parameters for streaming media services:
3.
Maximum Number of PDCHs for Streaming Media ARP1
Streaming Media ARP1 Scheduling Weight
Streaming Media PDCH Multiplexing Weight
Streaming Media Downlink TBF Release Delay
The BSC allocates radio resources to streaming media services based on the configured
priority weight, PDCH multiplexing rate, and delay for releasing downlink TBFs and
allocates channels to streaming media services during busy hours based on the maximum
number of configured PDCHs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

96
2 Data Services

None
2.4.5 GBFD-511607 P2P Resource Balancing

Availability
Summary
Identifies point to point (P2P) services from various PS services.
Reduces the number of PDCHs allocated to P2P services.
Multiplexes more P2P services on a PDCH.
Reduces the priority for scheduling P2P services.
Benefits
This feature improves user experience with regard to other GSM services.
Description
Currently, P2P services account for a small portion of GSM services. Such services have a
large throughput, but the spectral efficiency of GSM networks is limited. Therefore, the P2P
services are not recommended for GSM networks.
1.
The BSC identifies P2P services from various PS services.
2.
The BSC supports the setting of the following parameters for P2P services:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Maximum Number of PDCHs for P2P ARP1
P2P ARP1 Scheduling Weight

97
3.
P2P PDCH Multiplexing Weight
P2P Downlink TBF Release Delay
2 Data Services
The BSC allocates radio resources to P2P services based on the configured priority
channels to P2P services during busy hours based on the maximum number of
configured PDCHs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency

None
2.4.6 GBFD-119408 PS Access Congestion Balancing

Availability
Summary
The PS Access Congestion Balancing feature enables the BSC to determine whether to
establish TBFs in advance and keep them activated based on cell load. This increases cell
access capacity and relieves network congestion.
Benefits
Increases the PS service access capacity fivefold.
Decreases the PS congestion rate.
Increases the PDCH transmission rate.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

98
2 Data Services
Increases network capacity.
Description
When the downlink load is heavy, the BSC disables the downlink TBF release delay and
early downlink TBF establishment functions to improve the downlink access capability.
When the downlink load is light, the BSC enables the downlink TBF release delay and
early downlink TBF establishment functions to improve user experience.
When the uplink load is heavy, the BSC disables the Extended Uplink TBF function to
improve the uplink access capability.
When the uplink load is light, the BSC enables the Extended Uplink TBF function to
improve network performance.
Using this feature increases the number of MSs allowed to access the network but decreases
data transmission rates. This feature is used when there are many burst services such as
machine to machine (M2M) and instant messaging (IM) services and users have low
requirements for data transmission rates.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114101 GPRS
This feature should be used with the following feature:
None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the SQI-DATA service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

99
2 Data Services
2.4.7 GBFD-511610 Small Packet Resource Balancing

Availability
Summary
This feature allows the BSC to identify the size of a data packet and allocate the appropriate
number of PDCHs to services using small-sized data packets (referred to as small packet
services).
Benefits
This feature reduces the number of PDCHs to be activated and improves the efficiency for
PDCHs to carry data packets.
Description
During the establishment of an uplink or downlink TBF, the BSC allocates limited PDCHs to
the TBF when either of the following conditions is met:
The BSC fails to obtain any data packets from the uplink or downlink TBF.
The BSC receives a data packet whose length is less than the specified threshold (default
value: 250 bytes).
If the BSC receives a data packet whose length is greater than the specified threshold, it
allocates PDCHs to the TBF depending on the multi-timeslot capability of an MS.
If the BSC allocates limited PDCHs to a TBF, the BSC triggers a reassignment procedure to
allocate more PDCHs when either of the following conditions is met:
The BSC receives a data packet whose length is greater than the specified threshold.
Real-time traffic monitoring shows that traffic in the TBF exceeds the specified
threshold.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114101 GPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

100
2 Data Services

None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the SQI-DATA service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

101
3 Radio & Performance
Radio & Performance
3.1 Paging Enhancement

3.1.1 GBFD-511501 Multiple CCCHs
Availability
Summary
Based on configuration of BCCH TRX timeslot 0 as the BCCH physical channel, the Multiple
CCCHs feature supports also configuring timeslots 2, 4, and 6 as the BCCH physical channel.
This increases the CCCH capacity within a cell, which improves the paging and random
access capability of the cell.
Benefits
The Multiple CCCHs feature increases the number of CCCHs in a cell, improving the paging
and random access capability of the cell.
Description
In GSM networks, BCCH physical channels are divided into the following types of logical
channels:
Downlink: FCCH, SCH, BCCH, PCH, AGCH, NCH
Uplink: RACH
Of these, the PCH, AGCH, NCH, and RACH are referred to as CCCHs.
A cell is generally configured with a single BCCH physical channel and timeslot 0 on the
BCCH TRX is configured as the BCCH physical channel. The Multiple CCCHs feature
supports configuring timeslots 2, 4, and 6 on the BCCH TRX as the BCCH physical channel.
These BCCH physical channels do not include the downlink FCCH, SCH, or NCH. They do
include the downlink BCCH, PCH, and AGCH as well as the uplink RACH. The contents sent
over timeslots 0, 2, 4, and 6 BCCH logical channels are identical. However, the PCH, AGCH,
and RACH channels are able to send different contents. Consequently, configuring multiple
BCCH physical channels increases the CCCH capacity.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

102
The BSC broadcasts the configured number of CCCHs to MSs in system information 3. The
MSs determine which timeslot to monitor for call information based on their own IMSIs.
Because BCCH physical uplink channels are all RACH channels, configuration of multiple
CCCHs increases the number of RACH channels within a cell. As a result, the Multiple
CCCHs feature also increases the random access capability of the cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
3.1.2 GBFD-511502 Layered Paging

Availability
Summary
For the first paging, the BSC sends paging messages to the last cell on which the MS camps
and to its neighboring cells. If the first paging fails, the BSC sends paging messages to the
areas specified by the SGSN for the second paging.
Benefits
This feature narrows down the paging areas for packet service (PS). This helps lighten the
CCCH load of the GSM network.
Description
With the rapid development of PS services in recent years, PS paging messages have
accounted for an increasingly larger proportion of paging messages than circuit switched (CS)
paging messages. This leads to heavy traffic load on the CCCHs and reduces the success rate
of CS service admission.
PS paging messages are sent on the basis of routing areas (RAs). In live networks, however,
users processing packet services do not cross a large area. In this case, paging resources are
wasted. To save paging resources, Huawei introduces the Layered Paging feature. When
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

103
paging messages are sent to multiple NSEs, this feature enables the BSC to process paging
messages as follows:
For the NSE where the last cell that an active PS MS camps on resides, the BSC sends
paging messages to the cell and its neighboring cells.
For other NSEs, the BSC sends paging messages to all cells under the NSEs.
The BSC initiates the second paging by RAs if the first paging fails. PS paging does not affect
user experience even though they may be delayed for a certain period.
Figure 3-1 Layered paging
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
3.1.3 GBFD-511503 Dynamic Multiple CCCH

Availability
Summary
When the CCCH load is high, the TCHs on timeslot 2, 4, and 6 on the BCCH TRX are
dynamically converted to CCCHs to extend the Um interface capability and relieve the load
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

104
on CCCHs. When the CCCH load is low, the CCCHs on timeslot 2, 4, 6 are dynamically
converted to TCHs to increase the channel usage.
Benefits
This feature is different from the static multiple CCCH function because it solves the problem
of the increase in sudden pagings, which improves the manual O&M efficiency and increases
the channel usage.
Description
The paging success rate decreases greatly during holidays and due to emergencies. When the
static multiple CCCH function is enabled, it is difficult to determine the number of static
CCCHs to be configured. If the number of configured static CCCHs is small, the paging
success rate remains low. If the number of configured static CCCHs is large, some TCHs are
wasted.
After the Dynamic Multiple CCCH feature is enabled, the BTS calculates the CCCH load and
determines whether to increase or decrease the number of CCCHs based on a specified
threshold. Then the BTS requests the BSC to increase or decrease one CCCH at a time. After
the increase or decrease, the BSC delivers a system information message containing related
configuration data to an MS so that the MS listens to the timeslot carrying the allocated
CCCH.
Figure 3-2 Dynamic Multiple CCCH
CCCH
configuration
CCCH
traffic
increases
CCCH
traffic
decreases
CCCH
TCH
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

105

None
None
3.1.4 GBFD-511505 RACH Storm Filtration

Availability
Summary
When the time interval and timing advance (TA) interval meet specified conditions, random
access requests with the same access reference value are filtered to restrain Random access
channel (RACH) storm.
Benefits
RACH storm occurs when a large number of random access requests are generated. Therefore,
the RACH Storm Filtration feature needs to be enabled to enhance system reliability and
increase the immediate assignment success rate.
Description
During random access, an MS sends a random access burst on the RACH to the BTS
requesting a channel. The random access request message contains the following information:
Setup cause, which can be paging response, emergency call, mobile-originated call, short
message service, or others (for example, location update)
Random parameters, which consist of five bits randomly selected by MSs. Based on
these parameters, the network identifies two MSs when they attempt to access the
network simultaneously.
Excessive random accesses will lead to RACH storm and affect performance measurement
counters. RACH storm may be caused by:
MS exceptions
A large number of burst location update requests
Malicious MS accesses
A large number of burst pagings
To restrain RACH storm, the BTS filters random access requests on the RACH based on the
following factors:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Random access reference value (Ref)
Time interval between two random access requests with the same reference value
(Time)
TA interval between two random access requests with the same reference value (Ta)

106
Number of times the same access reference value occurs consecutively (N)
The BTS starts to filter a random access request with the reference value Ref and discards this
request for 5 minutes when N consecutive random access requests with the access reference
value Ref meet the following conditions:
Two consecutive time intervals are equal to or less than Time.
Two consecutive TAs are equal to or less than Ta.
After 5 minutes, the BTS triggers a new decision on the filter criterion for the random access
request with the reference value Ref.
According to the random access defined in the 3GPP specifications, an MS only reports 8-bit
valid information during random access. Based on the information, the network cannot obtain
the international mobile subscriber identify (IMSI) of the MS or filter the random access
request initiated by the specified MS. If the MS fails to obtain a random access response from
the network, the MS replaces its Ref and initiates a new random access. If a random access
request with the reference value Ref is filtered, a random access request with the reference
value Ref initiated by another MS is also filtered. In this case, the service request for this MS
fails if it does not initiate a random access with a new reference value.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
3.1.5 GBFD-510001 Network Operation Mode I

Availability
Summary
The Network Operation Mode I feature together with the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR
and the SGSN support the paging coordination function.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

107
Benefits
The Network Operation Mode I together with the Gs interface support paging
coordination and CS paging when an MS is in packet transfer state.
The Network Operation Mode I feature significantly reduces the signaling load between
the network and MSs, saving and optimizing radio resources.
Description
As defined in GSM specifications, network operations are classified into three modes by the
paging mode adopted for CS and PS services: Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation
Mode II, and Network Operation Mode III. This feature refers to Network Operation Mode I.
With this feature, the network sends CS paging messages to MSs on packet channels (PCCCH,
CCCH, or PACCH). An MS monitors only one paging channel.
If the PCCCH is configured and the MS is in the idle state, both CS and PS paging
messages are sent on the PCCCH.
If only the CCCH is configured and the MS is in the idle state, both CS and PS paging
messages are sent on the CCCH.
If the MS is in packet transfer state, CS paging messages are sent on the PACCH.
Network Operation Mode I requires that the Gs interface is configured between the
MSC/VLR and the SGSN because CS paging messages must be transmitted through the
SGSN. An MS listens to only one type of channel to receive the CS paging messages. This
feature significantly reduces the signaling load between the network and MSs, saving and
optimizing radio resources.
Using Network Operation Mode I, an MS can receive CS paging messages on the PACCH
when processing PS services. The MS then suspends the PS services and processes the CS
services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The CN must support the Gs interface to support paging coordination.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

108
3.1.6 GBFD-119305 BSS Paging Coordination

Availability
Summary
When no Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and SGSN is configured and the MS is in
packet transfer state, the network sends CS paging messages through the PACCH. Then, the
MS in packet transfer state can respond to the CS paging message.
Benefits
With this feature, the MS in packet transfer state can receive the CS paging message, avoiding
the drop of network paging rate when the PS services are performed.
Description
When the common class B MS is in packet transfer state, it only listens to the paging message
on the PACCH. When no Gs interface is configured, the MS in packet transfer state cannot
respond to the CS paging message because the CS paging message is sent on the PCH. This
problem can be solved through BSS paging coordination.
After the BSC receives a CS paging message over the A or Gb interface, BSS paging
coordination enables the BSC to query whether the MS is performing PS services according
to the IMSI carried in the paging message. If the MS is in packet transfer state, the BSC sends
a paging message to the MS through the PACCH; if the MS is in the idle state, the BSC sends
a paging message to the MS through the PCH.
BSS paging coordination is independent of the Gs interface between the MSC/VLR and
SGSN and is independent of Network Operation Mode I. The GBSC independently
determines whether the paging message is sent on the PCH or on the PACCH. If no Gs
interface is configured in a network with large amount of PS services, BSS paging
coordination helps increase the paging success rate.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

109
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
3.2 Mobility Management

3.2.1 GBFD-116201 Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2)
Availability
Summary
The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet
transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell based on MRs.
Benefits
Based on the receive quality of the MS and receive level of the neighboring cell, this feature
enables the network-controlled MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. Therefore, the
subscriber can obtain better packet service, the performance of the packet service in the whole
network is improved, and the resource usage is increased.
Description
In NC2 mode, the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. In this manner, the
MS can reselect a better cell because the network has a clearer view of the actual network
condition than the MS does. Therefore, better network performance is achieved.
When the MS is in packet transfer mode, the network helps to reselect a cell with better
receive level and lighter load for the MS based on the MR and the network load condition.
The NC2 is triggered under the following scenarios:
1.
The downlink receive quality of the MS drops rapidly.
2.
The reselection does not occur and the number of received packet measurement reports
reaches a certain threshold.
In these cases, the network helps the MS to reselect a cell with better receive level. As a result,
user experience is enhanced, and the performance of the packet service in the whole network
is improved.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

110
Inter-BSC NC2: The network can select the neighboring cell controlled by another BSC as the
target cell and initiate the cell re-selection procedure.
NC2 based on cell load: When the load of PS services in the cell exceeds a specified threshold,
the MS that meets the requirement of neighboring cell level threshold is reselected to the
neighboring cell with light load.
Support for NC2 of the target cell of the WCDMA system: The network can select the target
cell of the WCDMA system for cell reselection based on the MRs.
Dependency
None
3.2.2 GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

Availability
Summary
NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection. To implement rapid PS access after cell
reselection, the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell
reselection. Therefore, the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized.
Benefits
Increases the cell reselection speed, minimizes the service interruption time due to the
cell reselection, and enhances user experience.
Adheres to satisfy the services that have higher requirements for delay and throughput
(such as the streaming service).
Increases the system capacity because the resources of the original cell can be released
rapidly after the cell reselection.
Description
The NACC feature enables the MS to access the new cell rapidly after cell reselection and
perform data transmission without receiving the complete system information.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

111
The NACC feature does not control the cell reselection of the MS, but notifies the network to
send the system information in advance when the MS decides to reselect a cell and delays the
cell reselection. In this manner, this feature increases the cell reselection speed of the MS,
greatly reducing the data transmission interruption time due to cell reselection.
Because the cell reselection speed is increased, the MS can rapidly notify the SGSN. The
SGSN can then rapidly detect that the cell reselection occurs. As a result, the resources of the
original cell can be quickly released to other users and therefore the system capacity is
increased.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support for resource reservation in the target cell: When the network receives the cell
reselection decision of the MS, it reserves the required radio resources in the target cell to
ensure that the MS can obtain sufficient resources for service recovery after reselection.
Support for NACC between BSCs or between BSC and RNC: This application enhancement
can reduce the delay of cell reselection between BSCs or between the BSC and the RNC. It
requires the BSC to support the RIM procedure to obtain the system information of the
external cell. During cell reselection, if the BSC has the system information of the external
cell, it sends the system information to the MS. Otherwise, the BSC initiates the RIM
procedure to request the system information and save the system information for future use.
GBSS14.0
This feature supports lossless data packet transfer during intra-BSC inter-routing area cell
reselection.
As defined in the 3GPP specifications, all data packets of the serving cell are discarded when
an MS in the transfer state performs inter-routing area cell reselection.
With this enhancement, data packets can be transferred without loss from the serving cell to
the target cell when an MS in the transfer state performs intra-BSC inter-routing area cell
reselection. In this way, data transfer quickly restores after the MS camps on a new routing
area. This increases data throughput.
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

112
3.2.3 GBFD-119801 Packet SI Status (PSI)

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the MS requests the system information that it requires by sending the
Packet SI Status message to the BSC to reduce the service interruption time or service delay.
Benefits
This feature is used with the NACC to reduce the interruption time of the packet service due
to cell reselection, improving the packet service quality and enhancing user experience.
Description
The MS in packet transfer mode notifies the BSC of the system information it requires by
sending the Packet SI Status message to the BSC. The BSC then sends the system information
to the MS on the PACCH. The MS uses the obtained system information for the packet
service being processed to avoid the service interruption or delay.
This feature is used with the NACC to speed up the cell reselection and reduce the service
interruption time.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
3.2.4 GBFD-510502 Handover Re-establishment

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

113
Summary
On receiving the Error Indication message from the BTS during the handover process, the
BSC does not regard it as a call drop directly and attempts to re-establish a call on the old
channel.
Benefits
Handover re-establishment provides the following benefits:
Reduces the call drop rate and improving user satisfaction.
Improves network KPIs.
Description
In the handover process, the BSC sends the Handover Command message to the MS. Then, if
the BSC does not receive any response from the MS but receives an Error Indication message
from the BTS, the BSC regards it as a call drop. After handover re-establishment is applied,
the BSC indicates that the BTS can re-establish a call on the old link over the Um interface
after the BSC receives an Error Indication message on the old link. If the call re-establishment
is successful, the MS makes calls on the old channel and no call drop occurs.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The BTS must support this feature.
3.2.5 GBFD-117501 Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

Availability
Summary
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced in R99. Compared with the
traditional MR, the EMR has more measurement-related information, such as the bit error
probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER). This facilitates the performance improvement
of the power control algorithm and the handover algorithm.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

114
Benefits
Improves the capability of monitoring the voice quality, and the performance of the
power control algorithm and the handover algorithm.
Provides better performance for GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA interoperability by

supporting up to 15 neighboring 3G cells.
Description
The EMR is a new downlink measurement report introduced in R99. It is reported to the
network by the MS. Compared with the MR, the EMR has the following advantages:
1. The EMR uses an optimized scheme of encoding the neighboring cell information and
reports more neighboring cells than the MR. The MR provides up to six neighboring GSM
cells whereas the EMR provides up to 15 GSM/WCDMA/TD_SCDMA neighboring cells.
Therefore, the EMR provides better performance for the GSM/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA
interoperability and ensures the service continuity.
2. The EMR is added with the BEP, which is used to identify the channel quality. BEP is
estimated one burst after another. It reflects the current CIR, delay of signals, and velocity of
the MS. In addition, BEP adopts the 5-bit encoding scheme whereas RXQUAL adopts the
3-bit encoding scheme. Therefore, compared with RXQUAL, BEP has higher precision,
especially when the radio signal quality is poor.
3. The EMR is added with the number of speech frames that are correctly received, which is
used to calculate FER. In comparison with RXQUAL that measures the radio signal, the
measurement effect of EFR is better because it measures the encoding/decoding performance
of the speech signal.
RXQUAL should be replaced with BEP and FER for the power control algorithm and the
handover algorithm that use RXQUAL to evaluate radio signal quality because BEP and FER
can be used to improve the performance of those algorithms.
According to 3GPP TS 44018, through the MI/2QUATER system information, the network
can determine whether an MS should report the measurement information about the serving
cell and neighboring cells through MR or EMR.
This feature should be supported by MS. If EMR enabled, and MS cannot report accurately
measurement items of EMR, like BEP and FER, the HO success rate may be dropped.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

115

GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell
3.2.6 GBFD-119502 PS Handover

Availability
Summary
The PS handover involves the internal inter-cell handover and the external inter-cell handover
(including the inter-RAT handover).
Benefits
The interruption period of PS services during handover is shortened, ensuring the QoS of PS
services especially conversational services. Therefore, operators can provide more
value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming to increase revenue.
Description
The PS handover complies with the related 3GPP R6 protocols, mainly the 3GPP TS 44.060,
48.018, and 43.129.
Conversational services have high requirement for the interruption period and cell reselection
cannot meet this requirement. With the introduction of PS handover, before the MS is handed
over, radio resources are allocated to the MS in the target cell. This greatly decreases the
latency of cell change and reduces the service interruption period to less than 150 ms. Besides,
PS handover takes into account factors such as the signal level and the load in the neighboring
cells in advance and therefore ensures the success rate of PS handover and the throughput of
the new cell. In this way, QoS is ensured.
The PS handover involves the internal inter-cell handover and the external inter-cell handover
(including the inter-RAT handover). In addition, the PS handover involves also the handover
triggered by the MS in NC0 or NC1 mode and the handover triggered by the network side in
NC2 mode.
The GBSS provides performance statistics related to PS handover. Based on the types of PS
handover, measurement counters are classified into intra-RAT handover counters, inter-RAT
handover counters.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

116
Dependency
None
3.2.1 GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network

Availability
Summary
The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. In the
enhanced dual-band network, two co-sited cells with different coverage areas logically form a
cell group. One is an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced
dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two
cells in a cell group.
Benefits
The enhanced dual-band network enables a network to support multiple frequency bands and
enables operators to expand frequency bands.
If the KPIs are acceptable, resource sharing between the overlaid and underlaid subcells helps
implement an accurate load sharing algorithm.
Description
Based on the multi-band network, the enhanced dual-band network enhances the channel
sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells.
The enhanced dual-band network enables two co-sited cells with different coverage areas to
form a cell group logically. The two cells are configured with the BCCH and SDCCH. One is
an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced dual-band network
algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group.
The overlaid and underlaid subcells can obtain the information about each other, such as
signal level, channel, and load. Therefore, the KPIs such as the handover success rate and
assignment success rate can be kept at proper values when the channels in the overlaid and
underlaid subcells are shared.
The two cells cannot be assigned to two different operators.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

117
Dependency
None
None
3.2.1 GBFD-510101 Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC)

Availability
Summary
The automatic frequency correction (AFC) feature uses a special balancing algorithm to
estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the
GMSK-coded signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the
frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in
real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of
the BTS.
Benefits
This feature improves the decoding performance of the physical link in the uplink in the fast
moving condition, ensuring the physical transmission performance and reliable connections
between the fast-moving MS and the BTS. In addition, this feature enables the system to
support a telecommunication environment with a speed higher than 500 km/h, which serves as
the basis of the high-speed frequency offset handover algorithm.
Description
AFC is a BTS frequency correction algorithm designed for fast-moving MSs. This algorithm
ensures reliable radio links and continuous services with good voice quality when the MS
moves at a speed of 500 km/h.
According to Doppler frequency shift principle, the frequency of the signals sent by the
fast-moving MS shifts. The frequency shift information is related to the moving speed and
direction of the MS relative to the BTS. The BTS digital signal processor uses a special
balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the
frequency of the GMSK-coded signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC
estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard
frequency in real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working
frequency of the BTS. This feature improves the decoding performance of the physical link in
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

118
the uplink in the fast moving condition, ensuring the physical transmission performance and
reliable connections between the fast-moving MS and the BTS.
The performance of AFC depends on the vertical distance between the BTS and the railway.
The shorter the vertical distance is, the faster the change of the frequency offset is when the
train approaches the BTS. Therefore, the AFC loop cannot keep pace with the change of
frequency offset, leading to a great residual frequency offset.
Simulation results show that the frequency offset smaller than 100 Hz has little impact on the
demodulation performance. Therefore, when the TRX is on the GSM900 band and the speed
of the train is 600 km/h, only the vertical distance of more than 100 m is supported if the loop
bandwidth is 2 Hz. In the case of a lower demand for the voice quality, the vertical distance
between the BTS and the railway can be shorter.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
Common AFC corrects only uplink frequencies so that the BTS can correctly demodulate
uplink signals. The downlink signals from the BTS to the MS also encounter Doppler
frequency shift. Most MSs, however, do not have the frequency correction function.
The downlink AFC function enables the BTS to pre-compensate downlink signals for
frequency offset based on the estimated uplink frequency offset so that the frequency offset of
the downlink signals received by the MS is zero.
Dependency
GBFD-115821 EICC
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GSM high-speed service.
3.2.2 GBFD-510102 Fast Move Handover

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

119
Summary
This feature enables better cell handover in a short period of time.
Benefits
Generally, the chain cell algorithm is not used because of the special characteristics of the
railway and highway users. This may lead to slow handover or call drops during handover.
With this feature, the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition is increased and
therefore the subscriber satisfaction is increased.
Description
In a fast-moving train, it takes a short time for an MS to move across a cell. Therefore, a
handover must be performed quickly. To reduce the handover failure rate, a handover must be
quickly initiated when required. If the handover fails (for example, when the radio interface
suddenly incurs interference), a second handover must be quickly initiated.
The fast PBGT handover algorithm enables better cell handover in a short period of time.
Compared with the existing PBGT handover algorithm, the fast PBGT handover algorithm
has the following advantages:
Handing over an MS to a proper target cell by predicting the moving direction of the MS
Accelerating the handover decision to improve the handover rate
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover
GBFD-110601 HUAWEI I Handover or GBFD-510501 HUAWEI II Handover
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

120
3.2.3 GBFD-510103 Chain Cell Handover

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to the chain
neighboring cell.
Benefits
This feature increases the handover success rate in the fast-moving condition and therefore
increases the subscriber satisfaction.
Description
By predicting the moving direction of a fast-moving MS, this feature enables the fast-moving
MS to be handed over between two chain neighboring cells. Therefore, the handover success
rate is increased and the network quality is improved. Chain neighboring cells ensure reliable
handovers between cells.
Chain neighboring cells are formed on the basis of the linear coverage characteristic of
the fast-moving environment such as the railway.
A handover to a chain neighboring cell is preferred. In addition, a handover to the

moving direction of the user should be guaranteed.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

121
3.2.4 GBFD-510105 PS AFC

Availability
Summary
PS Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) applies to PS services that use Gaussian Minimum
Shift Keying (GMSK) or 8 Phase Shift Keying (8PSK) and are processed along high-speed
railways. PS AFC estimates the frequency offset for each burst by using frequency
discrimination. Based on the frequency offset, PS AFC corrects the frequency of baseband
signals before whitening filtering, and then the signals whose frequencies are corrected are
used for demodulation.
This feature improves the demodulation performance of uplink high-order PS services from
MSs that are moving at least 200 km/hour (GSM900) or at least 100 km/hour (DCS1800).
Applying this feature on services from MSs that are moving at a low rate of speed, however,
will deteriorate the demodulation performance.
Benefits
Improves the throughput of uplink Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE)
services.
Decreases the demodulation threshold for uplink EDGE services.
Decreases the EDGE data block retransmission rate.
Description
PS AFC has three procedures: frequency discrimination, frequency correction, and time
resynchronization and channel estimation. The AFC process is described as follows:
1. PS AFC performs frequency discrimination on the IQ data of a burst before whitening
filtering as follows: After reconstructing reference receive signals based on the local training
sequence and the Channel Impulse Response (CIR), the PS AFC module performs the
correlation operation and cross product on the receive signals and the reference receive signal
to estimate the frequency offset. If the estimated frequency offset is less than or equal to 1000
Hz (GSM900)/2000 Hz (DCS1800), the estimated value is used. If the estimated frequency
offset is greater than 1000 Hz (GSM900)/2000 Hz (DCS1800), the value 1000 Hz
(GSM900)/2000 Hz (DCS1800) is used.
2. PS AFC corrects the frequency of the IQ data for this burst before whitening filtering.
3. PS AFC performs time resynchronization and Least Square (LS) channel estimation on the
IQ data after frequency correction. The length of the CIR used during time resynchronization
and LS channel estimation is calculated by the CIR length adaptive module.
If PS AFC is enabled, the IQ data and CIR after AFC are used. If PS AFC is disabled, the IQ
data and CIR before AFC are used.
If PS AFC is disabled, PS services using Modulation and Coding Scheme 5 (MCS5) are
unavailable for MSs moving faster than 350 km/hour because the demodulation performance
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

122
is poor. If PS AFC is enabled, PS services using MCS5 reach the peak throughput when the
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) is greater than 10 dB.
Applying PS AFC increases the throughput of PS services using MCS1 by 25% to 100% for
MSs moving 550 km/hour and with an SNR of 2 dB to 6 dB. The throughput of these PS
services is inversely proportional to the SNR.
The preceding moving speed applies to MSs that work at GSM900. The speed for MSs that
work at GSM1800 is reduced by 50%.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-115821 EICC
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-115832 VAMOS Call Drop Solution
None
3.3 Interference Suppression

3.3.1 GBFD-119504 PS Power Control
Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

123
Summary
This feature enables the BSC to adjust the transmit power of the BTS according to the link
quality of the Um interface. In this way, the desirable link quality can be ensured without
requiring the maximum power on the PDCH. The reduced transmit power of the BTS helps
decrease the interference in the network and lower the power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
This feature lowers the BTS transmit power without compromising the link quality. In this
way, the network interference and power consumption can be reduced, while the system
capacity can be increased.
Description
PS power control is classified into PS uplink open-loop power control, PS uplink closed-loop
power control, and PS downlink closed-loop power control. PS uplink open-loop power
control, supported by the feature GBFD-119115 Power Control, was introduced in GBSS8.0.
EGPRS downlink closed-loop power control was introduced in GBSS12.0. In GBSS14.0,
GPRS downlink closed-loop power control is introduced, and EGPRS downlink closed-loop
power control is enhanced.
When this feature is enabled, the MS measures the quality of each downlink radio block and
then reports the measured quality to the BSC through the PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message. After processing the received information, the BSC performs the PS
downlink power control decision. If the BSC decides to perform power control, it calculates
the power attenuation value by using the PS downlink power control algorithm and then sends
the value to the BTS. Based on the received power attenuation value, the BTS adjusts the
transmit power on the current radio block.
This feature is suitable for a network with densely-scattered sites, high rate of frequency reuse,
and a large number of users. By controlling the transmit power on the PDCH in such a
network, the network interference and power consumption can be reduced, while the system
capacity can be increased.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
1.
GPRS downlink closed-loop power control is added.
2.
EGPRS downlink closed-loop power control is enhanced and related algorithms are
optimized. In addition, the issue in GSBB12.0 where a coding scheme decreases due to
improper EGPRS downlink closed-loop power control is solved using the following
methods:
Power compensation is performed on MRs during MR preprocessing, and filtering is

performed after power compensation, which minimizes the impact of improper power
control.
The impact of power control is considered during downlink link adaptation. This avoids
a sharp decrease in the coding scheme.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

124

None
3.3.2 GBFD-115801 ICC

Availability
Summary
When combining the signals from multiple antennas, the interference counteract combine
(ICC) uses interference correlation of different antennas to eliminate some interference.
Benefits
Improves the voice quality and data throughput in the scenarios with severe interference,
for example, where tight frequency reuse is applied, improving user experience.
Improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and increases the system capacity.
Description
ICC is a technology that suppresses the interference by combining signals of multiple
antennas. Generally, the interference on different antennas is generated by the same
interference source. Therefore, the interfering signals received by different antennas have a
certain correlation. ICC uses this correlation when combing signals to eliminate some
interference. In this way, ICC improves the anti-interference capability of equipment and
increases the uplink coverage and receiver sensitivity.
ICC can suppress the interference within the GSM system and from other systems only if the
interference on different antennas has a correlation.
Huawei BSS supports dual-antenna ICC and four-antenna ICC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

125

This feature should be used in a synchronous network.
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
None
3.3.3 GBFD-115821 EICC

Availability
Summary
The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and
temporal correlation: co-channel interference (CCI) and inter-symbol interference (ISI). After
considering the correlation of these two types of interference, EICC combines the signals
received by multiple antennas to provide better signal quality on the uplink.
Benefits
The EICC feature improves the uplink signal quality to meet the requirements for radio
communications and to improve the uplink performance in scenarios with wide
coverage.
With the uplink anti-interference capability improved, tight frequency reuse can be
achieved and therefore the system capacity is increased.
Description
Similar to ICC, EICC mainly applies to the network where the tight frequency reuse pattern is
adopted and the traffic volume is heavy.
The interference on the signals received by multiple antennas has both spatial correlation and
temporal correlation: CCI and ISI. Considering the spatial correlation and temporal
correlation of the interference, ICC eliminates these two types of interference independently.
EICC, however, considers the correlation of these two types of interference and constructs the
multidimensional combining coefficient matrix to combine the signals according to the
maximum signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) criteria. In this way, EICC obtains the optimized uplink
signals.
EICC requires the matrix of interference, which is calculated on the basis of the training
sequence of wanted signals. For each RX signal, the network estimates a channel model based
on the training sequence of the signal, reconstructs the wanted signal, and subtracts the
wanted signal from the RX signal to obtain the interfering signal. The network then estimates
the matrix of each interfering signal and analyzes the statistical dependency of these
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

126
interfering signals. Based on the statistical dependency, some interference is counteracted

during the combination of RX signals to maximize the combination gain.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
The adaptive diversity combination function is supported.
EICC is mainly used on a network experiencing interference. If the noise on the live network
is limited, Maximal Ratio Combining (MRC) brings greater gains in uplink performance than
EICC. The adaptive diversity combination function introduced in GBSS14.0 checks whether
the existing call is in an interference-limited or noise-limited scenario. If the call is in an
interference-limited scenario, the BTS uses EICC. If the call is in a noise-limited scenario, the
BTS uses MRC.
Dependency
It is recommended that this feature be used in a synchronous network.
This feature should be used with the following features:
GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
None
3.3.4 GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband

hopping)
Availability
Summary
With this feature, wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many
frequencies according to the specified sequences. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping
and baseband hopping.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

127
Benefits
This feature reduces the co-channel and adjacent-channel interference and therefore
improves the voice quality of the network.
The tight frequency reuse pattern can be adopted to increase the system capacity.
This feature improves the information security.
Description
With this feature, a traffic carrier frequency hops along the time according to the specified
sequence. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping in terms of
implementation of the TRX. The frequency hopping enables operators to adopt the tight
frequency reuse pattern, increasing the system capacity while maintaining the good voice
quality. The frequency hopping feature minimizes the interference on a channel from the same
interference source. Therefore, it is widely used in the communications system because it
helps improve the anti-attenuation capability, anti-interference capability, and information
security.
In RF hopping, the frequencies for both transmitter and receiver of the TRX participate in
frequency hopping. The number of frequencies participating in the FH can exceed the number
of TRXs in the cell. RF hopping is implemented through the real-time switchover between
two frequency synthesizers. RF hopping has the following advantages:
RF hopping lowers the speed requirements on the frequency synthesizer.
When there is no FH, the two frequency synthesizers work in backup mode, enhancing
the system reliability.
RF hopping avoids the impact of the fast frequency conversion on the signal quality, and
therefore realizes the FH of all frequencies on the supported frequency band.
In baseband hopping, each transmitter works on a fixed frequency, and the TX does not
participate in FH. The TX frequency hopping is achieved though the switching of baseband
signals. The RX of the TRX, however, must participate in FH. Therefore, the number of
frequencies participating in FH in a cell must be less than or equal to the number of TRXs
assigned for the cell. When a TRX is faulty, the system enables the baseband FH TRX
cooperation to ensure that the voice quality in the cell is not affected by the faulty TRX.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Optimization of Baseband FH TRX cooperation:
In the baseband FH cell, if the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, remove the faulty
TRX from baseband FH group and continue FH with the good running TRX. Meanwhile the
same mechanism will take effect when main BCCH TRX cooperation happens, it will remain
hopping with the baseband TRX.
GBSS12.0
Support RF hopping and baseband hopping at the same time in one cell
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

128

Base band hopping is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
None
3.3.5 GBFD-113702 BCCH Carrier Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
With this feature, non-BCCH timeslots participate in the baseband hopping, improving the
radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots and the cell performance.
Benefits
This feature helps improve the radio quality of non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH carrier.
Description
In Huawei BSS, the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX can participate in baseband
hopping in the cell. In this way, the baseband hopping performance is improved because the
number of frequencies participating in FH increases, and the performance of non-BCCH
timeslots on the BCCH TRX is improved because they also participate in the FH.
For the FH that the BCCH carrier participates in, the BCCH timeslot is not involved, but the
rest timeslots can participate in the baseband hopping.
According to the GSM specifications, the BCCH must be carried on a fixed frequency to
ensure the cell selection, cell reselection, and handover measurement. Therefore, the BCCH
carrier cannot participate in the RF hopping.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

129

Baseband hopping in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
RF hopping in GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
None
3.3.6 GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping

Availability
Summary
Similar to the baseband frequency hopping, the antenna frequency hopping enables the data of
all the timeslots on a specific carrier to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other TRXs
in the cell. In this way, the space diversity is increased and the quality of the TRX data
received by the MS is improved, and therefore the network performance is improved.
Benefits
Increases the space diversity and improves the quality of BCCH TRX data received by
the MS, improving the network performance and reducing the network interference.
Increases the network capacity. Compared with the non-FH or FH with a few frequencies,
the antenna frequency hopping can increase the radio network capacity by up to 30% and
the network diversity gain by up to 3 dB.
Description
all carriers to be transmitted in turn on the antennas of other TRXs in the cell.
This feature applies to the BCCH on the BCCH TRX. The BCCH must be transmitted on the
same frequency. Therefore, the BCCH cannot hop by baseband hopping or RF hopping. In a
GSM cell, however, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are
transmitted on the BCCH of the BCCH TRX. These broadcast messages are important for the
MS in idle mode to search for a network and for the MS in dedicated mode to measure the
neighboring cell. If the MS is located in a place where it is difficult to receive the messages
from the BCCH TRX or if the antenna for the BCCH TRX is damaged, then the MS cannot
properly receive the broadcast control messages from the BCCH TRX.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

130
all timeslots on the BCCH TRX to be transmitted in turn on antennas of other TRXs. This
increases the space diversity of the BCCH signals and improves the quality of the data
received by the MS from the BCCH TRX, improving the network performance.
For example:
If a cell is configured with three TRXs and each TRX connects to one antenna with the
antenna frequency hopping enabled, the data of TRX 0 may be transmitted on antenna 1 at
this instant and on antenna 0 at the next instant, and then on antenna 2 at the third instant. In
this way, the space diversity is realized and therefore the receiver performance of the MS is
improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shut down (in GBS9.0 and former version;
DRRU/DRFU support GBFD-111602 from GBSS12.0)
GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage
GBFD-111604 Intelligent Combiner Bypass
GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)
The BTS must support this feature, and at least two antennas are required in a cell to enable
antenna frequency hopping.
3.3.7 GBFD-119507 PS Downlink DTX

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

131
Summary
The PS Downlink DTX feature decreases the number of dummy blocks on PDCHs and
amount of unnecessary data to be retransmitted over the Um interface, reducing BTS power
consumption and network interference.
Benefits
Reduces downlink network interference, improves CS and PS service performance, and
improves network quality.
Reduces BTS power consumption, achieving energy efficiency and emission reduction.
Description
1.
The BTS does not send dummy blocks over the Um interface and stops power
transmission in either of the following conditions:
Idle PDCHs are available.
There are TBFs on PDCHs but no valid data needs to be sent.
2.
When there are TBFs on PDCHs, the BSC resends the downlink data blocks that have
been sent to MSs but have not been acknowledged. This increases the possibility of MSs
correctly receiving the data blocks. In addition, the BSC reduces unnecessary data
retransmission to reduce the BTS transmit power.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
GBFD-119202 Packet Assignment Taken Over by the BTS
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

132
3.3.8 GBFD-119508 PS Uplink DTX

Availability
Summary
In extended uplink TBF mode, the PS Uplink DTX feature reduces the frequency for
scheduling TBFs in an inactive period and prevents the sending of dummy blocks. This
reduces MS power consumption and network interference.
Benefits
Reduces uplink network interference, improves CS and PS service performance, and improves
network quality.
Reduces the MS power consumption.
Description
1.
The BSC instructs the MS not to send dummy blocks when extended uplink TBFs are in
an inactive period.
The BSC sets the information element (IE) EXT_UTBF_NODATA in the system information
(SI) message 13 to indicate whether the MS needs to send dummy blocks when extended
uplink TBFs are in an inactive period. This feature is available in 3GPP Release 6.
2.
The extended uplink TBFs in an inactive period are scheduled with a low frequency.
The BSC reduces the frequency for scheduling extended uplink TBFs in an inactive period.
This decreases the number of dummy blocks sent using these TBFs, reducing MS power
consumption.
After this feature is enabled, the data transmission using uplink TBFs may be delayed when
the BSC reduces the frequency for scheduling extended uplink TBFs in an inactive period.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

133

3.3.9 GBFD-119510 Um Adaptive Interference Suppression

Availability
Summary
The Um Adaptive Interference Suppression feature enables the BTS to detect Um interface
interference using the interference characteristics detection algorithm. Based on the detection
result, the BTS selects an optimal interference suppression method to eliminate the Um
interface interference.
This improves the uplink anti-interference capability. This feature also provides an enhanced
interference suppression algorithm for CS services. With this algorithm, the BTS filters the
synchronization position on a timeslot based on the relationship between the timeslot and its
neighboring timeslot used by the same MS. This improves the network anti-interference
capability and uplink receive quality.
Benefits
Improves the uplink anti-interference capability during refarming.
Further improves the uplink receive quality in cooperation with the ICC and EICC
features, and increases PS data upload rates.
Decreases the proportion of low quality indicator 6 (LQI 6) and LQI 7 of all LQIs by a
maximum of 13% when the following conditions are met:
A tight frequency reuse pattern is used.
The proportion of LQI 6 and LQI 7 accounts for more than 2% of all LQIs.
The EICC is enabled.
Description
Network interference becomes stronger when the refarming technology is used in a tight
frequency reuse pattern. To further enhance the uplink anti-interference capability and
improve the uplink receive quality, the Um Adaptive Interference Suppression feature is used
with the ICC and EICC features.
With the Um Adaptive Interference Suppression feature, the BTS uses the interference
characteristics detection algorithm to detect the Um interface interference by timeslot used by
MSs. Based on the detection result, the BTS selects an optimal interference suppression
method to minimize the adjacent-channel interference, co-channel interference, or
interference from multiple sources.
This feature also provides an enhanced interference suppression algorithm for CS services.
With this algorithm, the BTS filters the synchronization position on a timeslot based on the
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

134
relationship between the timeslot and its neighboring timeslot used by the same MS. This
improves the network anti-interference capability and uplink receive quality.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
3.3.10 GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network

Availability
Summary
When Soft-Synchronized Network feature is enabled, all the BTSs under a BSC synchronize
with each other by adjusting the frame number and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same
through software. In a synchronous network, dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic
channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel
collision. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
Benefits
This feature synchronizes all the BTSs under a BSC through software without additional
hardware devices.
After the BTSs are synchronized, the IBCA feature can be implemented. The IBCA
enabled in the synchronous network can improve the network capacity by 20% to 50%.
After the BTSs are synchronized, the performance of technologies such as ICC, EICC
and SAIC can be greatly improved. The ICC enabled in the synchronous network can
improve the network performance by about 5.5 dB compared with the performance in the
asynchronous network, and the SAIC enabled in the synchronous network can increase
the network capacity by about 40%.
After the BTSs are synchronized, the KPIs related to the mean opinion score (MOS),
paging success rate, handover success rate, call drop rate, and traffic volume can
improve when ICC/EICC or single antenna interference cancellation (SAIC) is used.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

135
This feature realizes the software synchronization with the reference BTS, enabling the
flexible networking and reducing the workload of synchronization.
Description
Most of the existing networks work in asynchronous mode. That is, all BTSs are not
synchronized, and each BTS adopts a different frame number and offset.
There are two network synchronization modes: hardware synchronization and software
synchronization.
In hardware synchronization mode, each BTS is equipped with a GPS device to realize
the network synchronization through the satellite. This requires expensive hardware
devices.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software.

This feature enables all the BTSs under a BSC to synchronize with each other by
adjusting the frame number and bit offset to be the same through software.
In the asynchronous network, the system cannot estimate the adjacent-channel interference
but only can reduce the interference by using the functions such as loose frequency reuse and
frequency hopping.
In the synchronous network, the system estimates the co-channel and adjacent-channel
interference in any inter-cell overlapping area and minimizes inter-cell co-channel and
adjacent-channel collision by adopting the dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic
channel allocation. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network
capacity.
In the synchronous network, the ICC and SAIC achieves the optimal performance. When
wanted signals are synchronized with interfering signals in time, the interfering signals are the
same in the entire burst. The interference estimated on the basis of the training sequence can
effectively counteract the interference during the burst. In this case, the ICC and SAIC
provide the optimal performance.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature needs to be used with the GBFD-117002 IBCA
feature to avoid the inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel interference. This greatly
improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity.
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature is applicable to the scenario where the end-to-end
communication between the BSC and BTS is based on TDM or IP.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Inter-BSC soft-synchronized network: software synchronization of BTSs under multiple
BSCs
Multiple-reference soft-synchronized network: In the system, some BTSs are synchronized
through hardware and others are synchronized through software to enable the flexible
networking. When the network replanning and upgrade are required, the enhanced feature
fully utilizes the existing resources to realize synchronization, reducing the workload of
synchronization and saving the costs.
GBSS15.0
The Soft-Synchronized Network feature used with the Synchronous Ethernet feature:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

136
When the Abis interface uses the IP over FE/GE transmission mode, the Soft-Synchronized
Network feature enables BTSs to retrieve clock signals from the data flow transmitted on
Ethernet links and adjust the clock phase based on the obtained time offset. This helps reduce
operators' CAPEX costs. However, this enhancement is not supported when the BTS FE
electrical port uses 10Base-T.
Dependency
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP
GBSS15.0 enhancement depends on the following feature:
GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet
If GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization is
used on a network, this feature should be used with the following features:
GBFD-115801 ICC
GBFD-115821 EICC
GBFD-118103 Network Support SAIC
GBFD-117002 IBCA
None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GSM spectrum utilization improvement
service.
3.3.11 GBFD-113721 Robust Air Interface Signalling

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

137
Summary
With this feature, the FACCH frames and SACCH frames are sent repeatedly when the radio
quality is poor. Therefore, this feature enhances the anti-interference capability of the
signaling links on the FACCH and SACCH and increases the possibility that the MS and the
BSC successfully receive the signaling messages. This feature involves repeated sending of
downlink FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
Benefits
Repeated sending of FACCH frames improves the FACCH link performance of the
common MS by 2 dB and the FACCH link performance of the MS in R6 version by 4 dB
to 5 dB.
Repeated sending of SACCH frames improves the SACCH link performance of the
common MS by 4 dB to 5 dB.
The improvement in the FACCH and SACCH performance reduces call drops and
increases the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the BSC.
Description
In the network with tight frequency reuse and poor radio transmission performance, the
messages sent through the FACCH frames or the SACCH frames may be lost because of the
high bit error rate on the Um interface. This feature involves repeated sending of downlink
FACCH frames and repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames.
Repeated sending of downlink FACCH frames

When the receive quality in the downlink measurement report is lower than the specified
threshold, the BTS determines whether to resend the FACCH frames. The repeated
sending of downlink FACCH frames can increase the possibility that the MS
successfully receives the signaling messages.
Repeated sending of uplink/downlink SACCH frames

If the BTS detects that the SACCH frames are incorrectly decoded, it instructs the MS to
resend the recent SACCH frame. If the MS detects that the SACCH frames are
incorrectly decoded, it instructs the BTS to resend the recent SACCH frame.
With this feature, the voice quality is slightly affected because the signaling messages are sent
through frame stealing.
When the radio quality is poor, repeated sending of signaling messages in the downlink can
reduce call drops caused by decoding failure. Repeated sending of signaling messages in the
uplink can increase the accuracy of the handover decision and power control decision of the
BSC by increasing the possibility of correctly decoding the uplink measurement reports.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

138

None
MSs and the BTS must support this feature.
3.4 Coverage Enhancement

3.4.1 GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology)
Availability
Summary
The Power Boost Technology (PBT) enables the DTRU to transmit the combined signals with
high gain and to achieve extended network coverage.
Benefits
This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the
network capacity.
In the initial network deployment stage, the operators can use the PBT to extend the
network coverage, reducing the number of BTSs.
When the subscriber number increases and the network capacity needs to be expanded,
operator can transform the PBT-enabled single TRX into two common-mode TRXs,
protesting the hardware investment.
Description
In the DTRU, two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner.
The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two
TRXs, and then transmits the combined signals. In this way, the downlink transmit power is
higher than the transmit power of the original signals, and the transmit power with high gain
is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

139

None
None
3.4.2 GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
To enable this feature, the two TRXs in the DTRU are connected to the two separated antenna
feeders respectively, and the two antennas transmit the same downlink signal on the same
frequency. Through the introduction of the controllable delay and changeable phase between
two signals of the two TRXs, the diversity gain in terms of time and space can be obtained,
enhancing the RX signals and reducing the signal attenuation. This in turn, extends the
network coverage.
Benefits
This feature can realize the mutual transformation between the network coverage and the
network capacity.
This feature can effectively extend the downlink coverage, reducing the number of
required BTSs.
When the requirement for the network coverage decreases and the requirement for the
capacity increases, operator can transform the transmit diversity-enabled single TRX into
common-mode TRXs.
Description
The feature enables the two TRXs that are integrated in the DTRU to transmit the correlated
signals on the same frequency. This provides two independent downlink multi-path signals,
and these signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. In this way, the diversity gain is
obtained, and the quality of the RX signal is improved. Therefore, the downlink coverage is
improved. If the DTRU works in single TRX mode, this feature can be enabled by performing
remote data configuration.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

140
Dependency
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when using
RRU3008/RRU3908:
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing (Dual PA power sharing)
None
3.4.3 GBFD-115903 4-Way Receiver Diversity

Availability
Summary
The 4-way receiver diversity technology allows four antennas (four uni-polarized antennas or
two dual-polarized antennas) to receive the multipath uplink signals from one cell. Then the
received signals are combined. Compared with two-way receiver diversity, four-way receiver
diversity can improve the receive sensitivity, extending the uplink coverage.
Benefits
The 4-way receiver diversity technology can enhance the uplink RX signal strength by
increasing the receive gain of the BTS antennas without increasing the transmit power of the
MS. In this way, the cell coverage is extended and the improved QoS can be achieved.
Description
The coverage of a cell is determined by the transmit power of the BTS and MS, and the
receive gain of the BTS antenna. Because the transmit power of an MS is much lower than
that of a BTS, in most cases, the actual coverage is lower than the designed value and the
voice quality deteriorates.
With appropriate design, the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to
receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to
achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. Therefore, the receive sensitivity
is improved, and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that
of two-way receiver diversity.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

141
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
3.4.4 GBFD-118101 Dynamic Transmit Diversity

Availability
Summary
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity.
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based transmit diversity is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit
serves as a single-transceiver unit. However, timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity
maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage.
Dynamic transmit diversity fully uses idle timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas
with weak signals, such as at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save network
resources and capacity. Based on actual network conditions, the application on some timeslots
helps expand the coverage and improve the downlink output capacity, balancing the traffic
volume and coverage.
Dynamic transmit diversity can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of
a cell. This is mainly used to improve the concentric performance when the co-BCCH
function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. One MS occupies one TCH
during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR. If the voice quality of an MS is
lower than the predefined threshold, the network enables dynamic transmit diversity to assign
the same timeslots on two adjacent TRXs to the MS. The signals carried on the two timeslots
are the same, and the phases are also identical. The signals are sent out over different transmit
ports and then enhanced through signal combination. Therefore, the receive quality of the
signals is improved. If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

142
MS, the intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle channel so that the
adjacent channel can be used for dynamic transmit diversity. The receive quality of the MS
that is switched to an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the handover.
If the voice quality is higher than the predefined threshold, the network disables dynamic
transmit diversity and then releases the adjacent channel.
Compared with common transmit diversity, dynamic transmit diversity does not decrease the
capacity by half. It can achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible
conversion.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-113201 Concentric Cell
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping)
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature when using multi-carrier RRU
dynamic TX diversity:
None
3.4.5 GBFD-118102 Dynamic PBT (Power Boost Technology)

Availability
Summary
Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is timeslot-based PBT.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

143
Benefits
Currently, the TRX-based PBT is applied. In this case, a double-transceiver unit serves as a
single-transceiver unit. Timeslot-based PBT, however, maintains optimal balance between
capacity and coverage.
Dynamic PBT uses timeslots and expands the coverage in the areas with weak signals, such as
at cell borders, indoors, or in cars. This feature helps save network resources and capacity.
Based on actual network conditions, this feature helps balance the traffic volume and
coverage.
Dynamic PBT can increase the handover success rate of the MSs at the border of a cell. This
helps improve the concentric cell performance when the co-BCCH function is enabled.
Description
Dynamic PBT is timeslot-based PBT.
One MS occupies one TCH during a call, and the voice quality is monitored by the MR.
If the signal strength of an MS is lower than the preset threshold, the network enables
dynamic PBT. In this case, the channels corresponding to the same timeslot of two TRXs
in one TRX module cannot be assigned to the MSs; whereas the RF channels serving as
backup channels can provide PBT service. The signals and the phases of the traffic
timeslot in the RF channel are the same as those of the same timeslot in the same TRX
module of the backup channel. The signals are strengthened after the combination, and
therefore the signal strength of MSs is enhanced.
If the channel of the same timeslot of the adjacent TRX is occupied by an MS, the
intra-cell handover is performed to switch the MS to an idle channel so that the adjacent
channel can be used for dynamic PBT. The receive quality of the MS that is switched to
an idle channel is good. Therefore, no call drop occurs during the handover.
If the signal strength of an MS is higher than the preset threshold, the network disables
dynamic PBT. Then, the borrowed channel is restored to the idle state and provides
access services.
Compared with common PBT, dynamic PBT does not decrease the capacity by half. It can
achieve a balance between capacity and coverage and realize flexible conversion.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

144

None
3.4.6 GBFD-118104 Enhanced EDGE Coverage

Availability
Summary
This feature increases the maximum transmit power of PS services by using the coverage
enhancement and power sharing techniques, enlarging the coverage area of the EDGE
network. This feature is applicable to both dual-carrier TRXs and multi-carrier TRXs.
Benefits
The feature increases the TRX transmit power in the 8PSK modulation scheme and the data
throughput at cell border. This improves user experience.
Description
In a GSM network, CS services and low-rate PS services use the GMSK modulation scheme
(CS14 and MCS14); high-rate PS services use the 8PSK modulation scheme (MCS59). In
the case of the 8PSK modulation scheme, the peak-to-average power ratio (PAPR) of a TRX
will increase. Before the introduction of this feature, the transmit power of the TRX needs to
be rolled back by 1.8 dB to ensure the linear output of the power amplifier. The transmit
power on EDGE channels that uses the 8PSK modulation scheme decreases by comparison
with the GMSK modulation scheme. This leads to bad user experience.
To solve this problem, Huawei has developed the feature Enhanced EDGE Coverage. By
adopting the coverage enhancement and power sharing techniques, the maximum transmit
power of the PS service is increased. With this feature, the data throughput at cell border is
increased. This feature is applicable to both dual-carrier TRXs and multi-carrier TRXs.
With respect to the dual-carrier TRX, the maximum transmit power of the PS service is
increased by using the dynamic transmit diversity and dynamic power boost technology (PBT)
techniques on the same timeslot of different carriers. In this way, the cell coverage of the PS
service can be comparable to that of the CS service.
With respect to the multi-carrier TRX, the maximum transmit power of the PS service is
increased by allocating the power margin of the multi-carrier TRX to the 8PSK traffic channel.
The power margin always exists because the power amplifier of the multi-carrier TRX does
not transmit signals at full power in most cases due to power control and the existence of idle
timeslots. By using the power margin, the cell coverage of the PS service can be comparable
to that of the CS service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

145
The maximum transmit power in the 8PSK modulation scheme should not exceed that in the
GMSK modulation scheme. Therefore, the network planning will not be affected.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
None
3.4.7 GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing

Availability
This feature is available from GBSS13.0.
Summary
The output power can be shared between TRXs at the timeslot level and be dynamically
adjusted to increase the network coverage.
Benefits
This feature increases the output power of TRXs, enhances the cell coverage, and improves
the power utilization of the Power Amplifier (PA).
Description
Dynamic Power Sharing is a type of cell coverage maximization solution that aims to meet
different power requirements of users distributed in different areas of a cell.
Users distributed in different areas of a cell require different transmit power to access the
radio network. Generally, users near the BTS require low transmit power; whereas users far
from the BTS require high transmit power. The Dynamic Power Sharing feature dynamically
adjusts the transmit power of channels according to the power required by different calls to
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

146
meet the power requirements of users far from the BTS. When the user distribution in a cell
dynamically changes, the dynamic transmit power of the TRXs that are enabled with this
feature can be greater than the average available static power of the TRXs to increase the cell
coverage with the same PA output power.
Improvement on downlink coverage
In a network with poor downlink signal quality or low-speed downlink PS services, dynamic
power sharing can be enabled to reduce the proportion of users with weak coverage. This
improves speech quality and increases data throughput, thereby improving user experience
and reducing user complaints.
The Dynamic Power Sharing feature can be enabled only when the PA or PAs whose output
power is shared support the multi-carrier RF module. There are two types of Dynamic Power
Sharing, namely, single-PA dynamic power sharing and dual-PA dynamic power sharing.
Single-PA dynamic power sharing. Assume that the multi-carrier RF module GRFU is used.
The output power of three to six TRXs on the GRFU can be dynamically shared. The
single-PA dynamic power sharing function improves the output power compared with static
power.
Dual-PA dynamic power sharing. Assume that two GRFU modules are used. The TRXs
provided by the two GRFU modules work in the resource pool mode, and the output power is
shared between the TRXs in the resource pool. The dual-PA dynamic power sharing function
can further improve the output power of TRXs in large configuration scenarios.
When the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function is enabled, the operating frequencies of
the two RF modules must be within the Downlink Frequency Bandwidth (DFB) (for example,
the DFB is 12.5 MHz when the operating frequencies of the RRU share the output power of
one PA, and the DFB is 15 MHz when the operating frequencies of the RFU share the output
power of one PA). Currently, if the RRU is enabled with the dual-PA dynamic power sharing
function, the RRU must be configured in the single-cell single-module 2-way transmit mode.
If the RFU is enabled with the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the RFU must be
configured in the single-cell dual-module mode.
Huawei is committed to optimize the network KPIs through algorithm improvements during
dynamic power sharing. The network KPIs can be further optimized when this feature is used
with Huawei network planning and network optimization services.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The single-PA dynamic power sharing function cannot be used with any of the following
features:
GBFD-117002 IBCA
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

147

GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing
GBFD-114001 Extended Cell (dual-timeslot extension function)
When the RFU uses the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the function cannot be used
with any of the following features:
GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-113701 RF hopping(Inter-module)
When the RRU uses the dual-PA dynamic power sharing function, the function cannot be used
with any of the following features:
GBFD-115902 Transmit Diversity
GBFD-117002 IBCA
None
3.4.8 GBFD-114001 Extended Cell

Availability
Summary
The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. This helps
operators to provide wider coverage in special areas.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

148
Benefits
The extended cell extends the coverage of the BTS and enables MSs to perform services in
long-distance areas, such as in vast plains and seas. In this way, the scope of network services
is extended and the network quality is improved.
Description
According to the GSM specifications, the maximum TA of a cell on the Um interface is 63
bits. Hence, the coverage radius of a cell cannot exceed 35 km. In the vast and sparsely
populated areas where the traffic is light and the transmission and power supply facilities are
unavailable, the cells with a coverage radius greater than 35 km are required. The extended
cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a common cell. When this feature is enabled, the
coverage radius of a cell can reach up to 120 km. This feature enables operators to deploy the
GSM network rapidly in a cost-effective way in remote areas, improving the profitability.
If the coverage radius of a cell exceeds 35 km, the signal delay exceeds the maximum TA of
63 bits. When an MS moves to the border of the cell, the MS transmits signals with the
maximum permissible TA value. If the MS keeps moving outwards, the system cannot adjust
the TA value in an adaptive way because the TA has reached the maximum value. In this case,
some signals transmitted by the MS are sent to the BTS receiver on the next timeslot. To solve
this problem, the extended cell feature can be used. When this feature is enabled, two
continuous timeslots are assigned for each MS call and the receiver window of the BTS
receiver is also extended to the width of two timeslots. Therefore, the cell coverage radius is
extended to more than 35 km. To enable the MSs in the extended coverage area to initiate
calls at any time, the BCCH, CCCH, and SDCCH should be assigned two timeslots.
In the double-timeslot extended cell, the GPRS/EGPRS services are supported.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The downlink throughput is enhanced in the double-timeslot extended cell. In the cells with a
coverage radius of more than 35 km, such as coast coverage, island coverage, or wide
coverage on land, the MS supporting multislot capability can be assigned PDCHs for four
downlink timeslots and one uplink timeslot. The extended cell can provide a data throughput
that is four times higher than that in a common cell with a single downlink timeslot for service
establishment. This accelerates the download speed, enhances user experience, and improves
the data service profitability of operators.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

149
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
3.4.9 GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell

Availability
Summary
This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell, which is
also called a cascading cell. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple
RRUs that belong to the same BBU. In the scenarios such as railway, tunnel, or indoor
coverage, a cascading cell can reduce handovers, improve the coverage efficiency, and
enhance user experience.
Benefits
This feature reduces handovers between cells and increases the handover success rate.
A cascading cell increases the effective coverage distance of each subsite and improves
the coverage efficiency of the entire cell because few handover areas are required
between different subsites.
Description
Cell cascading means that different subsites in the same BBU physically belong to different
sites but logically belong to the same cell. The principle is shown in the following figure.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

150
Cascading cells are carried in multiple subsites. These subsites have the same cell parameters
such as physical configurations, the number of TRXs, and frequencies. One cascading cell has
only one primary subsite responsible for cell management and service control. Other subsites
are secondary subsites. Under the control of the primary subsite, these secondary subsites
implement cell service functions such as the selection of available TRXs and the activation of
channels.
During the initial access of an MS, all the subsites calculate the uplink signal noise ratio (SNR)
of the MS respectively and report the result to the primary subsite. Then the primary subsite
selects the subsite with the optimal SNR as the serving subsite.
All the subsites continuously calculate the uplink SNR of the MS and then report the SNR to
the primary subsite. When the SNR reported by an adjacent subsite is better than the SNR
reported by the serving subsite, the conversion between subsites is triggered. When the MS
moves between subsites, the new subsite is connected and then the old subsite is disconnected
without the interruption of services. In this manner, seamless conversion is implemented and
the QoS is guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
This feature supports distributed service processing.
In versions earlier than GBSS14.0, services in a multi-site cell are processed by the primary
subsite in a centralized manner. In GBSS14.0, such services are processed by different
subsites on a logical carrier basis. This minimizes the possibility of service interruption
caused by faults in the primary subsite.
GBSS15.0
The RFU supports this feature. With the support of both RFUs and RRUs, the multi-site cell
can be flexibly deployed in various scenarios.
The RFU+RRU sites can replace sites that use macro BTSs and repeaters. This minimizes the
impact of cell splitting and swapping risks.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

151
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following features in GBSS12.0 and its earlier
versions:
None
3.5 Capacity Improvement

3.5.1 GBFD-511611 Duty-Cycle-based PDCH Management
Availability
Summary
By periodically analyzing the duty cycle of a packet data channel (PDCH), this feature
enables the BSC to accurately calculate the PDCH usage. This helps increase the efficiency in
which PDCHs carry temporary block flows (TBFs).
Benefits
Increases the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs by up to 60%, and decreases the
number of PDCHs to be activated by up to 45%.
Reduces the average data transmission rate per user on the logical link control (LLC)
layer by 15%.
Description
By periodically analyzing the duty cycle of a PDCH, the BTS can obtain the proportion of
resources occupied by valid information on the PDCH and compare the proportion with the
PDCH application threshold and PDCH release threshold:
If the proportion reaches the PDCH application threshold, the BTS applies for a new
PDCH.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

152
If the proportion reaches the PDCH release threshold, the BTS releases the PDCH.
In addition, with this feature, operators can determine whether to disable the dynamic PDCH
requests triggered due to insufficient MS multislot capability of PS subscribers.
To improve the efficiency in which PDCHs carry TBFs, it is recommended that the PDCH
Dynamic Adjustment with Two Thresholds feature be disabled before this feature is enabled.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114101 GPRS
None
3.5.2 GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell

Availability
Summary
The co-BCCH cell refers to a cell where the TRXs on the GSM900/DCS1800,
GSM850/DCS1800, or GSM850/PCS1900 coexist. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in
the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX.
Benefits
Decreases the number of BCCH TRXs because the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell
in a co-BCCH cell share one BCCH TRX.
Increases the frequency usage because the overlaid subcell uses a tight frequency reuse
pattern.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

153
Eliminates the configuration of the BCCH TRX in the overlaid subcell and decreases the
number of SDCCHs.
Decreases the numbers of cell reselections and inter-cell handovers.
Simplifies the network structure and reduces neighboring relationships, facilitating

network O&M.
Description
The co-BCCH cell is based on the concentric cell. The TRXs on the GSM900 or GSM850 are
configured in the underlaid subcell to extend cell coverage; the TRXs on the DCS1800 or
PCS1900 are configured in the overlaid subcell to absorb traffic.
Before the channel assignment, the system determines the bands supported by the MS. If the
MS supports the bands in the underlaid and overlaid subcells, the channel assignment strategy
of the concentric cell is applied. Otherwise, only the channel in the underlaid subcell can be
assigned to the MS.
The system assigns channels on different bands to the MS based on the receive level, receive
quality, and TA value. The underlaid subcell is used for extending cell coverage and the
overlaid subcell is used for absorbing traffic. Therefore, the cell coverage is maximized and
the capacity balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell is maintained.
In a co-BCCH cell, the TRXs on different bands belong to one cell, and one BCCH is shared
by both the underlaid and overlaid subcells. The overlaid subcell can use a tight frequency
reuse pattern, increasing the frequency usage. Compared with the common dual-band network,
one BCCH is saved and used as a TCH, and therefore the system capacity is enhanced. In
addition, the TCHs on the two bands are integrated in a cell so that the channels can be
shared.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
Support for different frequency hopping (FH) type used by TRXs in overlaid/underlaid
subcells: The FH type is not a cell-level parameter. In a cell, different TRXs may use different
FH types. Generally, the baseband FH is applied to the underlaid subcell because of
insufficient frequencies; whereas the RF FH is applied to the overlaid subcell because of
sufficient frequencies. This helps obtain a high FH gain.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

154
None
3.5.3 GBFD-117001 Flex MAIO

Availability
Summary
When this feature is enabled, the channels with less interference are preferentially selected
during channel assignment. If there is interference in the selected channel, the MAIO with the
minimum interference is assigned to the channel.
Benefits
Reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system.
Achieves tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and therefore improves the system
capacity.
Description
Under the BTSs with large capacity, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference is likely to
occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and tight frequency
reuse is adopted. For example, when some frequencies in the MA list are adjacent,
adjacent-channel interference occurs if the channels with the same timeslot number but on
different TRXs use adjacent MAIOs and are occupied at the same time.
When dynamic MAIO is enabled, the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the
current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the
channel. Therefore, the call has the minimum interference from the perspective of the entire
network. Huawei BSS equipment records the interference on each timeslot and updates the
record during each channel activation or channel release.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping)
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

155

GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel Allocation)
GBFD-118106 Dynamic Power Sharing
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
3.5.4 GBFD-118001 BCCH Dense Frequency Multiplexing

Availability
Summary
This feature allows the operator to adopt the tight frequency reuse pattern for the frequencies
of the BCCH carriers.
Benefits
The number of frequencies occupied by the BCCH carriers reduces, improving the
frequency usage. In addition, the number of frequencies available for the TCHs and the
number of frequencies participating in FH on the TCH increase, increasing the system
capacity and reducing the costs of adding sites and cells.
The TCHs on BCCH carriers are assigned to only the MSs near the BTS, improving the
voice quality because of less uplink interference.
Description
Each cell is configured with a BCCH carrier, and timeslot 0 on the BCCH carrier is used to
carry the BCH and CCCH. This timeslot continually sends messages to all the MSs camping
on the cell. The messages include the synchronization message, system information, paging
message, and assignment message, which are directly related to cell selection, cell reselection,
call initiation, and paging response. Therefore, the BCCH becomes the most important
channel in GSM communications.
Generally, the 4x3 pattern is adopted for the BCCH frequencies. This can ensure a high
carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) between BCCH carriers. In this pattern, however, the
BCCH carriers occupy 12 frequencies. In a network with tight frequency reuse and limited
frequency resources, if the 3x3 pattern is used for the BCCH frequencies, the interference to
the TCH on the BCCH carrier increases and the performance degrades to an unacceptable
level.
This feature enables the BCCH frequencies to adopt the tight frequency reuse pattern. In this
way, in the network with limited frequency resources, the number of frequencies occupied by
the BCCH carriers decreases and the number of frequencies available for the TCHs increases,
increasing the system capacity without adding hardware and reducing the costs of adding
sites.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

156
This feature regards a cell as two logical layers: TCH layer on BCCH carriers and FH layer on
other carriers.
The FH layer serves the entire system and covers the entire network, including the MSs at the
boarder of a cell. The TCH layer on the BCCH carrier, however, provides limited coverage to
ensure the performance of call access. The interference in the area near the BTS is smaller
than that in the area far from the BTS and at the edge of the cell. Therefore, the TCH layer on
the BCCH carrier provides the coverage only for the MSs near the BTS. During the initial
access and channel assignment triggered by handover (non-BCCH tight frequency
multiplexing), the system preferentially assigns TCHs on the non-BCCH carriers to ensure the
access performance. If a call is assigned a TCH on a non-BCCH carrier in the cell, the BCCH
Dense Frequency Multiplexing feature has less impact on the call if the MS is near the BTS.
The system then hands over the call to a TCH on the BCCH carrier and reserves the channels
on the non-BCCH carrier to ensure the access performance of other calls.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114501 Co-BCCH Cell
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC
None
3.5.5 GBFD-117002 IBCA (Interference Based Channel

Allocation)
Availability
Summary
When the network accesses a new call, the interference between the established calls and the
new call is calculated. Based on the calculation result, the network assigns a channel with the
minimum interference to the new call. This minimizes the overall interference in the network
and therefore enables a tighter frequency reuse pattern. This increases the network capacity
while maintaining the voice quality in the entire network.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

157
Benefits
Effectively improves the frequency usage and therefore improves the network capacity.
Reduces the overall interference and therefore improves the network performance.
Improves the voice quality of calls.
Description
In the GSM network, the loose frequency reuse provides better network performance, higher
network KPIs, and excellent voice quality, but reduces the network capacity compared with
the tight frequency reuse. The tight frequency reuse pattern can increase the network capacity,
but also increases the probability that the TRXs use the same frequency or adjacent
frequencies. This results in more co-channel or adjacent-channel interference, degrading the
network performance.
Based on the timeslot synchronization on the Um interface, the IBCA feature considers only
the channel-level interference. During the channel assignment, the IBCA considers the
interference strength of all idle channels and then preferentially assigns the channel with the
minimum interference. The IBCA feature involves the following functions:
Calculation of the interference to the new call caused by the established calls
The IBCA must be used with frequency hopping. The idle channels with different
MAIOs transmit signals on the Um interface with different frequencies, and therefore the
interference that the idle channels experience from the established calls varies. The IBCA
calculates the interference strength on each idle channel when different MAIOs are
applied.
Calculation of interference to the established calls caused by the new call

The established calls cause interference to the new call. Similarly, the new call causes
interference to the established calls once it accesses the network. The IBCA estimates the
CIR of the new call to the established calls.
Considering the preceding two types of interference, the IBCA-enabled network assigns the
channel and MAIO with the minimum interference to the new call.
The IBCA feature consists of intra-BSC IBCA and inter-BSC IBCA. That is, the
IBCA-enabled cells may belong to one BSC or multiple BSCs.
The IBCA feature improves the frequency usage and therefore effectively increases the
network capacity. In addition, the IBCA-enabled network considers the interference to the
new call caused by the established calls, improving the voice quality of calls.
The network KPIs may be affected after the IBCA is applied. For example, the call drop rate
increases or the handover success rate decreases. Operators need to purchase Huawei's
professional services to minimize the impact of introducing IBCA on network KPIs.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
IBCA Enhancement:
The limitation on the frequency hopping (FH) in an IBCA-enabled cell is lifted. The
limitation was that an IBCA-enabled cell can be configured with a maximum of three MA
groups and each MA group be configured with a maximum of 12 frequencies. After this
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

158
enhanced feature is enabled, the numbers of MA groups and frequencies are restricted only by
the BSC memory for cell information. This feature is suitable for sites with a large number of
frequencies.
Dependency
GBFD-110502 Assignment and Immediate Assignment
GBFD-119406 High Speed Circuit Switched Data
If the Soft-Synchronized Network feature is enabled, this feature is mutually exclusive with
the following feature:
GBFD-118201 Soft-Synchronized Network or GBFD-510401 BTS GPS Synchronization
GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping, baseband hopping)
If the Soft-Synchronized Network feature needs to be enabled on multiple BSCs, this feature
is mutually exclusive with the following feature:
GBFD-118621 Connection Inter BSC over IP
None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GSM spectrum utilization improvement
service.
3.5.6 GBFD-113706 Mega BSC

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

159
Summary
With this feature, a BSC supports a maximum of 8192 TRXs and 45,000 erlang of traffic
volume when IP over FE/GE//STM-1 is used over the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces.
Benefits
Enables a BSC to support more subscribers while maintaining the speech quality.
Improves the BSC equipment integration, which helps reduce the number of BSC nodes,
the footprint in the equipment room, and the power consumption per TRX.
Simplifies BSC parameter settings, which improves the network maintenance efficiency.
Reduces the number of inter-BSC handovers and cell reselections, which improves
network performance.
Description
With this feature, the improved specifications are as follows:
Item
Specifications
Number of TRXs
8192
Traffic volume
45,000 (erlang)
Busy hour call attempts (BHCAs)

for a CS+PS composite service
11,000,000
Number of users
2,200,000
Circuit identification codes (CICs)

on the A interface
61,440
Number of PDCHs that can be

activated
32,768
PS traffic throughput
3072 (Mbit/s)
1.
If TDM over FE/GE is used over the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces, the TRX supporting
capacity remains unchanged, that is, a BSC supports a maximum of 4096 TRXs.
2.
If both IP and TDM transmission modes are used, the maximum number of TRXs
supported by TDM-based BTSs is 4096, and the maximum number of TRXs supported
by the BSC is less than 8192, depending on the number of configured TRX boards.
3.
The system specification (a maximum number of 2048 BTSs and 2048 cells) remains
unchanged.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

160
Dependency
None
This feature depends on the following features
GBFD-118602 A over IP or GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP
None
3.6 GSM/UMTS Interoperability

3.6.1 GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
Availability
Summary
The BSS system supports the handover and reselection of MSs between the GSM network
and the WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature enables the MS to roam and be handed over from the WCDMA network to the
GSM network. This can solve the problem of insufficient coverage in the early stage of the
WCDMA network development. With this feature, the GSM network can smoothly evolve to
the WCDMA network, saving the operator's investment.
Description
GSM/WCDMA interoperability refers to the handover and roaming of dual-mode MSs
between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. Huawei BSS supports the handover
and roaming of dual-mode MSs between the GSM network and the WCDMA network. The
handover and roaming include the following situations:
In idle mode, an MS roams from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
In idle mode, an MS roams from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the GSM system to the WCDMA system.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

161
In busy mode, an MS is handed over from the WCDMA system to the GSM system.
This feature consists of the following functions:
Roaming in idle mode

Through PLMN reselection, an MS can be handed over from the GSM network to the
WCDMA network, or from the WCDMA network to the GSM network. The selection of
the GSM network or the WCDMA network is determined by the network operator.
Usually the WCDMA MSs preferentially select the WCDMA network. The PLMN
reselection can be scheduled on the MS. The reselection time is determined by the
operator.
To inform the MS of the information on the neighboring WCDMA cell, the GBSS
system needs to add the description of the neighboring WCDMA cell to the system
information. The system information 3 is modified to indicate whether the system
information 2 quarter exists. The system information 2 quarter includes information
about cell reselection, measurement, and neighboring WCDMA cell.
Through system reselection, a WCDMA MS can be handed over to a neighboring GSM
cell when the signal in the WCDMA network is weak.
CS domain handover in busy mode

The handover from the WCDMA system to the GSM system is determined by the
WCDMA network. When receiving the handover request from the MSC, the BSS works
with the MSC to implement the handover based on the resource situation.
Then, the MS in busy mode in the GSM cell measures the neighboring WCDMA cell
based on the neighboring cell information in the system information and submits the MR
to the BSC. The BSC then makes decisions according to the information in the MR and
initiates inter-RAT handover when the requirements for the WCDMA cell handover are
met.
The cell reselection of the network-controlled MS from the GPRS/EDGE system to the
WCDMA system is implemented by using the inter-RAT NC2 feature. The inter-RAT
NACC feature can speed up the cell reselection from the WCDMA system to the
GPRS/EDGE system.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The MSC, SGSN, HLR, MSs, and WCDMA-related NEs must support this feature.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

162
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GU synergy service.
3.6.2 GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover

Availability
Summary
In a GSM-WCDMA co-sited network, the operator can classify services into different types
according to the operation policies. Then, the operator determines whether a service
preferentially uses the radio resources of the GSM system or the WCDMA system. During
call access or the handover, the BSC works with the MSC to perform the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system.
Benefits
With this feature, the advantages of the GSM system and the WCDMA system are fully
utilized and therefore the service quality is improved and user experience is enhanced. In
addition, the operators' investment is saved and the utilization of the network resources is
maximized.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. The service quality on the two radio access systems is different. Therefore, it is
necessary to immediately use different system resources for different services. According to
the service hierarchy principle, different services can be preferentially handed over to
different systems. For example, the CS services are preferentially handed over to the GSM
system whereas the PS services are preferentially retained in the WCDMA system.
In the assignment procedure, the MSC sends the service handover information to the BSC
through the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message. If the service handover information
indicates that the call should be preferentially processed in the UTRAN, the directed retry
procedure is initiated to hand over the call to the WCDMA system.
The HANDOVER REQUEST message received by the BSC may also carry the service
handover information and the BSC uses this information for the subsequent handover
decision.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

163

GBFD-114301 GSM/WCDMA Interoperability
3.6.3 GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover

Availability
Summary
When the cell load in the GSM system is heavy, the BSC can initiate the handover from the
GSM system to the WCDMA system based on the load of the GSM system and the WCDMA
system to balance the overall load in the network, maximizing the utilization of the network
resources.
Benefits
This feature balances the load of the WCDMA system and the GSM system, improving the
service quality and the usage of the network resources.
Description
With the application of the WCDMA system, the GSM-WCDMA co-sited network is widely
in use. Therefore, the usage of the resources in the two radio access systems needs to be
maximized. When the load of one radio access system is heavy whereas the load of the other
radio access system with the same coverage is light, the load-based inter-RAT handover can
be initiated to balance the load of the two systems if the services of the current user can be
supported by the other system.
The load information about the WCDMA system is transparently transmitted to the BSC
through the MSC. Then the BSC determines whether to initiate the inter-RAT handover based
on the load information about the WCDMA system and the load information about the BSC.
Meanwhile, the load information about the BSC is carried in the handover request message
for the reference of the target system during the inter-RAT handover decision.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

164
Dependency
3.6.4 GBFD-114323 GSM/WCDMA Cell Reselection Based on

MS State
Availability
Summary
This feature is designed to optimize cell reselection from the GSM network to the 3G network
(WCDMA network or TD-SCDMA network). It enables dual-mode MSs in the idle state or in
the packet transfer state to adopt different reselection policies to access the GSM network or
3G network as required.
Benefits
Helps the operator to determine whether to select the GSM or 3G network according to
the network planning requirements when the MS is in the idle state or in the packet
transfer state.
Reduces the duration of service interruption caused by frequent cell reselection.
Description
During the 3G network construction, operators need to select a proper network planning
strategy for the MSs to select the GSM network or the 3G network based on the coverage of
the 3G network and the compatibility of dual-mode MSs with the 3G network. This feature
provides different cell reselection strategies based on the MS state.
For example, in the early stage of the 3G network construction, operators expect that the 3G
network can share some traffic of the GSM network. The data transmission of the MS in
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

165
packet transfer mode, however, may be interrupted after cell reselection because the coverage
of the 3G network is imperfect or the compatibility between the MS and 3G network is poor.
In such a case, the KPIs deteriorate. In addition, the current 3GPP protocols do not support the
NACC feature between the GERAN and the UTRAN. Therefore, the services of the MS in
packet transfer state are inevitably interrupted during the inter-RAT cell reselection and
therefore the quality of the PS services deteriorates. With this feature, operators allow the MS
in idle mode to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_I to a
specific value between 0 and 14. Similarly, operators can prohibit the MS in packet transfer
mode to search for neighboring 3G cells by setting the parameter Qsearch_P to 15. In this
manner, operators can control the MS's access to the GSM network or the 3G network
according to the MS state.
This feature and the Network-Controlled Cell Reselection (NC2) feature are mutually
exclusive. With the NC2 feature, the MS in packet transfer state can select a neighboring 3G
cell through the BSC's control of the inter-RAT cell reselection. With this feature, however,
the MS in packet transfer state can be prohibited from selecting a neighboring 3G cell. This
problem can be solved by configuring priorities for these two features.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

166
3.6.5 GBFD-114325 Fast WCDMA Reselection at 2G CS Call

Release
Availability
Summary
When an MS terminates a call on a GSM network, it camps on a WCDMA network based on
the "cell selection indicator after release" information in the Channel Release message
without performing cell reselection calculation. In this way, the MS can preferentially camp
on a WCDMA cell, accelerating cell reselection.
Benefits
The cell reselection of the MS is accelerated. The MS can obtain services from the WCDMA
network immediately after the call is released from the GSM network.
Description
In general, when the MS terminates a call on a GSM network, it camps on the cell in which
the call is released and then starts the measurement related to the cell reselection. When a
neighboring WCDMA cell meets the cell reselection requirements, the MS camps on the
WCDMA network after the cell reselection. The WCDMA cell reselection is initiated after the
MS receives the system information and performs the related calculation.
With this feature, the BSS figures out the best neighboring WCDMA cell based on the
measurement information about the neighboring WCDMA cells after the MS in the GSM
network terminates a CS call. Then, the BSS sends the MS the frequency information about
the cell through the Channel Release message to instruct it to camp on the WCDMA cell. In
this way, the MS can preferentially camp on a WCDMA cell without related calculation,
accelerating cell reselection
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

167
3.6.6 GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement on Iur-g

Availability
Summary
This feature is implemented through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE containing load
information over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complies with the 3GPP
specifications. With this feature, the decision on handover that is not caused by insufficient
coverage can be more accurate, reducing the possibility of ping-pong handovers between the
GSM network and WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature helps maintain a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It also helps increase the accuracy of handover decision, reducing the possibility of ping-pong
handovers. The simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid
handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 6% and increases the
total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA network by up to 5%.
Description
This feature functions as a supplement to GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based
Handover. If the handover decision is based only on load, the occurrence of ping-pong
handover is highly possible. The reason is that the mechanism of load information exchange
between the GSM network and WCDMA network is inadequate. The inadequate mechanism
may cause excessive services to be handed over from the GSM network to the WCDMA
network, leading to the overload of the WCDMA network and consequently handover back to
the GSM network.
This feature enables the load information exchange over the Iur-g interface, so that the
decision on load-based handover can be more rational. The conditions on which the decision
is based are as follows:
The target WCDMA cell meets the load requirements.
The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.
The handover will not lead to the congestion in the target WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Dependency on MBSC hardware
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

168
Dependency on MBTS hardware

GBFD-114322 GSM/WCDMA Load Based Handover
WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and WCDMA Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g
None
3.6.7 GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on

Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA
Availability
Summary
This feature enables the exchange of messages containing the RAN Information Management
(RIM) information over the Iur-g interface between the RNC and BSC. The Iur-g protocol
stack complies with the 3GPP specifications. In this way, the NACC procedure for PS
services from a WCDMA cell to a GSM cell does not require the information transfer via the
CN.
Benefits
This feature provides a solution that enables the NACC procedure when the CN does not
support the RIM procedure. The simulation results show that this feature helps shorten the
delay of PS handover by two seconds. As the delay is shortened, user experience can be
improved.
Description
As indicated in the 3GPP specifications, the GERAN (P) SI is obtained by performing the
RIM procedure during the NACC procedure. The NACC procedure involves the RNC,
WCDMA SGSN, GSM SGSN, and BSC. When this feature is applied, the GSM/WCDMA
GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the Iur-g interface between the base station
controllers, without being transferred via the CN.
This feature applies only to the Iur-g interface, which connects different base station
controllers. In such a case, the GERAN (P) SI information is transferred over the protocol
stack complying with the 3GPP specifications. If there is no Iur-g interface between WCDMA
and GSM, the GERAN (P) SI information can be exchanged only via the CN, and accordingly
the NACC procedure can be implemented only through the CN, as specified in the 3GPP
specifications.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

169
The following figure shows the network topology that supports this feature. As shown in the
figure, Huawei RNCs and BSCs are connected on the Iur-g interface. This feature applies to
the BSC/RNC of other vendors only if it has passed the interoperability test (IOT). Otherwise,
the CN-involved NACC procedure is applied. For the BSC/RNC of other vendors, the
common cell reselection procedure is performed if the CN does not support the RIM
procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA
The NACC procedure must be supported by the MS/UE.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

170
3.6.8 GBFD-511103 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based

on Iur-g
Availability
Summary
This feature implements the load-based GSM/WCDMA handover through the exchange of
Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on
the basis of the service handover indicator and load of the GSM network and WCDMA
network when an MS accesses the network. In this way, a load balance is achieved between
the GSM network and WCDMA network.
Benefits
This feature aims at striking a load balance between the GSM network and WCDMA network.
It reduces the possibility of congestion in areas covered by both GSM and WCDMA. The
network utilization is consequently increased. The simulation results show that this feature
reduces the percentage of invalid handovers between the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 6% and decreases the access congestion rate during busy hours by up to 4%.
Description
As high-speed PS services are on great demand by a large number of GSM/WCDMA
dual-mode handsets in well-established 2G/3G commercial networks, the load of WCDMA
network has become increasingly heavy. Facing the situation, network operators focus on
reducing the congestion rate and making full utilization of the present network capacity. This
feature can efficiently address this issue. With this feature, the load balance between the GSM
network and WCDMA network can be achieved. This helps reduce the possibility of network
congestion and the percentage of invalid inter-RAT handovers. As a result, the capacity of
both the GSM network and WCDMA network can be fully utilized.
The following figure shows the applicable scenario where the GSM cell and WCDMA cell
have the same coverage. In this scenario, this feature provides a load-balancing function for
admitted MSs through the exchange of Huawei proprietary IE between the GSM cell and
WCDMA cell.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

171
The load-balancing function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the requested CS service to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service
handover indicator and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA cell.
The conditions on which the decision is based are as follows:
The MS supports WCDMA services.
The service handover indicator assigned by the CN or configured at the GBSC/MBSC

shows that the CS service can be handed over to the WCDMA cell.
The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded.
The load difference between the source GSM cell and target WCDMA cell exceeds the
predefined threshold.
The GBSC/MBSC determines whether to perform the inter-RAT handover on a number

of MSs according to the predefined distribution rate. The rate is considered as a
probability rate with respect to the redirection of a single MS. If the GBSC/MBSC
determines that the handover is not performed, the CS service will be processed in the
GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the handover of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

172

GBFD-114322 GSM and WCDMA Load Based Handover
WRFD-070006 GSM and WCDMA Load Balancing Based on Iur-g
None
3.6.9 GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based

on Iur-g
Availability
Summary
This feature supports GSM/WCDMA handover based on service. With this feature, services
are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchical network planning, and
the load of the GSM network and WCDMA network when an MS accesses the network.
Benefits
This feature helps operators to develop network services in hierarchies, which facilitates the
hierarchical network planning. With this feature, the spectrum utilization is increased. The
simulation results show that this feature reduces the percentage of invalid inter-RAT
handovers by up to 8% and increases the total capacity of the GSM network and WCDMA
network by up to 8%.
Description
In the case of evolution from a legacy GSM network to a GSM&WCDMA network, the
WCDMA network usually has a larger capacity in the early stage. How to fully utilize the
WCDMA network to carry high-speed services has become a major concern for network
operators. This feature provides the service steering function for the benefit of network
planning. Service steering helps improve the utilization of resources in each network and
divide frequencies and RATs into different hierarchies. In addition to service steering, the
selection of RAT for an MS to access also depends on the network load. This helps optimize
the network performance in the following aspects:
Tasks of different RATs can be clearly defined, which facilitates the planning of network
capacity.
Service steering can reduce interference between different traffic classes, increasing the
network capacity of the WCDMA network.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

173
The flexible distribution of services to the WCDMA and GSM cells can improve the
utilization of system resources, reduce the access congestion rate, and enhance the QoS
of the network.
The service-steering function is initiated after RAB setup. The GBSC/MBSC decides whether
to hand over the MS to the WCDMA network on the basis of the service handover indicator
and the load difference between the GSM cell and the target WCDMA cell. The conditions on
which the decision is based are as follows:
The MS requests the CS service.
The MS supports WCDMA services.
The target WCDMA cell is lightly loaded and is with the lightest load among all
neighboring WCDMA cells of the source GSM cell.
This feature in the present version (GBSS12.0) applies to only the steering of CS services
from a GSM cell to a WCDMA cell.
Enhancement
GBSS15.0
If a multi-mode terminal only performs PS services in a GSM cell and the load of its
neighboring UMTS cell is low, the terminal is handed over to the neighboring UMTS cell by
performing a PS handover or NC2.
Dependency
GBFD-114321 GSM/WCDMA Service Based Handover
WRFD-070007 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g
The feature enhancement in GBSS15.0 depends on any of the following features:
GBFD-119502 PS Handover
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

174
3.6.10 GBFD-511110 BSC supporting Blind Search

Availability
Summary
The BSC supporting Blind Search feature simplifies cell reselection from a GSM cell to a
WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell.
Benefits
With this feature, users can easily configure cell reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or
TD-SCDMA cell.
Description
Without this feature, when cell reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or TD-SCDMA
cell is enabled, users must configure frequencies and scrambling codes of neighboring
WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells in a GSM network. After the configuration, the GSM network
sends the frequencies and scrambling codes to an MS using SI messages. As a result, the MS
can measure the neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells specified in the SI messages and
reselect to an appropriate neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell. If users adjust the
planned frequencies and scrambling codes of the neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cells,
they must modify the information in the GSM network accordingly. Otherwise, cell
reselection from a GSM cell to a WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell will fail.
With this feature, users need to only configure frequencies of neighboring WCDMA or
TD-SCDMA cells. After receiving the frequencies of a neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA
cell, an MS automatically searches for the scrambling codes of neighboring cells and reselects
to an appropriate neighboring WCDMA or TD-SCDMA cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Or
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

175
MSs must support blind search.
3.7 GSM/LTE Interoperability

3.7.1 GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0 for test. It is commercially used from GBSS13.0.
Summary
This feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS in idle mode to perform cell reselection
based on the level of the neighboring cells and setting of the radio access technology (RAT)
priority.
Benefits
This feature enables the GSM network and LTE network to work as a complement to
each other. This is profitable for operators who have deployed both the GSM network
and LTE network.
This feature enables the existing GSM network to provide communication services to
LTE subscribers at the initial deployment stage of LTE, generating profit for the LTE
operators.
This feature can be used to balance the traffic between the GSM network and LTE
network, prolonging the life cycle of the GSM network.
A GSM/LTE dual-mode MS can be made to camp on the LTE network through the
setting of the RAT priority when the GSM/LTE dual-mode MS is within the coverage
area of the LTE network.
Description
An MS in idle mode periodically measures the level of the serving cell and the cell of the
neighboring cells specified in the system information. The MS determines whether to perform
cell reselection based on the settings of the mode priority parameters and on the cell
reselection algorithm. In this way, the MS can always camp on a cell that can provide quality
services. Therefore, the purpose of this feature is to bind the MS to a cell that can provide
quality services.
The cell reselection between GSM and LTE is based on the setting of the RAT priority. The
RAT priority is set on the BSC side, and is sent to the MS through the system information
message SI2quater. Different RAT priorities must be set for the GSM and LTE networks.
Therefore, the MS can select to camp on the network of higher service quality based on the
RAT priorities.
The MS obtains the information about the frequencies of the neighboring cells by parsing the
system information message SI2quater. It also measures the downlink level of all neighboring
cells to obtain the candidate cells for reselection. Then, the MS sorts the candidate cells
according to the RAT priority, and selects the best cell for reselection.
This feature supports the cell reselection between GSM and LTE FDD and the cell reselection
between GSM and LTE TDD.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

176
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
GBFD-511313 CSFB
The Core network must support both GSM and LTE.
MSs must support both GSM and LTE.
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GL synergy service.
3.7.2 GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based

on Coverage
Availability
This feature is available for beta use from GBSS12.0. It is available for commercial use from
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. The BSC obtains the receive level
of the serving cell through MRs. When the receive level of the serving cell remains lower than
the specified PS handover threshold for a period, the BSC triggers the PS handover between
GSM and LTE. In this manner, the MS reselects a neighboring cell with a higher receive level.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Therefore, the operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and
Gaming.
This feature provides PS coverage for cells of another RAT to ensure the PS service continuity.
In this manner, the network performance and user experience are improved.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

177
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.
Based on the MRs reported by the MS, the BSC triggers the coverage-based PS handover
between GSM and LTE when the receive level of the serving cell remains lower than the PS
handover threshold for a period. This ensures that the MS can reselect a neighboring cell with
a higher receive level. As the receive level of the neighboring cell is considered before the
handover, the success rate of the handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS
can be guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
The Fast PS Handover between GSM and LTE function is introduced.
If GSM cells and LTE cells are co-sited and cover the same areas, blind handovers must be
supported. When a GSM/LTE dual-mode or multi-mode MS is processing PS services in a
GSM cell, a service-based or load-based PS handover can be triggered to hand over the MS to
an LTE cell. In this case, a target LTE cell can be selected according to the default system
setting, without using the MRs.
Dependency
GBFD-511301 Cell Reselection Between GSM and LTE
PS handover priority:
GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover > GBFD-511303 PS Handover
Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality > GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and
LTE Based on Cell Load > GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on
Coverage
It is recommended that the four features work together.
The SGSN must support PS handover between GSM and LTE.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

178

on Quality
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
MSs in PS connection report MRs to the BSC periodically. Based on the MRs, the BSC
triggers a PS handover to a neighboring LTE cell if the UL or DL signal quality in the current
GSM cell on the air interface reaches the specified threshold.
Benefits
theoretically and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially conversational services.
Gaming.
In the scenarios with severe signal attenuation, this feature can be used to prevent PS service
disruption due to deterioration of signal quality on the air interface, improving network
performance and user experience.
Description
Conversational services have a high requirement for the service delay, which cannot be met
through cell reselection. In view of this, Huawei introduces the PS handover, during which
radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the cell change. In this manner, the
service disruption during cell change is reduced to less than 150 ms.
When the UL or DL air interface quality of the MS in the serving cell is reaches the preset
threshold, the BSC triggers the PS handover between GSM and LTE so that the MS reselects
a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level. In this manner, the success rate of the
PS handover, the throughput of the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

179
Dependency
Coverage

on Cell Load
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
Based on the traffic load and the MRs reported by the MS in PS connection mode, the BSC
may trigger the PS handover from GSM to LTE when the PS load on the GSM cell is high to
achieve load balance and in addition, to fully utilize the transmission resources.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Therefore, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

180
When the GSM network is congested, this feature can be used to transfer part of the load of
the GSM cell to the neighboring LTE cells, increasing the PS service rate and enhancing the
network performance and user experience.
Description
With the construction of the LTE network, the networking with both GSM and LTE is widely
used. Huawei aims to fully utilize the resources of the two networks. The LTE network can
take over part of PS services from the GSM network.
In an area covered with both GSM and LTE networks, if the load difference between the two
networks is great and the current services are supported by both GSM and LTE, the PS
handover between GSM and LTE can be triggered for load balance.
When this feature is enabled, the BSC selects a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive
level for the handover. In this manner, the success rate of the PS handover, the throughput of
the new cell, and the PS QoS are guaranteed.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
problem. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the MS
camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is reduced to less
than 150 ms.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

181
Coverage

on Mode Priority
Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
This feature enables operators to set priorities for GSM and LTE networks. In this manner,
during the PS handover, the MS will select a network with the higher priority.
Benefits
PS handover shortens the duration of the PS service disruption to no more than 150 ms and
provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service. Therefore, the
operators can deploy more value-added services such as VoIP, PoC, and Gaming.
The operator can use the LTE network to carry PS services preferentially. That is, in the area
with LTE coverage, use the LTE network to provide high-speed data services for GSM/LTE
dual-mode users; in the area without LTE coverage, use the GSM network to carry the
services. In this manner, the operator can make profit quickly from the LTE network and user
experience is enhanced.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, this feature enables the GSM/LTE dual-mode
MSs to select LTE network preferentially for PS services.
Based on MRs from the MS, the BSC triggers a PS handover when the downlink level of the
serving cell reaches the level threshold for PS handover, when the UL or DL air interface
quality decreases to the handover threshold, or when the PS load of the GSM cell is high. The
BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
Because the receive level, service quality, load, and network mode of the target cell and the
suitable network is considered before the PS handover, the handover success rate and the
throughput of the target cell are guaranteed.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

182
This feature must be used with the feature GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and
LTE Based on Coverage, GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on
Quality, or GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality
GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
3.7.6 GBFD-511306 GSM/LTE Service Based PS Handover

Availability
GBSS13.0.
Summary
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the BSC hands over services of different
types to the GSM or LTE network based on the service distribution information sent by the
SGSN.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

183
Benefits
and provides guaranteed QoS for PS services, especially the conversational service.
Gaming.
The services of different types are handed over to the GSM or LTE network based on the
service attribute. In this manner, the loads on the two networks are balanced. In addition,
the PS services will not be handed over to an inappropriate network.
The operator can use the LTE network to carry the services with high requirement for
rate and delay, enhancing user experience and increasing the revenue.
Description
In a network with both GSM and LTE coverage, the operator can divide the services into
multiple types, and then determine the network (GSM or LTE) for carrying each type of
services. In this manner, the load is balanced between the two networks, and the operator can
use the advantages of both GSM and LTE to provide satisfactory service quality.
For example, the operator can use the LTE network to carry the streaming services with a high
requirement for rate and the conversational services with a high requirement for delay, and
use the GSM network to carry the background services with a low requirement for rate and
delay.
The operator can configure the policy on the core network, and then during the PS handover,
the BSC hands over the services with different types to the corresponding network according
to the service distribution information sent by the core network.
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the handover to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects a
neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the MS
to hand over to the target cell through PS handover.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
Conversational services have a high requirement for service interruption duration, which
cannot be met by using cell reselection. The PS handover technique, however, solves this
problem. During a PS handover, radio resources are allocated to the target cell before the MS
camps on the target cell. In this manner, the service interruption duration is reduced to less
than 150 ms.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

184

Coverage
3.7.7 GBFD-511307 eNC2 Between GSM and LTE

Availability
Summary
In a GSM/LTE hybrid network, when the MS is in a GSM cell, the MS periodically sends
packet measurement reports to the BSC if the serving cell is in NC2 mode and packet
connection state. On receiving the reports from the MS, the BSC triggers a network-controlled
cell reselection based on the receive level, cell load, receive quality, modulation scheme, and
service priority indicated by the message sent from the core network. If the target cell is an
LTE cell, the BSC triggers a procedure of eNC2 between GSM and LTE.
Benefits
Compared with the MS-controlled cell reselection, eNC2 Between GSM and LTE has the
following benefits:
The following factors are considered at the network so that the MS can be reselected to a cell
with better signal quality: receive level of the serving cell, receive quality over the Um
interface, and packet service load, priority of modulation scheme, and service priority
indicated by the message sent from the core network. This can prevent deterioration of QoS of
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

185
the MS. In this manner, user experience can be improved, for the duration of packet service
disruption is shortened to less than 500 ms.
Description
Four types of cell reselection decision are involved in eNC2 between GSM and LTE:
service-based cell reselection decision, quality-based cell reselection decision, load-based cell
reselection decision, and coverage-based cell.
Service-based cell reselection decision
According to 3GPP 48.018, the PS HANDOVER REQUEST message or the CREATE BSS
PFC message from the SGSN contains the IE that indicates the service type. If the IE is
"Network initiated cell change order to E-UTRAN or PS handover to E-UTRAN procedure
should be performed", the reselection to an LTE cell is preferred. In this case, the BSC selects
a neighboring LTE cell with the highest receive level as the target cell, and then informs the
MS to reselect the target cell through an eNC2 procedure.
Quality-based cell reselection decision
The BSC determines whether the radio link quality is good or bad according to the receive
quality or bit error rate, and performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive quality
of the link over the Um interface. When the receive quality of the uplink or downlink radio
link deteriorates to a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC
selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a network with the highest
priority as the target cell.
Load-based cell reselection decision
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the packet load of the serving cell.
When the packet load of the serving cell reaches a specified threshold, the BSC triggers the
NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from the cells in a
network with the highest priority as the target cell.
Coverage-based cell reselection decision
The BSC performs a cell reselection decision based on the receive level of the serving cell.
When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than a specified threshold for a period, the
BSC triggers the NC2 procedure. The BSC selects the cell with the highest receive level from
the cells in a network with the highest priority as the target cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

186

GBFD-119107 Networking Control Mode
MSs must support both GSM and LTE and NC2 procedure.
3.7.8 GBFD-511308 eNACC Between GSM and LTE

Availability
Summary
This feature supports eNACC from LTE to GSM only.
In packet transfer mode, the UE sends the eNodeB a message, requesting for the system
information of the target GSM cell. Upon receiving the message, the eNodeB sends the
system information of the target GSM cell to the UE. Upon receiving the system information,
the UE accelerates the packet service access to the target GSM cell.
Benefits
The cell reselection of the UE from an LTE cell to a GSM cell is accelerated, the data
transmission disruption becomes shorter, and the duration of the service disruption is
shorter than 500 ms. In this manner, the requirements of services, such as streaming
service, for delay and throughput are met.
The resources of the original cell can be released for new subscribers faster after the cell
reselection. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Description
eNACC is a function based on which the UE accesses the target GSM cell quickly after the
cell reselection is completed without receiving the complete system information of the target
cell.
eNACC does not control cell reselection of the UE. Instead, the network is informed of the
message that the UE requires cell reselection, and then the network sends the system
information of target GSM cells to the UE before the cell reselection. In this manner, the cell
reselection is accelerated, and therefore the duration of data transmission disruption is reduced
greatly.
As the cell reselection is accelerated, the SGSN can detect faster that a new cell is reselected
for the UE. Therefore, the resources of the source LTE cell can be released faster for other
subscribers. In this manner, the system capacity is increased.
Limited by 3GPP 48.018 technical specifications, the system does not support GSM-to-LTE
eNACC. LTE-to-GSM eNACC is supported only when the BSC supports RIM over the Gb
interface.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

187
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-116301 Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)
MSs must support both GSM and LTE and NACC procedure.
The SGSN must support eNACC procedure.
3.7.9 GBFD-511309 SRVCC

Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS12.0. This feature is recommended for test purposes
rather than for commercial use.
Summary
With Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC), speech services in the LTE network can
be maintained when it is handed over to a GERAN network or UTRAN network.
Benefits
The speech service can be maintained when it is handed over from the GERAN to the
UTRAN.
Description
At the initial stage of the LTE project, the 3GPP defines that only the packet service is
supported. In the evolution from GERAN to LTE, the 3GPP R8 defines two solutions:
SRVCC and CSFB, to realize the interoperability of speech services between GERAN and
LTE.
To implement the SRVCC solution, the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) must be deployed at
the CN and the speech service must be provided. With the assistance of the VoIP speech
service routing, control, and triggering by the IMS and the handover control by the Mobile
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

188
Management Entity (MME), the speech service in the LTE network can be handed over to the
GERAN/UTRAN smoothly.
In SRVCC, speech services are implemented in the LTE packet network, so technically the
SRVCC solution can be regarded as a real LTE VoIP technique. Through circuit switch in
GERAN network or packet switch in LTE network, the UE can access IMS based on which
the speech service is maintained. SRVCC supports handover of speech services from LTE to
GSM only.
SRVCC is available only when GERAN network and LTE network cover the same area.
GBSS12.0 does not support SRVCC in DTM mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The CN is deployed with IMS and the speech service is available.
The MSC and MGW must support this feature.
3.7.10 GBFD-511310 Multi Technology Neighbour Cell Based

Handover
Availability
Summary
This feature supports the handover between GSM frequency bands and LTE frequency bands.
Benefits
Through this feature, an MS is handed over to a specific GSM or LTE frequency band, and
the resources of the LTE or GSM frequency band occupied by the MS before the handover are
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

189
released. This feature improves the Quality of Service (QoS) of end users, thereby increasing
the revenue of operators.
Description
This feature is an enhancement of the inter-RAT handover. It supports handovers between
frequency bands of different RATs based on the priorities of neighboring cells. Through this
feature, an MS is handed over to a frequency band of another RAT to meet the requirements
of users for mobility or to ensure that the capacity restrictions on frequency bands are not
exceeded.
This feature can be applied to the following combinations of RATs and frequency bands:
GSM 900 MHz
GSM 1800 MHz
LTE 800 MHz
LTE 900 MHz
LTE 2.6 GHz
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-511303 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Quality
GBFD-511304 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Cell Load
GBFD-511302 PS Handover Between GSM and LTE Based on Coverage
3.7.11 GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

190
Summary
After an MS terminates a call in the GSM network, the MS can camp on the LTE network
according to the cell reselection indicator after release information element in the Channel
Release message, without performing a cell reselection procedure.
Benefits
This feature speeds up cell reselection so that an MS can immediately receive services in the
LTE network after terminating its call in the GSM network.
Description
Generally, after an MS terminates a call in a GSM cell, it camps on the GSM cell. If a
neighboring LTE cell meets the requirements for cell reselection, the MS can camp on the
LTE cell through a cell reselection. The MS, however, must receive system information and
perform cell reselection calculations before initiating the cell reselection. This means that the
MS cannot process services in the LTE network immediately.
When this feature is enabled, the BSS selects the best neighboring LTE cell based on the
measurement information on neighboring LTE cells after the MS terminates its call in the
GSM network. Then, the BSS sends the frequency information about the best neighboring
LTE cell to the MS by using a Channel Release message, instructing the MS to camp on the
LTE cell. By doing so, the MS can reselect an LTE cell without performing cell reselection
calculations, thereby speeding up cell reselection.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-511309 SRVCC
GBFD-511313 CSFB
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

191
3.7.12 GBFD-511313 CSFB

Availability
Summary
The circuit switched fallback (CSFB) feature enables a UE camping on the E-UTRAN
network to access the GERAN/UTRAN network through a PS handover or PS cell reselection
and then process CS services. This feature is available only when the E-UTRAN and
GERAN/UTRAN networks cover the same areas.
Benefits
This feature enables a UE to be handed over from the LTE network to the GERAN network to
process CS services, thereby protecting the investment in the GERAN network.
The GERAN network can be used to provide CS services, and the E-UTRAN network can be
used to provide high-speed PS services.
Compared with the Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) technique, CSFB provides
CS services for UEs in the LTE network with a simpler network structure, without deploying
the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS).
Description
In the LTE startup stage, the 3GPP stipulates that LTE supports only PS services. In the
evolution from GERAN to E-UTRAN, 3GPP Release 8 defines two solutions, SRVCC and
CSFB, to implement the interoperability between GERAN and E-UTRAN.
If a mature GERAN network is available in the initial stage of E-UTRAN deployment, the
operator can use the existing GERAN network to provide CS services whereas use the LTE
network to provide PS services. This saves the investment in the existing GERAN network.
With CSFB, a UE in the LTE network can be handed over to the GERAN network to process
CS services.
To implement CSFB, the SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the
Mobile Management Entity (MME) so that dual-mode UEs attached to the LTE network can
process services such as calling, calling response, SMS, and combined location update
between E-UTRAN and GERAN. Technically, CSFB is not a real LTE VoIP technique
because a dual-mode UE has been handed over from E-UTRAN to GERAN before it initiates
CS services.
The CSFB feature is available only when GERAN and E-UTRAN cover the same areas.
CSFB does not need the IMS, thereby simplifying the network architecture. However, every
time the UE makes or receives a call, the UE is handed over from E-UTRAN to GERAN.
This increases the access delay. In addition, the ongoing LTE PS services are affected by the
incoming call.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

192
Dependency
GBFD-511312 Fast LTE Reselection at 2G CS Call Release
The SGs interface must be configured between the MSC server and the MME.
The MS must be a GSM/LTE dual-mode MS and support CSFB.
MSs complying with 3GPP Release 9 or later are controlled by this feature.
3.8 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability

3.8.1 GBFD-114302 GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability
Availability
Introduction
This feature enables dual-mode MSs to be handed over and reselect cells between a GSM
network and a TD-SCDMA network when the MS processes CS or PS services.
Benefits
Dual-mode MSs can roam and be handed over from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM
network. This lets dual-mode MSs enjoy continuous network coverage in scenarios with
limited TD-SCDMA coverage, for example, in the early stages of network deployment.
A GSM network can smoothly evolve into a TD-SCDMA network. This helps telecom
operators increase return on investment (ROI).
Description
When GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability is enabled, dual-mode MSs can roam and be handed
over between a GSM network and a TD-SCDMA network. Huawei GSM BSS supports MS
handovers and roaming in the following scenarios:
In idle mode, an MS roams from a GSM network to a TD-SCDMA network.
In idle mode, an MS roams from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM network.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

193
In dedicated mode, an MS is handed over from a GSM network to a TD-SCDMA

network.
In dedicated mode, an MS is handed over from a TD-SCDMA network to a GSM

network.
Currently, Huawei GSM BSS does not support PS domain handovers. Interoperability
between TD-SCDMA networks and GPRS/EDGE networks is implemented by using the
autonomous cell reselection of MSs. The inter-RAT network assisted cell change (NACC)
function can speed up the cell reselection from a TD-SCDMA network to a GPRS/EDGE
network. The network-controlled cell reselection from a GPRS/EDGE network to a
TD-SCDMA network is implemented by using the inter-RAT Network Control Cell
Reselection Mode 2 (NC2) function.
Enhancement
This feature solves the problem of some GSM terminals breaking down or restarting when a
neighboring TD-SCDMA cell is broadcast in a system information message. In addition, this
feature enables dual-mode MSs to be handed over between a GSM network and a
TD-SCDMA network.
Dependency
None
The MSC, SGSN, HLR, MSs, and the NEs in the TD-SCDMA network must support this
feature.
3.8.2 GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and

TD-SCDMA
Availability
Summary
The Iur-g interface is used for information exchange between the BSC and the TD-RNC.
Through the information exchange and common measurement procedures, the BSC and
TD-RNC can obtain the capacity and load information of each other.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

194
Benefits
The GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover mechanism is developed into a mechanism
similar to BSC internal handover in GSM900/1800. In this way, the handover procedure is
simplified. This decreases the handover delay and increases the handover success rate,
improving the customer experience.
Description
The Iur-g interface is introduced because the existing GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover
does not meet the requirements of telecom operators in terms of the handover delay and the
handover success rate. The Iur-g interface is used for the information exchange between the
BSC and the TD-RNC, increasing the GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover success rate
and decreasing the handover delay.
The Iur-g interface supports the information exchange and common measurement procedures.
The information exchange procedure is used for exchanging capacity information between the
BSC and the TD-RNC. The common measurement procedure is used for exchanging load
information between the BSC and the TD-RNC.
1.
Information exchange procedure
Currently, the information exchange procedure can only be initiated by the TD-RNC and
terminated by the BSC. In this procedure, the TD-RNC sends the BSC an information
exchange initialization request message, specifying the measurement objects (CGI of the
GSM cell), information exchange type (Cell Capability Class/NACC Related Data), and
reporting mode (On Demand/On Modification).
The reporting mode is described as follows:
(1) On demand: Upon receiving the information exchange initialization request message
from the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the cell capacity information through a response
message.
(2) On Modification: Upon receiving the initialization request message from the TD-RNC,
the BSC returns the cell capacity information through a response message. If the
information is changed later, the BSC notifies the TD-RNC of the change through an
Information Report message.
2.
Common measurement
Currently, the common measurement procedure can only be initiated by the TD-RNC and
terminated by the BSC. In this procedure, the TD-RNC sends the BSC a common
measurement initialization request message, specifying the measurement objects (CGI of the
GSM cell), measurement type (Load/RT Load/NRT Load), and reporting mode (On
Demand/event-triggered/periodic).
The reporting mode is described as follows:
(1) On demand: Upon receiving the common measurement initialization request message
from the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the cell load information through a response
message.
(2) Periodic: Upon receiving the common measurement initialization request message from
the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the common measurement initialization response message.
Subsequently, the BSC periodically reports the common measurement results according
to the specified period.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

195
(3) Event-triggered: Upon receiving the common measurement initialization request message
from the TD-RNC, the BSC returns the common measurement initialization response
message. Subsequently, the BSC reports the common measurement results when the
event triggers the conditions.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
None
3.8.3 GBFD-511402 Radio Resource Reserved Handover Between

GSM/TD-SCDMA Based on Iur-g
Availability
Summary
Through the information exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the TD-RNC,
radio resource reservation is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover procedure. In
this way, the resource reservation procedure is completed without the assistance of the CN.
The original redirecting procedure is maintained for compatibility with the CN.
Benefits
This feature works with GSM/TD-SCDMA inter-RAT handover to reduce the handover delay
by 80 ms and increase the handover success rate by 0.8% in a co-CN scenario, according to
the theoretical analysis results.
Description
The existing TD-SCDMA/GSM inter-RAT handover mechanism is transformed into a
mechanism similar to BSC internal handover in GSM900/1800. In this way, the handover
procedure is simplified. This decreases the handover delay and increases the handover success
rate, improving the customer experience.
This feature complies with the specifications of China Mobile. Through the information
exchange on the Iur-g interface between the BSC and the TD-RNC, radio resource reservation
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

196
is added to the standard GSM/TD-SCDMA handover procedure. In this way, the resource
reservation procedure is completed without the assistance of the CN.
The TD-RNC selects an optimum target cell to perform handover based on the signal level,
capacity, and load of neighboring GSM cells. In advance of the handover, the TD-RNC
reserves radio resources on the Iur-g interface to reduce the handover delay. This feature is
advantageous especially in scenarios of heavy load, fast fading, and high-speed movement in
GSM.
The radio resource handover procedure is described as follows:
After receiving MRs from the UE, the TD-RNC selects an optimum target cell to perform
handover based on the capacity and load of neighboring GSM cells. The TD-RNC requests
Iur-g SCCP links for this UE and sends the BSC an Enhanced Relocation Resource Request
message, requesting radio resources for this UE.
Upon receipt of the Enhanced Relocation Resource Request message, the BSC assigns a
D-RNTI to the UE, reserves radio resources according to the requested Speech Version, and
responds to the TD-RNC with an Enhanced Relocation Resource Response message.
Optionally, this message can carry the capacity and load information of the GSM cell.
After receiving the Enhanced Relocation Resource Response message, the TD-RNC sends the
UE the associated radio resources through the Handover From Utran Command message. At
the same time, it sends the CN a Relocation Required message. Upon receipt of the message,
the CN sends the BSC a Handover Request message. After the BSC completes the setup of A
interface resources, the UE is handed over to the target cell according to the traditional
inter-RAT handover procedure.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA
None
3.8.4 GBFD-511403 Extended BCCH

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

197
Summary
When this feature is enabled, SI2Quater and SI13 messages are broadcast on the extended
BCCH. This speeds up system information message broadcasting and shortens the delay in
inter-RAT cell reselection.
Benefits
This feature shortens the delay in inter-RAT cell reselection between a GSM network and a
TD-SCDMA network.
Description
If SIQuater and SI13 messages are broadcast on a BCCH, they are multiplexed on the same
BCCH as other system information messages. In addition, only one SIQuater or SI13 message
is broadcast in several scheduling periods. This prolongs inter-RAT cell reselection.
If SI2Quater and SI13 messages are specified to be broadcast on an extended BCCH, only
these two types of messages are broadcast on the extended BCCH. In addition, one SIQuater
or SI13 message is broadcast in each scheduling period. This speeds up the scheduling and
broadcasting of SI2Quater and SI13 messages.
As a result, MSs quickly obtain system information messages for inter-RAT cell reselection,
and the delay in cell reselection decreases.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
3.8.5 GBFD-511405 NC2 between GSM and TD-SCDMA

Availability
This feature was introduced in GBSS14.0 only for tests.
Summary
On a GSM and TD-SCDMA hybrid network, MSs in packet transfer mode using NC2
periodically send MRs to the BSC. Upon receiving the MRs, the BSC initiates a cell
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

198
reselection from GSM to TD-SCDMA for the MSs in NC2 mode based on the receive level,
cell load, and receive quality of the serving cell, as well as the receive level, cell load, and
service duration of neighboring TD-SCDMA cells.
Benefits
By comprehensively considering the receive level, cell load, and receive quality of the serving
cell, as well as the receive level, cell load, and service duration of neighboring TD-SCDMA
cells, the BSC instructs GSM/TD-SCDMA dual-mode MSs to reselect to TD-SCDMA cells so
that PS services are preferentially allocated to the TD-SCDMA network. This reduces the
probability that such MSs reselect GSM cells with a high signal strength, therefore improving
user experience and increasing network capacity.
Description
The BSC provides two sets of parameters for GSM/TD-SCDMA dual-mode MSs in idle or
packet transfer mode. The differentiated parameter setting allows dual-mode MSs in packet
transfer mode to measure the load and signal level of neighboring TD-SCDMA cells and to
report the measured values in MRs sent to the BSC.
According to the MRs sent by MSs, the BSC initiates a cell reselection from GSM to
TD-SCDMA for MSs in NC2 mode and selects neighboring TD-SCDMA cells, whose load is
lower than a specified threshold and whose receive level meets the minimum requirement, as
candidate cells. The BSC also monitors the PS service duration of MSs. If the service duration
of an MS in packet transfer mode exceeds a specified value, the BSC instructs the MS to
reselect to a TD-SCDMA cell.
The BSC obtains the loads of neighboring TD-SCDMA cells on the Iur-g interface between
the GSM BSC and the TD-SCDMA RNC during the common measurement procedure of a
cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature depends on the following feature if the load of neighboring TD-SCDMA cells is
used as a cell reselection condition:
GBFD-511401 Iur-g Interface Between GSM and TD-SCDMA
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

199

This feature requires GSM/TD-SCDMA dual-mode MSs that support the NC2 procedure.
The TD-SCDMA RNC must support the Iur-g interface to obtain the loads of neighboring
TD-SCDMA cells.
3.9 GSM/WiFi Interoperability

3.9.1 GBFD- 511608 WLAN Hot Spot Notification
Availability
Summary
The WLAN Hot Spot Notification feature identifies WiFi hotspots (assisted by the mobile
network) and implements intelligent WiFi dispatch (controlled by the mobile network).
Benefits
Increases the wireless local area network (WLAN) usage for operators.
Provides an operator-controlled WiFi dispatch policy.
Improves user experience with regard to WLAN services by maximizing the usage of
existing cell network resources.
Description
A customized application client is installed on MSs. When such an MS initiates PS services,
the BSC identifies messages from the MS. According to the cell dispatch policy, the BSC then
delivers notification messages for dispatching MSs to WLAN hotspots. As a result, the MS
can automatically enable WiFi and still be dispatched to the WLAN.
This feature is used only for testing in GBSS15.0.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

200

None
None
This feature depends on the application client installed on MSs.
3.9.2 GBFD-511609 Intelligent Wi-Fi Detection and Selection

Availability
This feature is available from GBSS15.0.
Summary
This feature uses a GSM/GPRS macro network to help mobile stations (MSs) detect Wireless
Fidelity (Wi-Fi) hotspots. If the cell load in the macro network reaches a specified threshold
and a nearby Wi-Fi Access Point (AP) is available, this feature redistributes the data flows of
the MSs to the Wi-Fi network. This feature must be supported by MSs and the GSM base
station subsystem (GBSS).
Benefits
Reduced manual operations due to automatic detection of and access to Wi-Fi hotspots
Reduced power consumption for MSs and improved user experience with Wi-Fi
Increased usage of Wi-Fi hotspots due to cooperation between the macro and Wi-Fi
networks
Maximized resource usage due to convergence of the macro and Wi-Fi networks
Description
Existing Wi-Fi networks are not fully utilized, probably because subscribers do not always
know the location of Wi-Fi hotspots and therefore do not always open the Wi-Fi function to
reduce the power consumption of MSs. To address this issue, this feature helps MSs detect
Wi-Fi hotspots and enables MSs to access Wi-Fi hotspots. This feature provides the following
functions:
Intelligent detection and selection of Wi-Fi hotspots

When an MS initiates a data service, if the cell load reaches a specified threshold and a
nearby Wi-Fi AP is available, the network informs the MS of the detected hotspots and
instructs the MS to switch its data service to the Wi-Fi network.
Access to the Wi-Fi network

After an MS receives a message indicating a detected Wi-Fi hotspot, it can switch its
data service to the Wi-Fi network.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

201
Interface between macro and micro cells

An interface connects the BSC and the Wi-Fi Access Controller (AC). This interface
transmits Wi-Fi AP availability information, based on which the BSC determines
whether to switch MSs to the Wi-Fi network.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
GBFD-114101 GPRS
GBFD-114201 EGPRS
The application software provided by the operator must be installed on the MS.
Huawei AC equipment must be configured.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

202
4 Networking & Transmission & Security
Networking &
Transmission & Security
4.1 TDM Transmission
4.1.1 GBFD-510002 Gb Over FR
Availability
Summary
Gb over FR is a traditional networking mode. The Gb over FR feature enables operators to
deploy the network in frame relay (FR) transmission mode between the BSC and the SGSN.
Benefits
Enables the BSC to be compatible with the SGSN equipment in the existing network.
Helps operators fully use the existing network in FR transmission mode.
Description
This feature complies with 3GPP specifications.
The Gb interface provides connections between the BSS and the SGSN to send the
information related to cell management and handovers in routing areas and transmit the data
between the MS and the SGSN. Traditionally, the Gb interface uses the FR transmission mode
to provide logical link connections, and data is transferred using the network service virtual
connection (NS-VC), which is the permanent virtual channel (PVC) in FR.
Huawei GBSS supports the FR networking over the Gb interface in E1/T1 direct transmission
mode or FR transmission mode, supports configuring multiple PVCs between the BSS and the
SGSN, and manages these PVCs and performs load sharing among them.
The BSC that supports Gb over FR only needs software upgrade to deploy the SGSN pool,
without requiring hardware upgrade.
The BSC supports both FR and IP transmission for the communication between the BSC and
the SGSN. These two types of transmission can work simultaneously.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

203
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
4.1.2 GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points

Availability
Summary
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each
signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points.
Benefits
This feature breaks the capacity limitation of a single signaling point using the narrowband
signaling. In addition, this feature is compatible with the traditional signaling networking
mode while meeting the signaling bandwidth requirements of the high processing capacity of
the BSC. Therefore, the operators' investment is saved.
Description
With network expansion, development of new services, popularization of the short message
service and wireless intelligent network service, and increase in the traffic volume, the
signaling flow between different signaling points increases rapidly. According to the protocols
related to the SS7 signaling, a maximum of 16 signaling links are allowed between single
signaling points. If the 64 kbit/s signaling link is used, a maximum of 1 Mbit/s bandwidth can
be provided for a single signaling point in the entire system. This is far from the requirements
for the signaling link bandwidth when the BSC is in full configuration.
With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each
signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points. If a physical node is
logically classified into N signaling points, the number of links between this physical node
and the remote signaling point is extended to N x 16 because the maximum number of
signaling links between the OSP and DSP is 16. This feature breaks the limitation of 16
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

204
signaling links of a single signaling point using the narrowband signaling and meets the
signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC.
In addition, the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the CN are reduced
because the high-speed signaling technology is not used. Therefore, the operators' investment
is saved.
This feature is used with the High Speed Signaling feature to support more flexible signaling
networking mode.
This feature is mainly used in TDM transmission mode.
Enhancement
GBSS7.0
This application enhancement supports the use of local multiple signaling points in the MSC
pool.
Dependency
None
4.1.3 GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface

Availability
Summary
With this feature, each signaling link occupies only 16 kbit/s bandwidth at the physical layer,
saving the transmission resources on the Abis interface.
Benefits
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Minimizes the transmission resources required on the Abis interface when the BTS
capacity is small, for example, when the BTS works in O1 or O2 configuration mode.

205
Saves the bandwidth when satellite transmission is used.
Description
With this feature, the radio signaling link (RSL) or operation and maintenance link (OML)
occupies 16 kbit/s sub-timeslots. In this case, the signaling and service can be configured in a
64 kbit/s timeslot on the Abis interface, and the signaling of different BTSs can coexist in the
same 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Compared with the traditional 4:1 multiplexing technology, the 16 kbit/s signaling link mode
can reduce the timeslot fragments, reducing the rent in the network with expensive
transmission cost, such as the satellite transmission networking.
The bandwidth of each signaling link is limited to 16 kbit/s. Therefore, call access failures or
call drops may occur in cells with high traffic volume because of signaling link congestion.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass
GBFD-117801 Ring Topology
None
4.1.4 GBFD-117301 Flex Abis

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the Abis transmission resources can be dynamically allocated to MSs.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

206
Benefits
Flex Abis enables the sharing of the Abis interface transmission resources among different
BTSs, cells, and services, improving the resource utilization. Especially for BTSs of large
capacity with multiple cells, cascaded BTSs, and the cells configured with the EDGE, this
feature can greatly improve resource utilization.
Description
In the CS domain, the timeslot transmission on the Abis interface adopts the resource pool
mode. The Abis resource is allocated to a TRX only when the TRX is busy. This can improve
the utilization of Abis resources. In the PS domain, the transmission resources on the Abis
interface are allocated based on 16 kbit/s sub-timeslot. A main timeslot is allocated to the
PDCH, and then additional timeslots are allocated with the steps of 16 kbit/s based on the
required coding rate on the Um interface. Huawei adopts 16 kbit/s as the unit so that
bandwidth usage is greatly improved and bandwidth is saved as much as possible.
The synchronization timeslot, signaling link timeslot, OML timeslot, and PS idle timeslot still
adopt the fixed Abis allocation mode. Other Abis timeslots adopt the Abis pool mode.
Huawei BSS equipment also supports the allocation of half-rate channels on the Abis interface,
which is triggered on the basis of the load of the Abis resources. Abis timeslots are allocated
at a minimum rate of 8 kbit/s. When the resource usage on the Um interface does not reach
the congestion threshold but the transmission resource utilization has reached the congestion
threshold, 8 kbit/s half-rate channels on the Abis interface are allocated to improve the
utilization of Abis resources.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on Abis Interface
GBFD-117801 Ring Topology (ring topology II)
This feature supports the DXX device except in either of the following scenarios:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

207
DXX cascading networking
Ring topology I
4.1.5 GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization

Availability
Summary
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature detects and compresses the idle speech frames by
using VAD and then sends the compressed data packet on the HDLC transmission channels
for statistical multiplexing. This improves the E1/T1 bandwidth usage. With this feature, each
E1/T1 can support 24 or 18 TRXs under the following conditions. (The number of TRXs
supported by E1 and T1 are different because the bandwidth of an E1 is 2 Mbit/s and the
bandwidth of a T1 is 1.55 Mbit/s.)
Full-rate CS services (excluding the half-rate and PS services)
Voice activation factor of 0.5.
Cascaded BTSs not carried on a single E1.
Benefits
In the radio access network, the transmission cost accounts for 20% of the operators'
expenditure, of which the transmission cost over the Abis interface makes up a large portion.
Therefore, to effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of the operators, it is necessary to
introduce a technology that saves transmission resources while protecting the current
investment.
This feature can save the transmission resources of the Abis interface. By adding the BSC
interface hardware and upgrading the BSC and BTS software, the operator can improve the
utilization of Abis resources by 30% to 40%.
Under certain conditions, one E1 can carry 24 TRXs.
Description
The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel
without changing the physical transmission mode. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data,
signaling data, and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain
through voice frame compression and multiplexing.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

208
Figure 4-1 Abis transmission optimization-enabled networking
Different from the TDM resources, the HDLC resources can be shared by multiple MSs.
Therefore, the QoS mechanism is introduced to add the admission control and congestion
management after this feature is enabled.
Admission control is a major measure taken to prevent congestion and is an important part of
the entire QoS mechanism. The system determines the bandwidth required for the access of
new services to prevent port or link congestion and to ensure the QoS of the entire system.
Congestion management alleviates the congestion by using the mechanism of lowering the
speech coding rate when transmission resources are congested, improving the processing
capability of the entire system.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
The function of manually configuring the HDLC channel is introduced.
The enhanced QoS is introduced.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

209

None
4.1.6 GBFD-112013 Abis Congestion Trigger HR Distribution

Availability
Summary
The Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature provides the following strategies for
alleviating the Abis congestion: preferentially allocating the TCHH, dynamic TCHF-TCHH
conversion, and queuing/preemption. In this way, the system capacity and speech quality are
dynamically balanced.
Benefits
This feature saves the transmission resources of the Abis interface and reduces the
network deployment cost.
When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, this feature
maintains the system capacity by degrading the speech quality. When the transmission
resources are not congested, the speech quality recovers and therefore the system
capacity and the speech quality are dynamically balanced.
Description
When the Abis Congestion Triggered HR Distribution feature is enabled, the system triggers
the HR allocation based on the congestion condition of transmission resources on the Abis
interface. In peak hours, the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested before
these on the Um interface. Therefore, the original dynamic TCHF-TCHH
conversion/preferentially allocating the TCHH based on the load of the Um resources cannot
ensure the system capacity. This feature performs the dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion,
preferential allocation of TCHH, and queuing/preemption to alleviate the congestion of Abis
resources and increase the system capacity.
Dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion

When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the qualified calls,
calls initiated by non-VIP subscribers, calls with high speech quality, and calls with
allowed path loss, are handed over from TCHF to TCHH. This alleviates the congestion
of transmission resources on the Abis interface and increases the system capacity. When
the congestion of transmission resources on the Abis interface is eliminated, the qualified
calls in the cell are handed over from TCHH to TCHF to improve the speech quality of
calls.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Preferentially allocating the TCHH

210
When the transmission resources on the Abis interface are congested, the TCHHs are
preferentially allocated to the newly accessed calls to slow down the congestion.
Queuing/Preemption
Similar to the queuing/preemption mechanism for the Um interface, the
queuing/preemption is performed for calls that allow queuing/preemption on assignment
or incoming handover. This ensures that services can be provided for subscribers with
high priorities even if the transmission resources on the Abis interface are severely
congested.
If the TDM transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH
mechanism is applied to eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-117301 Flex
Abis feature.
If the HDLC transmission is used on the Abis interface, preferentially allocating the TCHH
mechanism and queuing/preemption mechanism are applied to eliminate the Abis congestion
triggered by the GBFD-118401 Abis Transmission Optimization feature.
If the IP transmission is used on the Abis interface, dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion,
preferentially allocating the TCHH, and queuing/preemption mechanisms are applied to
eliminate the Abis congestion triggered by the GBFD-118601 Abis over IP feature.
This feature can be used with AMR HR and normal HR.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
4.1.7 GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission

Availability
Summary
When TDM is applied over the Ater interface, the IP over PPP over STM-1 scheme can be
used to carry traffic data. With the application of VAD, Ater MUX, PPP MUX, and IP header
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

211
compression, the data transmitted over the Ater interface is compressed and the transmission
efficiency over the IP interface is increased.
Benefits
This feature helps save the lease cost of the transmission equipment over the Ater interface.
Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the Ater compression transmission saves
30% of the transmission resources.
Description
The BSC interworks with the remote TC subrack on the Ater interface. To save the
transmission resources over the Ater interface, the TC subrack is usually placed in the telecom
equipment room with the NSS devices. That is, the BSC is in BM/TC separated mode. In this
case, the speech channel over the Ater interface requires only a bandwidth of 16 kbit/s
(full-rate) or 8 kbit/s (half-rate). Compared with the PCM speech channel of 64 kbit/s over the
A interface, 75% of the transmission resources is saved. The application of this feature further
saves 30% of the transmission resources over the Ater interface.
The Ater transmission compression is based on IP over PPP over STM-1, where the IP packets
of speech data are encapsulated using the PPP and then transmitted over the channelized
STM-1.
The key technologies of the Ater transmission compression are as follows:
ML-PPP/MC-PPP, which helps to improve the reliability and bandwidth usage
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a
link with relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into
several small packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over
the PPP links. On receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and
restores the original IP packet for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple E1/T1s
are combined to provide load sharing for the IP transmission. Therefore, the
bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the
ML-PPP to facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing
the transmission delay of the real-time data.
VAD, Ater MUX, PPP MUX, and IP header compression, which help to save the
bandwidth.
VAD: With the coordination of the DTX over the Um interface, this feature can
implement the discontinuous transmission of the speech frames over the Ater link.
Under typical call condition (VAD = 0.5), the Ater transmission efficiency is doubled
compared with that in the traditional condition.
Ater MUX: Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed onto one IP/UDP packet. On
receiving the IP/UDP packet, the peer end demultiplexes the IP/UDP packet to restore
the data. This scheme reduces the transmission resources consumed by the IP/UDP
header.
PPP MUX: Multiple upper layer packets such as UDP packets are multiplexed onto
one PPP frame. The description field of one to two bytes is added to each multiplexed
upper layer packets. All multiplexed upper layer packets share the information such
as the PPP header and CRC. In this way, the transmission resources consumed by the
PPP header are reduced.
IP header compression: The packets in one UDP data flow have the same source IP address,
destination IP address, source port, and destination port. With the IP header compression, the
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

212
redundant information in the IP/UDP header of the UDP data flow is removed. Therefore, the
transmission efficiency is improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-116901 Flex Ater
None
4.1.8 GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1

Availability
Summary
When TDM is applied over the Abis interface, the IP over E1/T1 scheme can be used to carry
traffic and signaling data.
Benefits
In IP over E1/T1 mode, the IP packets can be carried on the TDM-based network. For the
operators that have abundant TDM transmission resources, the IP over E1/T1 scheme
facilitates the evolution to an all-IP network and thereby protects the investment.
The use of ML-PPP/MC-PPP enhances the reliability of the Abis links and improves Abis link
bandwidth usage.
As many as 18 to 21 TRXs can be supported by each E1 with compression technologies such
as VAD and Abis MUX. Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the Abis IP over
E1/T1 saves 30% of the transmission resources and saves the lease cost of the TDM
transmission resources.
Description
In IP over E1/T1, the IP packets of the signaling and traffic data are packed using the PPP and
then transmitted over the E1/T1. The BTS and the Abis interface board on the BSC are
responsible for processing the PPP/ML-PPP.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

213
The IP over E1/T1 can be applied for the networking between the BTS and BSC. The BTS
uses the E1/T1, and the BSC uses the E1/T1, channelized STM-1, or FE/GE. Figure 4-2
shows the networking modes supported by the Abis IP over E1/T1.
Figure 4-2 Networking modes supported by the Abis IP over E1/T1
IP over E1
BTS
SDH
IP over E1(STM-1)
IP over E1
BSC
IP over FE/GE
BTS
IP over E1
BTS
In IP over E1/T1, the clock can be the same as that in TDM transmission mode. That is, the
clock is obtained by locking the clock of one node to the upper-level node over E1. In IP over
E1/T1, the clock over IP scheme can also be used.
The key technologies in IP over E1/T1 are as follows:
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a link with
relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into several small
packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over the PPP links. On
receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and restores the original IP packet
for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple E1/T1s are combined to provide load sharing
for the IP transmission. Therefore, the bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the ML-PPP to
facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing the transmission
delay of the real-time data.
VAD and Abis MUX, which help to save the bandwidth
VAD: With the coordination of the DTX over the Um interface, this feature can implement the
discontinuous transmission of the speech frames over the Abis link. Under typical call
condition (VAD = 0.5), the Abis transmission efficiency is doubled compared with that in the
traditional condition.
Abis MUX: Multiple UDP packets are multiplexed onto one IP/UDP packet. On receiving the
IP/UDP packet, the peer end demultiplexes the IP/UDP packet to restore the data. Multiple
UDP packets share one IP/UDP packet header, and therefore the IP transmission efficiency is
improved. For details, see the description of GBFD-118604 Abis MUX.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

214
Dependency
GBFD-119301 Voice Fault Diagnosis
When the BSC uses the STM-1 or FE transmission, this feature requires the support from the
external transmission device.
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GBSS IP evolution service or GBSS
network design service.
4.1.9 GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1

Availability
Summary
When the SDH transmission is applied between the GBSS and CN equipment, the traffic and
signaling data can be carried by the PPP-based IP transmission over the A interface. The port
of the BSC can be E1, T1, or STM-1.
Benefits
In IP over E1/T1 mode, the IP packets can be carried on the TDM-based network. For the
operators that have abundant TDM transmission resources, the IP over E1/T1 scheme
facilitates the evolution to an all-IP network and thereby protects the investment.
The utilization of ML-PPP/MC-PPP enhances the reliability of the A interface links and
improves the bandwidth usage of A interface links.
The technique of UDP multiplexing over the A interface increases the IP transmission
efficiency. Compared with the traditional TDM transmission, the A IP over E1/T1 saves 30%
of the transmission resources and saves the lease cost of the TDM transmission resources.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

215
Description
In IP over E1/T1, the IP packets of the signaling and traffic data are packed using the PPP and
then transmitted over the E1/T1/CSTM-1. The peer entity and the A interface board on the
BSC are responsible for processing the PPP/ML-PPP.
This feature enables the networking between the BSC and CN to use IP over PPP over
E1/T1/CSTM-1. The BSC adopts the E1/T1 or channelized STM-1 ports. The router at the
peer end or CN can adopt the E1/T1, channelized STM-1, or FE/GE ports. The following
figure shows the networking modes supported by the A IP over E1/T1.
IP over E1/T1/CSTM-1
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM1
SD
H
BSC
IP over FE/GE
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM1
MGW
MSC
IP over FE/GE
MGW
IP over
E1/T1/CSTM-1
IP over FE/GE
IP over FE/GE
ROUTER
MSC
MGW
MSC
In IP over E1/T1, the clock can be the same as that in TDM transmission mode. That is, the
clock is obtained by locking the clock of one node to the upper-level node over E1.
The key technologies in IP over E1/T1 are as follows:
ML-PPP: Multiple PPP links are combined to form one ML-PPP group to provide a link with
relatively high bandwidth. At the local end, a large IP packet is divided into several small
packets, which are then transmitted concurrently to the peer end over the PPP links. On
receiving the packets, the peer end reassembles the packets and restores the original IP packet
for further processing. In the ML-PPP, multiple E1/T1s are combined to provide load sharing
for the IP transmission. Therefore, the bandwidth usage is increased.
MC-PPP: The priority scheme is introduced to the MC-PPP on the basis of the ML-PPP to
facilitate the timely transmission of the real-time data, thereby reducing the transmission
delay of the real-time data.
UDP multiplexing on the A interface, which help to save the bandwidth
UDP multiplexing on the A interface: After A over IP is introduced, the RTP/UDP/IP

packaging is applied to the data of the user plane, bringing down the transmission efficiency.
In this technique, however, multiple RTP packets are multiplexed onto one UDP packet. As a
result, the proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and therefore the A
interface transmission efficiency is increased. For details, see GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A
Transmission.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

216
Dependency
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-113525 DTMF Downlink Message Filter
This feature should be supported by the CN and transmission equipment that support IP over
PPP.
4.1.10 GBFD-117801 Ring Topology

Availability
Summary
The ring topology is a special chain topology. Several BTSs form a chain, and the
lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link, forming a ring. If
there is a breakpoint on the ring, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in
networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection
in the reverse direction.
Benefits
Compared with the common chain topology, the advantage of the ring topology is that when a
connection is broken, the ring automatically breaks into two chains. In this way, the BTSs that
precede and follow the breakpoint can work properly, improving the robustness of the system.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

217
Description
The ring topology supports the following operations:
Automatic switchover
Manual switchover
Querying and dynamically configuring of the switchover parameters
Dynamic data configuration such as adding or deleting a BTS, cell, or TRX.
Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the ring topologies of the BTS:
Figure 4-3 Ring topology (1)
Figure 4-4 Ring topology (2)
Numbers 0 and 1 shown in Figure 4-3 refer to port 0 and port 1 of the BTS. In the BTS ring
topology, the link established at port 0 is a forward link and the link established at port 1 is a
reverse link.
The BTS ring topology can be implemented between interface boards but not between
subracks. In other words, the BTS ring topology must be implemented between the GEIUBs
located in the same subrack, as shown in Figure 4-4.
Generally, the BTS ring topology is a chain of BTS0, BTS1, and BTS2 in sequence, known as
a forward direction. In the forward direction as shown in Figure 4-3, BTS0 is the highest-level
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

218
BTS, BTS1 is the second-level BTS, and other BTSs are connected analogically. When the
link A, B, C, or D is broken, the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remains in the same
topology, and the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a chain in a reverse direction.
The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and
Huawei BTS ring topology II. In BTS ring topology I, the BTS with a reverse link is
initialized again after transmission disruption, and therefore the services of the BTS are
interrupted. In BTS ring topology II, the services of the BTS with a reverse link are not
interrupted after transmission disruption.
Enhancement
Fast Ring Network Switch function is introduced in GBSS8.0.
With this feature, when a transmission link in the ring network is faulty, all the BTSs behind
the breaking point in the ring network perform the switchover in the reverse direction.
The Fast Ring Network Switch feature accelerates the ring network switchover and the BTS
does not need to be initialized in the reverse ring direction. Therefore, the call drops due to the
ring network switchover and the impact of the switchover on the new calls are reduced. This
improves the network reliability and user experience.
Dependency
GBFD-113728 OML Backup
GBFD-116701 16Kbit RSL and OML on A-bis Interface
The Huawei BTS ring topology II function is mutually exclusive with GBFD-117301 Flex
Abis.
This feature cannot be used with DXX.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

219
4.2 IP Transmission
4.2.1 GBFD-118620 Clock over IP support 1588v2
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the networking with the clock server that complies with IEEE1588v2 is
supported. Therefore, a highly precise synchronization clock for the IP-based BTS is provided.
Compared with the GPS clock, this feature is a cost-effective clock solution.
Benefits
The networking is flexible because the IP-based BTS can be networked with the clock
server that complies with IEEE1588v2.
This feature is a cost-effective clock solution because the IP-based BTS can obtain the
clock from the IP network.
The IP-based BTS supports the configuration of the primary and secondary IP clock
servers, increasing the reliability of the clock system.
Description
In TDM networking mode, the BTS can extract the clock signals from the GPS, BITS, or E1
lines. The clock extraction in IP networking mode does not function properly. In all-IP
networking mode, the E1 line clock is not available. The GPS line clock is available in the
all-IP networking mode but the GPS reception devices, antenna, and feeder must be added,
which increases the expenditure. The BITS clock is available for only a few sites. With the
Clock over IP feature, the clock solution becomes cost-effective because the clock reference
can be obtained from the IP network.
The Clock over IP is implemented using the IP clock server and IP clock client. The IP clock
server generates a time stamp and sends the time stamp to the BTS that is configured as the IP
clock client. The BTS uses an adaptive method to remove the delay and restore the clock.
Huawei GBSS supports two types of clock standards: Huawei proprietary clock standard and
IEEE1588v2. This feature complies with only IEEE1588v2. With this feature, Huawei BSS
can interconnect with the Huawei IP clock server and other clock servers that comply with
IEEE1588v2.
Figure 4-5 shows the networking of Clock over IP support 1588v2.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

220
Figure 4-5 Networking of Clock over IP support 1588v2
The IP clock server can be deployed as an independent entity in the network. The IP clock
client can be deployed in the BTS. No additional hardware is required. An IP clock server can
serve up to 512 BTSs.
In addition, the IP-based BTS supports the configuration of primary and secondary IP clock
servers. When the primary IP clock server becomes faulty, the path to extract the clock signals
is switched to the secondary IP clock server, enhancing the reliability of the clock system.
Enhancement
GBSS12.0
Frequency Synchronization Based on IEEE1588v2 over MAC:
The clock synchronization for the Ethernet can be achieved by using the IEEE1588v2
technology. From the GBSS9.0, IEEE1588v2 over UDP has been applied to the layer 3 of the
multi-service transport platform (MSTP) network. In the GBSS12.0, IEEE1588v2 over MAC
can be applied to the layer 2 of the MSTP network.
IEEE1588v2 over MAC is a technology based on which transmission equipment forwards
timestamps according to the MAC addresses instead of the IP addresses. To achieve clock
synchronization in the MSTP network, all the involved transmission equipment must support
IEEE1588v2 over MAC.
There are two types of synchronization based on IEEE1588v2 over MAC, frequency
synchronization and time synchronization. Only frequency synchronization is supported by
this feature.
GBSS14.0
G.8265.1
The IEEE1588 standards were initially applied to industrial automation for accurate time
synchronization. In the telecommunications industry, these standards were originally used in
distributed networks for clock synchronization. Now, these standards have been applied to
wide area networks (WANs). The IEEE1588v2 standards, which were released in 2008,
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

221
proposed the concept of "profile". "profile" allows vendors to select features to apply to other
fields instead of only the industrial automation field. Now, the IEEE1588 standards allow
vendors to select an IEEE1588 feature subset ("profile") to implement clock synchronization.
As an extension of the concept of "profile", the ITU proposes G.8265.1, which defines
interconnection standards for different vendors. Currently, G.8265.1 defines the profile for
frequency synchronization in layer 3 unicast mode and allows the interconnection between
devices supporting IEEE1588 from different vendors. In this manner, a BTS supporting
G.8265.1 can be connected to a clock server supporting G.8265.1 from another vendor.
Dependency
None
This feature should be supported by the clock server that supports the IEEE1588v2
specifications.
4.2.2 GBFD-118202 Synchronous Ethernet

Availability
Summary
This feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clock of
a synchronous Ethernet can be obtained and recovered from the physical layer of the Ethernet.
The solution provided by this feature is easy to deploy, as it does not require additional BSC
or BTS hardware.
Benefits
The synchronous Ethernet is a key to the solution for all-IP transmission. In addition, it is an
economical and convenient solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

222
Description
The clock synchronization technology adopted by this feature is based on the physical layer of
the Ethernet. By using this technology, the clock signals can be retrieved from the data flow
of the Ethernet link. With this feature, the data is transmitted at the physical layer by adopting
the highly precise clock. The receive end can retrieve and recover the clock directly from the
data flow. In this way, the precision of the clock is ensured.
Another benefit of the feature is that it does not require additional BTS hardware to achieve
clock synchronization in the all-IP network.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
All relay devices in the transport network must support this feature.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

223
4.2.3 GBFD-118601 Abis over IP

Availability
Summary
Abis over IP enables the IP networking over the Abis interface.
Benefits
This feature adapts to All IP development trend of future transport layer and protocol
development.
The Abis interface incorporates the features such as high bandwidth and low cost deployment,
and it does not have any restrictions on the BSC capacity.
The low IP network deployment cost, short construction period, and easy maintenance
effectively reduce the CAPEX and OPEX of operators.
A firewall ensures the security for the BTS.
Description
Abis over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network between the BSC and the BTS.
In addition, this feature provides FE and GE interfaces and supports the IPv4 protocol. The
BSC connects to the BTS through a LAN or WAN, depending on the location of the BSC and
the BTS.
Abis over IP supports active/standby mode and load sharing mode, and is reliable.
The GBSS adopts the following mechanisms to ensure end-to-end high QoS.
Physical bandwidth shaping

The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer and token bucket. If the
messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are buffered and transmitted
at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
Priority mapping
A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services. Then, the messages
are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the corresponding flow control
and resource assignment. According to the load on the current network, a specific flow
control action is taken.
Congestion management
Congestion occurs when the rate at which data arrives at the port is higher than the rate
at which data is sent from the port. In this case, the voice quality deteriorates and the
data transmission rate decreases. The traffic statistics of the interface board show that the
number of discarded packets increases. As a result, congestion results in the increase of
the packet transmission delay and delay variation. Furthermore, an excessively long
delay leads to packet retransmission. If congestion increases, a large number of network
resources are wasted and improper resource assignment may lead to system deadlock or
system breakdown. The problem of shortage of network resources can be solved by
increasing the network bandwidth. In addition, preventive mechanisms like tail drop and
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

224
weighted random early detection (WRED) must be applied to avoid the network
congestion. When congestion occurs, the priority queue (PQ) or weighted round robin
(WRR) of queue scheduling is used to solve the congestion problem.
Enhancement
GBSS8.1
New QoS mechanisms VLAN are introduced in GBSS8.1.
VLAN: Virtual local area network. Based on the switching LAN, the network management
software is used to establish an end-to-end logical network across different network segments
and different networks. This improves the network processing capability and service
management capability. The network logically isolates the data of different applications
during transmission. For example, the network allocates the O&M data transferred between
the BSC and the BTS, data transferred by signaling messages, and service data to different
VLANs. This improves the security of network transmission and simplifies the flow control
management for data transmission of different applications. In application, one or several
BTSs or BSCs in the same physical network can be allocated to a VLAN.
GBSS9.0
Static IP address supported by the BTS: This feature supports the configuration of items such
as the BTS IP address, BSC IP address, and routing on the site maintenance terminal.
Compared with the configuration of dynamic IP address for the GBSS, the configuration of
static IP address is more complicated, but does not require the configuration of DHCP relay.
GBSS9.0
The IP Fault detection based on BFD feature is introduced.
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis, A, and Gb
interfaces. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by periodically transmitting
BFD packets between two nodes. When BFD packets are not received within the period of
several detection intervals, the communication between the two nodes fails. In this case,
procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to prevent traffic loss. The
interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be used for telecom services
over IP.
The BFD involves two cases: one hop and multi-hop. For one hop, the two nodes of the BFD
are the BSC and a layer 3 device connecting to the BSC, such as the router, BTS, or MGW.
For multi-hop, the two nodes of the BFD are the BSC and its peer device, such as a BTS,
MGW, or SGSN.
The BFD is applicable in the following scenarios:
1. The BSC is connected to a peer device such as the BTS, MGW, or SGSN by using a router.
In this case, the BFD can be used to check whether the router is working properly.
BSC
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

225
p1
R1
p2
R3
R2
BTS/CN
R4
The BFD is activated for detecting any faults in p1 and p2. If p1 is faulty, the BSC triggers an
IP rerouting procedure. The packet is then sent and received over p2.
2. The BSC is connected directly to the peer device such as the BTS, MGW, or SGSN. In this
case, the BFD can be used to check whether the peer device is working properly.
BSC
p1
BTS/CN
p2
The BFD is activated for detecting any faults in p1 and p2. If p1 is faulty, the BSC triggers an
IP rerouting procedure. The packet is then sent and received over p2.
GBSS14.0
The BTS built-in firewall function is introduced.
The BTS built-in firewall automatically takes effect after the feature GBFD-118601 Abis over
IP is enabled. The BTS built-in firewall filters out malicious data and prevents network
attacks to avoid a system breakdown when a large number of system resources are consumed
by network attacks.
The BTS built-in firewall provides the following functions:
Access Control List (ACL)-based packet filtering: The ACL module sets ACL policies to
filter out malicious data. The ACL policy supports sextuple filtering. Sextuple refers to
source IP address, source port, destination IP address, destination port, protocol, and
DSCP. You can also choose to configure only some of these filters. This feature supports
both whitelist-based and blacklist-based filtering.
Attack packet filtering: This filtering provides basic network protection. It can be
configured to prevent various types of attacks, such as ARP spoofing, flooding attack,
and malformed packet attack.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

226
Dependency
MRFD-210206 Tree Topology
MRFD-210204 Chain Topology
GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking
The BSC and its peer device must support BFD.
4.2.4 GBFD-118602 A over IP

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBSS8.0 and GBSS8.1 implements A interface over IP in proprietary protocols. The
features include TC in MGW and IP transmission on the signaling plane and user plane.
Benefits
With the increasing use of IP transmission in the wireless core network, the compressed
speech coding scheme is used on the Nb interface, and the TDM transmission is still used on
the A interface. In this way, a call across MSCs needs to be coded and decoded four times.
Compared with coding and decoding in TDM transmission mode that occurs only twice, the
application of IP transmission in the CN increases the number of TCs required by the BSC
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

227
and the MGW in the network and deteriorates the voice quality. However, when A interface
over IP is applied, together with the IP transmission on CN and transcoder free operation
(TrFO), the originated call and terminated call do not need to be coded and decoded.
Therefore, the voice quality is improved and the number of TCs required by the BSC and the
MGW is reduced.
With the increase of the network equipment capacity and the number of nodes, MSC pool is
an acknowledged solution that meets the requirements of disaster recovery and backup. In
TDM transmission mode, the application of MSC pool over the A interface is difficult to be
implemented due to the complexity of the physical connection. The IP transmission, however,
effectively address this problem.
In addition, A interface over IP complies with the trend of all IP in the transmission network
and simplifies the network maintenance.
Description
The details of this feature are as follows:
TC in MGW
To improve the voice quality, the feature of TrFO is supported. The TCs located in the
BSS are removed from the existing GSM network and are placed in the MGW. Under the
control of the signaling plane, when the calling and called MSs use the same speech
versions or compatible AMR codec set, the MGW performs coding and decoding
without using TC. Therefore, TrFO is implemented and then the voice quality is
improved. However, if the calling and called MSs use different speech versions or
incompatible AMR codec set, the TC in the MGW is required to converse speech version
under the control of the MSC-S.
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
MGW
A/IP
= Signalling
= User p lane
Nc
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
Nb
MGW
A/IP
e.g. AMR coded
e.g. AMR coded
IP based
protocol
stack
IP based
protocol
stack
= Transcoder or Transcoder-pair, typically not used in MS-to MS calls
Voice over IP
The A interface on the user plane is placed between the BSC and the MGW and adopts
the standard RTP/UDP/IP protocol to carry user data. The A interface supports all the
following speech codec types in the existing BSS:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
GSM_FR:
RFC 3551 for GSM_FR.
GSM_HR:
ETSI 101318 for GSM_HR.

228
GSM_EFR:
RFC 3551 for EFR.
AMR:
RFC 3267 for AMR.
The speech coding scheme on the A interface is the same as that on the Um interface
because there is no TC configured in the BSS. However, the speech codec types are
different.
BSC
MGW
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Signaling over IP
The BSC supports signaling over IP on the A interface in the M3UA/Stream Control
Transmission Protocol (SCTP)/IP protocol stack. The BSC is directly connected to the
MSC server through the MTP3 User Adaptation Layer (M3UA), and the data on the
signaling plane and user plane can be transmitted through the MGW routes.
To meet the requirements of TrFO and IP transmission on the user plane, some signaling
messages at the BSSMAP is modified. At the same time, the intra-BSS switchover
procedure of speech versions is added.
The introduction of A the interface over IP has no impact on the DTAP message.
BSC
MSS
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
A over IP complying with 3GPP specifications: The signaling plane and user plane comply
with the related specifications in 3GPP R8. The user plane complies with TS43.903 and the
signaling plane complies with TS48.008. The CSD coding complies with RFC4040 and
RFC2198. Theoretically, the GBSS is capable of working with the IP-based CN devices
(supplied by the competitor) that comply with 3GPP R8.
CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP: Certain CSD services, such as the fax
service, are quite sensitive to data loss. The retransmission mechanism for such services is
usually insufficient at the application layer. Therefore, the packet loss on the IP transmission
network has great impact on such services, for example, the fax is interrupted. This feature
enables the same CSD service data block to be transmitted in different RTP frames in A over
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

229
IP, ensuring the completeness of the data and enhancing user experience of the CSD services
in A over IP. The CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP supports a maximum of
three levels of redundancy; that is, a maximum of two consecutive RTP frames can be
discarded. The CSD service bearer in A over IP complies with the RFC4040 specification.
The CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP complies with the RFC2198
specification.
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis interface, A
interface, and Gb interface. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by
periodically transmitting BFD packets between two nodes. When BFD packets are not
received within the period of several detection intervals, the communication between the two
nodes fails. In this case, procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to
prevent traffic loss. The interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be
used for telecom services over IP. For details, see section 4.2.3 "GBFD-118601 Abis over IP."
Dependency
GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
The MSC/MGW must support this feature.
The GBSS8.0 and GBSS8.1 apply only to Huawei MSC/MGW.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

230
4.2.5 GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission

Availability
Summary
In A over IP, the RTP/UDP/IP packaging is applied to the data of the user plane, reducing the
transmission efficiency. When this feature is enabled, however, multiple RTP packets are
multiplexed onto one UDP packet. As a result, the proportion of the packet header to the total
packet decreases, and therefore the A interface transmission efficiency is increased.
Benefits
The UDP multiplexing improves the usage of the transmission resources on the A interface,
protects the investment, and reduces the O&M cost. The transmission efficiency can be
increased by 30% to 40% depending on the number of packets that are multiplexed.
Description
In A over IP, the RTP/UDP/IP packaging is applied to the packets of the user plane, bringing
down the transmission efficiency, particularly in the case of short packets of CS data.
This feature can solve the problem by adding a UDP multiplexing subheader which is smaller
than UDP and multiplexing multiple RTP packets onto one UDP packet. As a result, the
proportion of the packet header to the total packet decreases, and therefore the A interface
transmission efficiency is increased. The transmission efficiency can be increased by 30% to
40% depending on the number of packets that are multiplexed.
The UDP multiplexing is applicable regardless of whether the RTP header is compressed. The
UDP multiplexing is independent of the physical bearer. That is, the UDP multiplexing is
applicable to IP over E1/T1, IP over channelized STM-1 (CPOS), or IP over FE/GE.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

231

The CN must support this feature.
4.2.6 GBFD-118623 TDM/IP Dual Transmission over A Interface

Availability
Summary
This feature enables TDM transport and IP transport to be used simultaneously over the A
interface on the BSC side. Telecom operators can set a proper traffic proportion so that some
calls use TDM bearer and other calls use IP bearer. This feature is applicable to the scenario
where GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network.
Benefits
When GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP network, telecom operators can
reconstruct the transport network gradually to ensure smooth migration.
Description
As specified by 3GPP GERAN Releases 7 and 8, the IP-based transport protocols for the
signaling and user planes are introduced into the A interface, and A over IP officially becomes
the network reconstruction trend. When GSM is upgraded from the TDM network to the IP
network, the BSC and the CN (including the MSC server and MGW) need to support TDM
transport and IP transport simultaneously on the A interface in a specified period. The purpose
is to ensure the smooth migration of the transport network.
The following stages are involved in the migration from TDM to IP on the A interface:
1) All-TDM stage: All the calls use TDM bearer during this stage.
2) TDM and IP dual-stack transport stage: Traffic is distributed to TDM transport and IP
transport according to the preset proportion during this stage. For example, 80% of the new
calls are established on TDM and 20% of the new calls are established on IP.
3) All-IP stage: All the calls use IP bearer and the original TDM bearer can be removed during
this stage.
The following figure shows the topology where TDM and IP dual-stack transport is applied to
the A interface. The BSC in the A-interface dual-stack transport state must support the
TDM-based PCM voice and IP-based compressed voice simultaneously. When TDM
transport is applied to the A interface, the TC in the BSS is used. When IP transport is applied
to the A interface, the TC in the MGW is used.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

232
A/TDM
A/IP
MSC-S
BSS
Nc
A/TDM
MSC-S
Mc/IP
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
A/TDM
A/TDM
MGW
A/IP
Nb
MGW
Signaling
Transcoder
User plane
Transcoder or Transcoder pair
A/IP
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The CN must support both IP and TDM.
4.2.7 GBFD-118603 Gb over IP

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

233
Summary
Gb over IP allows operators to deploy an IP network instead of using frame relay (FR)
between the BSC and the SGSN. Therefore, operators can fully utilize the advantages of IP
transmission to save the transmission cost and carry different types of services.
Benefits
This feature can reduce the cost of network investment. The IP transmission simplifies
network maintenance, saving the operation cost and maintenance expense.
The application of IP transmission increases the bandwidth over the Gb interface. Therefore,
the Gb interface does not restrict the bit rate of subscribers.
This feature facilitates the SGSN pool function. Compared with the frame relay mode, the
cost of using SGSN pool function in IP transmission is much lower because the SGSN pool
function requires a large number of links on the Gb interface. Therefore, SGSN pool can be
implemented in a more cost-efficient way.
Description
Gb over IP complies with the 3GPP protocol.
When Gb over IP is enabled, SGSN pool can be implemented after the license of SGSN pool
is obtained and no upgrade is required in the existing hardware.
Gb over IP supports dynamic configuration and highly automatic upgrade compared with the
frame relay mode. If SGSN pool is enabled, the application of Gb over IP can reduce the
configuration work for the Gb interface.
The Gb interface supports the FE/GE interface, the interface in active/standby mode or load
sharing mode, and the interconnection between the CN and the LAN or MAN.
The Gb interface supports IP services based on the DiffServ mechanism and guarantees the
QoS of the services with different levels. When the IP network is congested, the data packets
of the service with higher priority are preferably transmitted.
The BSC supports two kinds of end-to-end communications from the BSC to the SGSN, that
is, the FR network and IP network. In addition, two protocol stacks can work simultaneously
to minimize the impact of the IP transmission on the existing services.
When Gb over IP is applied, the transmission equipment supporting IP transmission should be
used. Compared with the FR equipment, the cost is lower.
With the increase of packet data services, the requirement for the bandwidth over the Gb
interface is higher. Gb over IP can compress the IP header and enable the data over the Gb
interface to share the bandwidth, improving the transmission efficiency and reducing the
transmission cost.
This feature does not support VLAN or multiplexing method.
Enhancement
GBSS9.0
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis interface, A
interface, and Gb interface. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

234
received within the period of several detection intervals, the communication between the two
nodes fails. In this case, procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are triggered to
prevent traffic loss. The interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and therefore it can be
used for telecom services over IP. For details, see section 4.2.3 "GBFD-118601 Abis over IP."
Dependency
None
The SGSN must support this feature.
4.2.8 GBFD-118605 IP QoS

Availability
Summary
IP QoS provides a series of QoS mechanisms for the IP transmission to ensure the
transmission quality. The QoS mechanisms include admission control, congestion
management, port traffic shaping, queue scheduling, DSCP, and VLAN.
Benefits
IP QoS ensures the KPIs in the wireless network and prevents the drop in QoS caused by the
network congestion.
IP QoS meets different requirements of applications and enhances user experience.
Description
After the IP transmission is applied to the GBSS, the transmission resources are multiplexed
instead of being occupied exclusively. When the transmission resources are not sufficient, the
congestion may cause the increase of delay, packet loss, and call drop. Therefore, the QoS
mechanisms are required to guarantee the transmission quality of IP network. Huawei GBSS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

235
equipment provides different QoS mechanisms at each protocol layer to guarantee an

end-to-end QoS, as listed in the following table:
Protocol Layer
QoS Mechanism
Application layer
1. Admission control
2. Congestion management based on the congestion status of
transmission resources
3. Logical port shaping
4. IP PATH
IP layer
1. Priority mapping
Data link layer
1. VLAN
2. BFD detection
3. Congestion management (PQ, WRR, tail drop, WRED)
Physical layer
1. Physical bandwidth shaping
QoS mechanism at physical layer

Physical bandwidth shaping: The burst flow in the network is controlled by the buffer
and token bucket. If the messages are transmitted at a very high speed, the messages are
buffered and transmitted at a uniform speed under the control of the token bucket.
QoS mechanism at data link layer

VLAN: Virtual local area network (VLAN) logically isolates the data of different
applications during transmission. For example, the network allocates the O&M data
transferred between the BSC and the BTS, data transferred by signaling messages, and
service data to different VLANs. This improves the security of network transmission.
This function applies to Abis over IP and A over IP.
BFD detection: bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a simple Hello protocol,
which is similar to the neighbor detection part of the routing protocols. Two systems
periodically send BFD check messages on the channel between the two systems. If one
system does not receive any check message from the other system for a long time, you
can infer that the channel is faulty. BFD detection enables the BSC to detect the link
fault between the BSC and the peer equipment in IP network quickly and then initiate
handover or active/standby switchover. Therefore, the link fault can be quickly identified
and isolated and therefore the service interruption time is greatly reduced. BFD is
applicable when IP transmission is established on Abis, A, and Gb interface.
Congestion management: The congestion occurs when the rate at which the data arrives
at the port is higher than the rate at which the data is sent from the port. Then, the voice
quality deteriorates and the data transmission rate reduces. In addition, the congestion
increases the packet transmission delay and delay variation. An excessively long delay
causes packet retransmission and further aggravates the network congestion. Therefore,
the congestion control mechanisms are used to prevent congestion for the packets
received, such as the tail drop and WRED. The queuing scheduling techniques such as
PQ and WRR are used to send the packets in real time based on the priority of each
packet. The congestion management is applicable when IP transmission is established on
Abis, A, and Gb interface.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
IP layer

236
Priority mapping: A definite rule is used to identify the messages for different services.
Then, the messages are classified and prioritized, and they are associated with the
corresponding flow control and resource assignment. The QoS mapping in the
transmission network is implemented according to the data with different priorities.
Priority mapping is applicable to Abis over IP and A over IP.
Application layer
Admission control: Admission control is a major measure used to prevent congestion and
is an important mechanism of the entire QoS policy. The system determines the
bandwidth required for the access of new services to prevent port or link congestion and
to ensure the QoS of the entire system.
Congestion management: The admission control applies only to new services that
attempt to access the system; whereas, the congestion management applies to the
admitted services and alleviates the congestion when transmission resources are
congested. The BSC decreases the rates of the services that already access the network in
the congestion control and bandwidth reservation phases to increase the processing
capacity of the entire system.
IP PATH is used for admission control and LDR is used for congestion control.
According to the congestion severity, the admission control is classified into three phases:
normal admission, congestion control, and bandwidth reservation. Different admission
strategies are applied in different phases.
Normal admission phase: The transmission resources are not congested and all services
are allowed to access the system.
Congestion control phase: The transmission resources are slightly congested and the
services after rate reduction are allowed to access the system. The rate control measures
consist of the PS coding control, CS AMR coding control, and preferential assignment of
TCHHs for CS services.
Bandwidth reservation phase: The transmission resources are severely congested. When
the bandwidth is available, intra-BSC handover, incoming BSC handover, and paging
response are admitted. New services with high priorities are allowed to wait in queue and
preempt transmission resources, whereas other types of services are rejected.
Admission control is performed on the basis of the bandwidth usage of the IP PATH.
When an IP path is configured on the logical port or resource group, two-level (IP PATH
and logical port/resource group) admission is performed.
Logical port shaping: Generally, one physical FE/GE port on the BSC can carry the
traffic of multiple BTSs. Traffic shaping on this physical port cannot be implemented on
these BTSs. When burst flow occurs on one BTS, the traffic processing of other BTSs
may be seriously affected. Therefore, the BSC performs two-level traffic shaping on the
logical ports on the BTSs in Abis over IP mode. In this way, the BSC accurately controls
the traffic flow on the BTSs according to the processing capacity of each BTS. This
prevents the prolonged delay of services and the increase of delay variation and packet
loss rate.
IP PATH: In Abis over IP mode, the IP paths of different bandwidths are configured
according to the service type. This guarantees the transmission resource for each service
type and prevents different service types from preempting the transmission resources.
The IP path is a logical link with virtual bandwidth and is carried on the physical link in
the IP transmission network. The IP PATH mechanism is mainly applicable to admission
control. That is, admission control is performed during the MS access phase according to
the service type and the bandwidth of the corresponding IP path. Therefore, the effect of
the services on each other can be reduced.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

237
BE
EF
logical
port
AF4
Priority Queues
BE
EF
logical
port
AF4
PQ+WR
Rqueues
AF4
Priority Queues
PQ+WR
Rqueues
EF
PQ+WR
Rqueues
Priority Queues
BE
logical
port
1 level shaper
IP Scheduler
2 level shaper
FE port
IP/Ethernet
Transport Network
Enhancement
GBSS15.0
Enhancement 1-Transmission load measurement algorithm at the transport layer
The BSC periodically measures the actual traffic carried on BTSs to obtain the
transmission load status. The BSC then reports the status to the application layer. The
application layer then adjusts the data rate based on the load status of the transport
layer to prevent transmission congestion. The application layer triggers access control
and congestion management based on the reported status. This improves the accuracy
of access control and congestion management.
For bandwidth-variable services such as AMR and PS services, this enhancement

eliminates the bandwidth offset caused by the original transmission load
measurement algorithm. When PS services account for a large portion of network
traffic, this enhancement helps improve the bandwidth usage by more than 20%.
Enhancement 2-AMRC
This enhancement is based on enhancement 1.
The details are as follows:
When network transmission is congested, the BSC gradually degrades the coding
schemes for AMR calls in a TRX-by-TRX manner.
When a new AMR call attempts to access the network, the BSC allows the call to use
the same coding scheme as the existing AMR calls on the same TRX. This uses
transmission resources in a more efficient way.
When congestion is relieved, the coding scheme for AMR calls is upgraded in a
TRX-by-TRX manner. This improves voice quality.
This enhancement has the following advantages:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Quickly relieves the congestion.

238
Improves voice quality after network congestion is relieved by gradually upgrading

the coding schemes for AMR calls to meet the maximum bit rate (MBR)
requirements for voice services.
Dependency
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or
GBFD-118603 Gb over IP or GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBSS15.0 enhancement is mutually exclusive with the following features:
GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission
None
4.2.9 GBFD-118631 A Interface Transmission Pool

Availability
Summary
The A Interface Transmission Pool feature enables BSC IP interface boards to form a resource
pool over the A interface. This feature supports routing based on source IP addresses and
requires no IP paths for the BSC. When a call accesses the network, the BSC selects an IP
address of an interface board in the resource pool based on the load sharing algorithm. This
helps balance the load among the interface boards in the resource pool.
To support this feature, layer-3 networking must be used between the BSC and the MGW, so
that the MGW is fully connected to the BSC IP interface boards over the A interface.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

239
Benefits
Improves the usage of interface boards or ports.
Simplifies capacity expansion for A interface transmission resources on the BSC without
configuring IP paths or routes.
Maintains BSC transmission configurations when IP addresses are added or changed on

the MGW.
Description
Without the A Interface Transmission Pool feature, A interface boards work in the board or
port active/standby mode. In these configuration modes, A interface reliability is high, but
interface board or port usage is low. In addition, IP paths and routes must be configured for
the BSC before IP addresses are added to the MGW.
With this feature, the MGW can communicate with any BSC IP interface board in a resource
pool over the A interface. Figure 4-6 shows the networking of the resource pool over the A
interface.
Figure 4-6 Resource pool over the A interface
IP
Interface
1
board 1
CE
Interface IP
board 2 2
IP/MPLS
Core network
IP
Interface
3
board 3
IP
Interface 4
board 4
CE
This feature supports the following functions:
Enables the BSC to automatically allocate new calls to interface boards that have lighter
loads if an interface board in the resource pool is overloaded.
Supports routing based on source IP addresses and requires no IP paths for the BSC. This
simplifies BSC configurations.
Allows the BSC to deploy signaling-plane SCTP links on two interface boards in a
resource pool by using the dual homing function. This enhances protection for the
signaling-plane transmission.
With this feature, BSC IP interface boards can form a resource pool over the A interface when
working in either of the following modes:
Active/standby mode: In this mode, interface board reliability is high, preventing

ongoing calls from dropping when an interface board is faulty.
Independent mode: In this mode, interface board usage is high, but ongoing calls must
access the network again if an interface board is faulty.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

240
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-118610 UDP MUX for A Transmission
All IP routes on the user plane between the MGW and the BSC must be reachable.
4.2.10 GBFD-150201 A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing

Availability
Summary
The A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing feature consists of the following functions:
TC in MGW
IP transmission on the signaling plane or user plane
Dynamic load balancing among multiple A interface boards
Benefits
The A interface over IP provides the following benefits:
When A interface over IP is applied, together with the IP transmission on CN and

transcoder free operation (TrFO), the originated call and terminated call do not need to
be coded and decoded. Therefore, the voice quality is improved and the number of TCs
required by the BSC and the MGW is reduced.
In TDM transmission mode, the application of MSC pool over the A interface is difficult
to be implemented due to the complexity of the physical connection. The IP transmission,
however, effectively address this problem.
A interface over IP complies with the trend of all IP in the transmission network and
simplifies the network maintenance.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

241
Multiple A interface boards form a resource pool. The resource pool provides the following
benefits:
Improves the usage of interface boards or ports.
Simplifies capacity expansion for A interface transmission resources on the BSC without
configuring IP paths or routes.
Maintains BSC transmission configurations when IP addresses are added or changed on

the MGW.
Description
The A interface over IP is described as follows:
TC in MGW
To improve the voice quality, the feature of TrFO is supported. The TCs located in the
BSS are removed from the existing GSM network and are placed in the MGW. Under the
control of the signaling plane, when the calling and called MSs use the same speech
versions or compatible AMR codec set, the MGW performs coding and decoding
without using TC. Therefore, TrFO is implemented and then the voice quality is
improved. However, if the calling and called MSs use different speech versions or
incompatible AMR codec set, the TC in the MGW is required to converse speech version
under the control of the MSC-S.
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
MGW
A/IP
= Signalling
= User p lane
Nc
MSC-S
A/IP
BSS
Mc/IP
Nb
MGW
A/IP
e.g. AMR coded
e.g. AMR coded
IP based
protocol
stack
IP based
protocol
stack
= Transcoder or Transcoder-pair, typically not used in MS-to MS calls
A over IP complying with 3GPP specifications: The signaling plane and user plane
comply with the related specifications in 3GPP R8. The user plane complies with
TS43.903 and the signaling plane complies with TS48.008. The CSD coding complies
with RFC4040 and RFC2198. Theoretically, the GBSS is capable of working with the
IP-based CN devices (supplied by the competitor) that comply with 3GPP R8.
CSD service transmission redundancy in A over IP: Certain CSD services, such as the
fax service, are quite sensitive to data loss. The retransmission mechanism for such
services is usually insufficient at the application layer. Therefore, the packet loss on the
IP transmission network has great impact on such services, for example, the fax is
interrupted. This feature enables the same CSD service data block to be transmitted in
different RTP frames in A over IP, ensuring the completeness of the data and enhancing
user experience of the CSD services in A over IP. The CSD service transmission
redundancy in A over IP supports a maximum of three levels of redundancy; that is, a
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

242
maximum of two consecutive RTP frames can be discarded. The CSD service bearer in A
over IP complies with the RFC4040 specification. The CSD service transmission
redundancy in A over IP complies with the RFC2198 specification.
Voice over IP
The A interface on the user plane is placed between the BSC and the MGW and adopts
the standard RTP/UDP/IP protocol to carry user data. The A interface supports all the
following speech codec types in the existing BSS:
GSM_FR:
RFC 3551 for GSM_FR.
GSM_HR:
ETSI 101318 for GSM_HR.
GSM_EFR:
RFC 3551 for EFR.
AMR:
RFC 3267 for AMR.
The speech coding scheme on the A interface is the same as that on the Um interface
because there is no TC configured in the BSS. However, the speech codec types are
different.
BSC
MGW
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Payload
RTP
UDP
IP
MAC / PPP
Signaling over IP
The BSC supports signaling over IP on the A interface in the M3UA/Stream Control
Transmission Protocol (SCTP)/IP protocol stack. The BSC is directly connected to the
MSC server through the MTP3 User Adaptation Layer (M3UA), and the data on the
signaling plane and user plane can be transmitted through the MGW routes.
To meet the requirements of TrFO and IP transmission on the user plane, some signaling
messages at the BSSMAP is modified. At the same time, the intra-BSS switchover
procedure of speech versions is added.
The introduction of A the interface over IP has no impact on the DTAP message.
BSC
MSS
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
BSSMAP+
SCCP
M3UA
SCTP
IP
MAC / PPP
Huawei GBSS supports bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) on the Abis interface,
A interface, and Gb interface. BFD is a method of detecting IP connection failures by
received within the period of several detection intervals, the communication between the
two nodes fails. In this case, procedures such as port switchover or IP rerouting are
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

243
triggered to prevent traffic loss. The interval of BDF detection is about 100 ms, and
therefore it can be used for telecom services over IP.
Dynamic load balancing among A interface boards
Figure 4-7 Networking diagram of the A over IP Based on Dynamic Load Balancing featurec
IP1
Interface board 1
CE
IP2
IP/MPLS
Interface board 2
Core Network
IP3
Interface board 3
IP4
CE
Interface board 4
The dynamic load balancing among A interface boards supports the following functions:
Enables the BSC to automatically allocate new calls to interface boards that have lighter
loads if an interface board in the resource pool is overloaded.
Supports routing based on source IP addresses and requires no IP paths for the BSC. This
simplifies BSC configurations.
Allows the BSC to deploy signaling-plane SCTP links on two interface boards in a
resource pool by using the dual homing function. This enhances protection for the
signaling-plane transmission.
The dynamic load balancing among A interface boards can work in either of the following
modes:
Active/standby mode: In this mode, interface board reliability is high, preventing

ongoing calls from dropping when an interface board is faulty.
Independent mode: In this mode, interface board usage is high, but ongoing calls must
access the network again if an interface board is faulty.
This function requires a three-layer networking between the BSC and the MGW to ensure a
full interconnection between the MGW and all interface boards of the BSC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

244

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
The MSC and MGW must support this feature.
When the IP fault detection based on the BFD function is used, the equipment interworking
with the BSC must support the BFD.
4.3 Transmission Efficiency

4.3.1 GBFD-117705 PS Dummy Frame Compression
Availability
Summary
The PS Dummy Frame Compression feature is a bandwidth saving technology. With this
feature, the BSC compresses dummy frames in PS data packets transmitted over the Abis
interface to improve transmission efficiency and save transmission bandwidth.
Benefits
This feature improves transmission efficiency and saves transmission bandwidth in Abis over
IP mode.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

245
Description
PS services account for a small portion of services in a GSM network, and dummy blocks
account for a large portion of data blocks transmitted on PDCHs. In Abis over IP mode,
dummy frames occupy considerable transmission bandwidth, resulting in a low transmission
resource usage.
After this feature is enabled, the BSC processes dummy frames as follows:
For dummy blocks without the uplink state flag (USF), the BSC does not send dummy
frames to BTSs over the Abis interface while BTSs are still sending dummy blocks over
the Um interface.
For dummy blocks with the USF, the BSC sends dummy frames containing only the USF
to BTSs over the Abis interface. Based on the USF, the BTSs construct complete dummy
blocks and send them to MSs over the Um interface.
This feature saves Abis transmission bandwidth while ensuring proper information
transmission over the Um interface.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
4.3.2 GBFD-117702 BTS Local Switch

Availability
Summary
BTS Local Switch enables the BSC to perform speech loopbacks for a call within the BTS
coverage if the calling and called MSs are under the same BTS or the same group of BTSs.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

246
Benefits
BTS Local Switch saves transmission resources over the Abis, Ater (only in A over TDM
mode), or A (only in A over IP mode) interface. The actual transmission network determines
the interface over which transmission resources are saved.
In Abis over satellite mode, this feature reduces the delay for transmitting voice data and
improves user experience.
Description
BTS Local Switch consists of the following functions: intra-BTS local switching (single-site
local switching) and inter-BTS local switching (inter-site local switching).
Intra-BTS local switching refers to the local switching for the calling and called MSs that are
under the same BTS. Voice data for a call is looped back within a BTS without being
transmitted over the Abis interface.
When inter-BTS local switching is enabled in Abis over TDM mode, the BSC performs
speech loopbacks within a BTS group for the calling and called MSs under a group of BTSs
cascaded in chain or tree topology. When inter-BTS local switching is enabled in Abis over IP
mode, the BSC transmits voice data between two BTSs for the calling and called MSs under a
group of BTSs to which IP routes are reachable.
After a call is established, the BSC performs a local switching if it detects that the calling and
called MSs are located in the same BTS or in the coverage of a group of cascaded BTSs and
the requirements for the local switching are met.
Before performing the loopback for the local switching, if the speech coding schemes of the
two MSs are different, the BSC adjusts the two speech coding schemes to the same scheme by
enabling the two MSs to adopt the lowest speech coding capability. In this way, the speech
coding schemes and the speech coding rates of the two MSs are consistent.
igure 4-8 shows the circuit usage after BTS Local Switch is enabled. The system performs
F
speech loopbacks for both the calling and called MSs on the BTS side, and then releases the
timeslots used on the Abis and Ater interfaces.
Figure 4-8 BTS Local Switch
Um
MS a
MS b
Abis
BT 2
S
BT 3
S
BT
S
Transfer
channel loop
BS
C
Ate
r
TC
Core Network
Transfer channel
released
Huawei BTS Local Switch can be started on the basis of the prefix number or the congestion
conditions of the Abis resources or started unconditionally. For the BTS with special numbers,
this feature is unavailable.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

247
If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei, the following functions are unavailable after
BTS Local Switch is enabled: lawful interception, MSC announcement, DTMF, fax during
voice, and independent charging of BTS Local Switch.
BTS Local Switch has an impact on the speech quality. The times of speech coding and
decoding are reduced, enhancing the speech quality. In satellite transmission mode, there is no
satellite transmission delay because the speech loopback is performed. Therefore, the speech
quality is greatly improved.
BTS Local Switch and BSC Local Switch can be enabled at the same time or independently.
Enhancement
GBSS13.0
AMR Rate Adaptation under BTS Local Switch
AMR rate adaptation can be used with BTS Local Switch. Based on the AMR rate set and
protocol-specified preferred rate set of both the calling and called MSs under a BTS, the BSC
obtains a new rate adjustment threshold to select the best AMR coding scheme for both the
calling and called MSs under BTS Local Switch. If the calling MS occupies an AMR TCHF
and the called MS occupies an AMR TCHH, or if the calling MS occupies an AMR TCHH
and the called MS occupies an AMR TCHF, the MS that occupies AMR TCHH is switched to
an AMR TCHF, and then the BSC adjusts the AMR codec rate of both MSs before BTS Local
Switch is enabled.
Dependency
Lawful interception is supported by BTS Local Switch in Abis IP over FE mode only when a
UTRPc board is configured.
If the TDM transmission mode is used on the Abis interface, this feature depends on the
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis feature.
In Abis over IP mode, this feature depends on the GBFD-118601 Abis over IP and
GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1 features.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

248

GBFD-115701 TFO
GBFD-115711 EVAD
GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec
4.3.3 GBFD-117701 BSC Local Switch

Availability
Summary
BSC Local Switch enables the BSC to perform speech loopbacks for a call within the BSC if
the calling and called MSs are under the same BSC. This saves Ater transmission resources
and TC resources (only in A over TDM mode).
Benefits
In A over TDM mode, 5% to 40% transmission resources over the Ater interface can be
saved if a remote TC is configured.
If there is a large proportion of calls involved in local switching, costs on devices can be
reduced by decreasing the number of TC resources.
The transmission bandwidth saving proportion varies with the traffic model used on the live
network.
Description
Overview of BSC Local Switch

With this feature, if the calling and called MSs are under the same BSC, the speech
signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the
NSS. As shown in the following figure, BSC Local Switch saves transmission resources
of segment C. Note that BSC Local Switch is performed on the BSC side without
involving the NEs on the NSS side and the speech signals are not routed to the MSC.
The transmission resources at the D and E segments of the MSC, however, are not
released.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

249
In addition, in BSC Local Switch, the speech coding schemes of the calling and called
MSs are the same and no coding conversion is required. Therefore, the TC resources
involved in BSC Local Switch can be released, and the speech quality is improved.
Figure 4-9 BSC Local Switch
BSC Local Switch based on the Ater transmission congestion

BSC Local Switch involves the following modes:
Unconditional BSC Local Switch
BSC Local Switch based on the Ater transmission congestion
BSC Local Switch based on the prefix number
With BSC Local Switch based on the Ater transmission congestion enabled, the BSC
determines whether to perform the local switching based on the congestion of the Ater
resources to alleviate the congestion.
Speech version adjustment

When enabling BSC Local Switch, ensure that the speech coding rates of the calling and
called MSs are the same. If different speech coding rates are used, the BSC adjusts
different rates to the same rate through a forced handover. If the adjustment fails because
the calling and called MSs have no intersection of speech coding, BSC Local Switch
should not be enabled.
Inter-MGW scenario
If the calling and called MSs are served by different MGWs, the MGWs convert the user
plane protocol format. This results in the loss of the BSC identification information carried by
the speech frame. Therefore, BSC Local Switch fails to be triggered. There are two
inter-MGW scenarios:
1. In MSC pool networking mode, the calling and called MSs are served by different MGWs.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

250
2. If the roaming and local MSs in a conversation are served by different MSCs, the CN
regards that the two MSs are served by different MGWs even if the BSC is connected to only
one MGW. In this case, BSC Local Switch fails to be triggered.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
The lawful interception should be supported by Huawei MSC.
GBSS8.1
The supplementary services such as CW/HOLD/MPTY/ECT are supported.
The announcement should be supported by Huawei MSC.
The independent charging of local switching should be supported by Huawei MSC. That is,
the operators can adopt flexible charging strategies.
GBSS13.0
AMR Rate Adaptation under BSC Local Switch
AMR rate adaptation can be used with BSC Local Switch. Based on the AMR rate set and
protocol-specified preferred rate set of both the calling and called MSs under different BTSs,
the BSC obtains a new rate adjustment threshold to select the best AMR coding scheme for
both the calling and called MSs under BSC Local Switch. If the calling MS occupies an AMR
TCHF and the called MS occupies an AMR TCHH, or if the calling MS occupies an AMR
TCHH and the called MS occupies an AMR TCHF, the MS that occupies AMR TCHH is
switched to an AMR TCHF, and then the BSC adjusts the AMR codec rate of both MSs before
BSC Local Switch is enabled.
In addition, this release supports BSC Local Switch in A over IP or Ater over IP mode.
Support BSC Local Switch in Abis over IP mode
When MO and MT are both located under same BSC, the calling voice is being looped back
at Abis interface of BSC, without going through NSS side, directly through package switch to
the called side. By using Abis IP method, BSC Local Switch can save 10% to 20%
transmission resource in Ater interface, accordingly save operator's OPEX.
Dependency
In Abis over TDM mode, BSC Local Switch in compliance is mutually exclusive with the
following features:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

251
BSC Local Switch in Abis over IP mode can be used with the following features:
None
4.3.4 GBFD-118604 Abis MUX

Availability
Summary
If Abis over IP is used without any compression or multiplexing technology, the utilization of
transmission resources is low. Compared with TDM, the transmission bandwidth cannot be
saved. Therefore, a compression or multiplexing technology for saving the bandwidth must be
used in IP transmission mode.
Abis MUX is used to save the bandwidth and multiplex the packets. The BSC and the BTS
serve as transmitting end and receiving end of each other. When Abis MUX is applied, the
transmitting end multiplexes the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition. Multiple
UDP packets are multiplexed into one IP/UDP header at the transmitting end and then
demultiplexed at the receiving end to reconstruct the original data in the IP/UDP packets.
Therefore, the transmission efficiency is improved and the bandwidth is saved.
Benefits
By multiplexing and demultiplexing the IP/UDP packet, Abis MUX reduces the overhead of
each IP packet, increases the efficiency of the IP transmission, and saves the bandwidth.
Description
The speech payload in GSM is small. After the IP transmission is applied, the speech payload
that is carried in the IP/UDP packets is smaller than the IP/UDP header. Therefore, the
transmission efficiency of the speech is very low. With the multiplexing of the IP/UDP header,
the UDP packets that meet the multiplexing condition are multiplexed at the transmitting end,
and demultiplexed at the receiving end. In this way, several UDP/IP packets are multiplexed
in one UDP/IP packet; in addition, several speech packets share one IP/UDP header.
Therefore, the efficiency of link transmission is improved.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

252
Figure 4-10 shows the principle of Abis MUX.

Figure 4-10 Abis MUX
B efore
using A bis
Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech
payload A
After using
A bis Mux
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech payload
A+B
MAC
IP
UDP
Speech
payload B
Abis MUX requires the support from both the BTS and the BSC. That is, after the BSC/BTS
multiplexes UDP packets, the BSC/BTS at the peer end must be able to identify multiplexed
and non-multiplexed packets and then demultiplex packets to reconstruct the original data
according to the multiplexing protocol.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

253
4.3.5 GBFD-118612 Abis IPHC

Availability
Summary
This feature, Abis IP Header Compression (IPHC), compresses the IP/UDP header of the
packets transmitted over the Abis interface to save the transmission resources.
Benefits
This feature saves more than 30% of transmission resources occupied by typical voice
services.
This feature improves the transmission efficiency in a newly deployed network that
adopts IP over E1 transmission or in a network where TDM transmission is upgraded to
IP transmission. The transmission efficiency is improved notably especially when
high-BER transmission media, such as microwave, are used for data transmission.
Description
IPHC improves the transmission efficiency by removing redundant information from the
IP/UDP header of UDP data streams.
In IP over E1 mode, typical small packets in a standard Abis IP packet such as speech packets
occupy only 50-60% of payload. This leads to low transmission efficiency. This feature solves
the preceding problem by enabling the transmitting end to compress the IP/UDP header of
packets. The compressed packets will be parsed by the receiving end. After the compression,
one typical full-rate voice packet can be shortened from 74 bytes to 50 bytes, which saves
more than 30% of transmission resources.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

254
Dependency
The two ends where the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)/Multilink Protocol (MP) is terminated
must support IPHC.
4.4 Satellite Transmission

4.4.1 GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Availability
Summary
Satellite communication features wide coverage, fine mobility, flexible link scheduling, and
good topography adaptability. With this feature, operators can deploy BTSs to provide radio
services in mountainous regions, outlying areas, isolated islands, and other areas that are
difficult to reach by using conventional transmission.
Benefits
This feature solves the communication problems in the areas that are difficult to reach by
using conventional transmission. This feature can also be used for emergency communication.
Description
The Abis interface for common GSM equipment does not support satellite transmission
because satellite transmission encounters problems such as delay, jitter, and bit error. This
feature takes these factors into account, makes improvements in the Abis signaling processing,
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

255
voice processing, and clock processing, and uses special satellite transmission equipment to
address the drawbacks of satellite transmission.
With this feature, the voice quality of CS services can reach the normal level. However, there
is a certain delay in voice because satellite transmission delay is long.
In cells using satellite transmission over the Abis interface, Enhanced Data rates for GSM
Evolution (EDGE) services are supported.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
4.4.2 GBFD-113902 Satellite Transmission over A Interface

Availability
Summary
good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to
provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
Benefits
In the areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission, hot spots on
special occasions, or emergency conditions, this feature enables the operator to deploy
the BSS system to provide radio services.
The satellite transmission resources over the A interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

256
Description
The conventional terrestrial transmission has the problems such as small coverage, poor
topography adaptability, and poor flexibility. With this feature, the operator can deploy the
BSS system in isolated islands or small areas to share the same CN resources with other BSS
systems.
Huawei also provides the A interface monitoring function. This enables the operator to
monitor the circuit usage over the A interface based on which the operator can extend the
circuit (or add the transmission links). Therefore, the cost of the satellite link usage is
effectively reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
4.4.3 GBFD-113903 Satellite Transmission over Ater Interface

Availability
Summary
good topography adaptability. This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to
provide radio services in the areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
Benefits
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in
special geographical areas or emergency conditions.
With this feature, the BSC signaling processing unit can be deployed on the BTS side
and the TRAU unit can be configured in the CN equipment room. Therefore, the
transmission cost is reduced because the Ater interface adopts the 4:1 multiplexing
mode.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

257
The satellite transmission resources over the Ater interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Description
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide radio services in the
areas that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
With this feature, the TRAU can be configured in the CN equipment room. This enables the
circuit over the Ater interface between the BSC signaling processing unit and the TRAU to
use the 4:1 multiplexing mode. As a result, the bandwidth required by the A interface circuit is
greatly reduced and therefore the cost of using the A interface is reduced.
In addition, Huawei provides the Ater interface monitoring function. This enables the operator
to configure the bandwidth for satellite transmission over the Ater interface as required and
dynamically extend the circuit with the increase of the traffic volume. In this manner, the
circuit lease cost, the operation and maintenance cost is greatly reduced.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
4.4.4 GBFD-113905 Satellite Transmission over Gb Interface

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
Benefits
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
This feature enables the operator to deploy the BSS system to provide PS services in
special geographical areas.

258
The satellite transmission resources over the Gb interface can be shared with other
interfaces.
Description
With this feature, the operator can deploy the network to provide radio services in the areas
that are difficult to reach using conventional transmission.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
4.5 RAN Sharing

4.5.1 GBFD-118701 RAN Sharing
Availability
Summary
On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained, RAN Sharing
enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources
(including the BSC, BTS, antenna system, and transmission) in the GBSS network.
The RAN Sharing feature enables operators to share resources on the BTS basis but not on the
cell basis.Different operators can use different cells under the same BTS and each cell belongs
to only one operator.
Benefits
By sharing their GBSS equipment, operators can make full use of network resources and their
assets to decrease the CAPEX and OPEX and increase their income.The network sharing of
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

259
operators can achieve maximum network coverage and lower infant operators' entrance to the
industry, which makes operators quickly deploy networks and increase the market share. At
the meantime, operators can keep their own services and network plan.
Description
RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators. Each operator has an independent CN
(MSC and SGSN). The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system, which
implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. The primary O&M
management system communicates with network management system from different
operators using the northbound interface. Operators can set their own cell-level parameters,
activate or deactivate cell-level features, perform cell-level performance management, log
management, and alarm management. Non-cell-level parameter configuration and
performance management are implemented by the primary network management system.
The shared services in the GBSS are CS services and PS services. For processing these
services, the BSC routes them to the specific CN to which the cell belongs.
In addition, RAN Sharing supports the coexistence of shared resources and non-shared
resources in the BSS. For example, all the resources under one BTS belong to a specific
operator. Therefore, other operators cannot use these resources. The resources under other
BTSs in the GBSS can be shared by multiple operators.
The following feature shows the network architecture of RAN Sharing.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

260

GBFD-114402 Enhanced Dual-Band Network
The following M2000 feature must be activated:
WOFD-220200 RAN Sharing Management-GBSS
It is recommended that this feature be used with the RAN sharing&MOCN network design
service.
4.5.2 GBFD-118702 MOCN Shared Cell

Availability
Summary
BSS Sharing enables multiple telecom operators to share BSS equipment on a per BTS basis
while still using their respective core network (CN) equipment. A cell, however, cannot be
shared among telecom operators. That is, cells of different operators can reside under one base
station, but each cell can only belong to one telecom operator.
MOCN Shared Cell enables multiple telecom operators to share the BSS equipment on a per
cell basis while still using their respective CN equipment. That is, all the resources under a
cell can work as a resource pool and be shared among telecom operators.
Benefits
The cell-based BSS equipment sharing not only drastically improves the sharing degree of
spectrum, BSS equipment, transmission bandwidth, and network management, but also
minimizes the CAPEX of the operator.
The efficient use of GSM spectrum resources lays a firm foundation for the development of
LTE.
Description
In existing GSM networks, multiple PLMN identifiers cannot be broadcast in a cell due to
protocol limitations, and a GSM MS cannot receive multiple PLMN identifiers. Therefore,
multiple telecom operators use a common PLMN identifier in a GSM cell. The BSC selects a
CN node to serve an MS depending on the setting of the MOCN Switch parameter, which
can be set to CNSEL(CN Select) or BSCSEL(BSC Select).
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

261
In a network with the MOCN Shared Cell feature enabled, both the roaming MSs and the MSs
subscribing to different telecom operators exist. The BSC identifies the IMSI, TMSI, or
P-TMSI to determine whether an MS is a subscribing MS or a roaming MS:
If the MS is a subscribing MS, the BSC routes the MS to the CN of the telecom operator
to which the MS subscribes.
If the MS is a roaming MS, the BSC routes this MS to a specific telecom operator
according to the specified rate of distributing roaming MSs among telecom operators.
When a telecom operator is specified for an MS, the CS-domain handover area, NC2 area,
and PS-domain handover area of the MS must belong to the area permitted by the telecom
operator. After this feature is enabled, the BSC integrates this feature with other handover
decisions (such as decisions based on coverage, quality, load, or priorities) to select a target
cell for a subscribing MS or a roaming MS. Then, the BSC triggers an intra-GSM or
GSM-to-UMTS CS-domain handover, NC2, or PS-domain handover.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-117401 MSC Pool
GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool
If the MS routing is selected by the CN, the list of VLRs in which an MS is allowed to roam
needs to be configured at the HLR, or the list of LAIs in which an MS is allowed to roam
needs to be configured at the MSC server.
service.
4.5.3 GBFD-118703 IMSI-Based Handover

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

262
Summary
To meet the operator's requirements of network planning and service, the network can be
divided into multiple areas, and an MS of a specific type can move only in the specified area
to obtain services. That is, the operator can restrict the service area of an MS by configuring
the mapping between the IMSI number ranges and the network areas.
Benefits
In RAN sharing mode, one BSC is shared by multiple operators, which may have different
partner operators. An MS can be handed over only between the networks of partner operators.
In non-RAN sharing mode, MSs are provided with differentiated services based on service
areas.
Description
The operator can divide a network into multiple areas called handover shared areas at the BSC,
based on location areas. In addition, the operator configures the mapping between the IMSI
number ranges and the handover shared areas to restrict the area in which an MS can be
handed over.
During an intra-BSC handover, the BSC determines the target cell to which an MS is to be
handed over according to the IMSI number range of the MS. In this case, the target cell must
belong to the handover shared area.
During an incoming inter-BSC or incoming inter-RAT handover, the BSC determines whether
to allow the MS to access the target cell according to the IMSI number range of the MS. If the
MS is not allowed to access the target cell, the handover request is rejected. That is, the MS
cannot be handed over to this BSC.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
The Common Id and Handover Request messages sent by the MSC are required to carry
IMSI.
service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

263
4.5.4 GBFD-118704 Abis Independent Transmission

Availability
Summary
In a RAN sharing network, multiple telecom operators share a base station and associated
auxiliary devices. Cells of different telecom operators can reside under one base station, but
each cell can only belong to one telecom operator. The transmission resources under the base
station can be shared among telecom operators or exclusively used by their respective telecom
operators.
Benefits
Telecom operators flexibly deploy transmission resources, which are applicable in different
scenarios.
Description
In a RAN sharing network, base station resources are usually shared among telecom operators
to reduce Capital Expenditure (CAPEX). Base station resources include site location, power
supply, antenna system, and transmission resources.
If telecom operators have their respective transport networks and transmission resources are
not shared, the Abis interface must support independent transmission.
Each telecom operator's signaling and traffic data is carried by their own transmission
resources over the Abis interface. Only the OM link provided by a specific telecom operator
is shared among telecom operators.
In Abis over TDM transmission mode, E1 ports are not shared among telecom operators.
In Abis over IP transmission mode, logical transmission resources are not shared among
telecom operators.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

264
This feature is mutually exclusive with the following feature in GBSS15.0:

GBFD-118605 IP QOS (enhancement in GBSS15.0)
None
4.6 Security
4.6.1 GBFD-113503 A5/3 Ciphering Algorithm
Availability
Summary
This feature is used when the voice, data, and signaling of the user are transmitted over the
Um interface.
Benefits
An evident advantage of the GSM system over the analog system is that the unauthorized
users are prohibited to access the network and the data of the authorized users is
encrypted through sophisticated ciphering algorithm, ensuring the communication
security.
The ciphering algorithm is referred to as A5 algorithm, which is a 114-bit ciphering

sequence according to the GSM specifications. The GSM specifications define eight
ciphering algorithms: A5/0A5/7. With this feature, all the voice and signaling
information over the Um interface are transmitted in A5/3 ciphering mode. This ensures
the network security.
Description
For details, see the description of the A5/1 and A5/2 ciphering algorithm.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

265

None
4.6.2 GBFD-113521 A5/1 Encryption Flow Optimization

Availability
Summary
With this feature, the BTS optimizes the A5/1 ciphering algorithm to improve the network
security.
Benefits
Information security becomes increasingly important as the subscribers use MSs to browse
webpages and do business on the network. This feature aims to solve the low security
problem of the A5/1 ciphering algorithm and therefore improve the data transmission security
by optimizing the service processing procedure and increasing the complexity of network
wiretapping.
Description
With the technology development, some hacker organizations state that they can attack the
calls encrypted by the A5/1 ciphering algorithm within 30 seconds in ideal conditions.
Huawei studies the manner in which hackers attack, and prepares a scheme to enhance the
A5/1 ciphering algorithm. With this scheme, only the network software needs to be upgraded.
Therefore, hackers can attack the calls with a success rate of a maximum of only 10% within
40 successive days. In this manner, the data transmission security is greatly improved.
The ciphering procedure is optimized from the following aspects:
Fast SDCCH handover is adopted in the MS access procedure. This increases the
difficulty for an intruder to trace the calls of an MS.
The TCH timing handover is introduced to increase the difficulty for an intruder to trace
an MS.
The Hopping Sequence Number (HSN) in the Flex Training Sequence Code (TSC) and
Flex Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) differentiates one TCH from another.
Therefore, the characteristics of TCHs are different and an intruder cannot trace other
TCHs according to the characteristics of a TCH.
After the BTS sends a ciphering command, it stops sending System Information 5, 5bis,
and 5ter over the SACCH on the SDCCH.
The dummy bits are randomized.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

266
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
Randomization of SI6 padding bits: If the A5/1 ciphering algorithm is used to encrypt the call
over the Um interface, the GBSS uses random padding bits to fill the spare bits in the SI6 rest
octets IE immediately after receiving the CIPHERING MODE COMPLETE message from
the MS. The GBSS then periodically sends the new SI6 to the MS. The contents in the bit
stream of the SI6 sent before and after the call is encrypted are different. Therefore, illegal
attacks cannot break the A5/1 ciphering algorithm because they can only obtain the plain text
in the SI6 before encryption.
Dependency
GBFD-115830 VAMOS
None
4.6.3 GBFD-113524 BTS Integrated IPsec

Availability
Summary
The BTS Integrated IPsec feature encrypts data transmitted between a BTS and a BSC that are
connected over an external gateway. This ensures data confidentiality, integrity, and
non-repeated sending and provides operators a secure end-to-end network.
Benefits
This feature protects IP packets transmitted through an IP network from being intercepted or
modified, providing an end-to-end protection for user data.
Description
Internet Protocol Security (IPsec) is a protocol suite for securing IP communications. IPsec
uses the Authentication Header (AH) and Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) protocols to
provide the following functions:
Data confidentiality: Data is transmitted in ciphertext.
Data integrity: Received data is checked to ensure that it is not modified.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

267
Data source verification: The credibility of the data source is checked.
Repeated data rejection: Old or repeated packets are rejected to avoid attacks from
malicious users who repeatedly send intercepted data.
To simplify the use and management of IPsec, Internet Key Exchange (IKE) is defined and
provides the following functions to enhance bearer network security:
Performs automatic key negotiation.
Sets up and maintains security associations.
IKE supports peer-end identification by using pre-shared keys and digital certificates.
This feature is configured and maintained on the BSC. To enable this feature, the BSC must
be connected to a BTS over an external gateway.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
This feature should be used with the following feature:
GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI
None
4.6.4 GBFD-113526 BTS Supporting PKI

Availability
Summary
This feature enables an NE to automatically obtain a digital certificate authorized by the
Certificate Authority (CA) of an operator. The NE with a digital certificate can be
authenticated by the Internet Protocol Security (IPsec), IEEE 802.1X-2004 standard, or
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) protocol.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

268
Benefits
By authenticating NE identification, the Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) feature prevents
malicious users from accessing the network and therefore improves the network security. This
feature is used in conjunction with encryption technologies provided in IPsec or Secure
Socket Layer (SSL) to protect user data from being intercepted or modified.
Description
Based on Certificate Management Protocol version 2 (CMPv2), this feature provides a suite
of functions that apply to certificate management between NEs. The suite includes functions
such as certificate register request, key update, key restore, certificate revocation,
cross-certification, CA key update notification, certificate authorization notification, and
certificate revocation notification.
This feature manages the local digital certificate for a BTS based on CMPv2. Figure 4-11
shows how CMPv2 is applied in PKI.
Figure 4-11 Application of CMPv2 in PKI
During the digital certificate management process, this feature provides the following
functions:
1.
BTS entity initialization: BTS entity initialization involves importing the public key of
the root certificate and obtaining options supported by the PKI management entity.
2.
Certificate request: A certificate is authorized in the following scenarios:
Initial registration and certification
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

269
The CA or registration authority (RA) identifies a BTS before authorizing a certificate to

the BTS. If the initial registration and certification are successful, the CA uses the public
key of the BTS to authorize a certificate for it. Then, the CA sends the certificate to the
BTS or releases the certificate to the public database.
Key pair update

Each key pair is updated periodically. Each update requires a new certificate.
Certificate update
A certificated must be updated before it expires.
CA key pair update

Each CA key pair is updated periodically.
3.
Certificate revocation: The BTS revokes a certificate by sending a certificate revocation

request to the CA.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
The CA server is required.
4.7 Reliability
4.7.1 GBFD-117401 MSC Pool
Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers
belonging to one group of BSCs.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

270
Benefits
The MSCs in an MSC pool share the traffic load and resources. Therefore, this feature
provides the following benefits:
This feature increases the network capacity and saves the equipment investment.
This feature realizes the redundancy backup and therefore improves the network
reliability because the addition or deletion of an MSC does not affect the services.
This feature automatically adjusts the traffic load on an MSC and reduces the operation
and maintenance cost of operators.
The MSC pool is logically an MSC. Therefore, the number of handovers between MSCs
is reduced and the network performance is improved.
Description
With this feature, a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the
subscribers under one group of BSCs. Through the MSC pool, one BSC can be connected to
multiple MSCs simultaneously. In addition, the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the
MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. The following figure
shows the typical networking of the MSC Pool feature:
MSC 3
MSC 2
MSC 1
MSC 6
MSC 5
MSC 4
MSC 7
CS poolarea 2
CS poolarea 1
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 1
Area 2
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 5
PS poolarea 1
Area 6
RAN
node
Area 3
RAN
node
Area 7
RAN
node
Area 4
RAN
node
Area 8
PS poolarea 2
In the preceding figure, MSC 1, MSC 2, and MSC 3 form an MSC pool. All the CS services
or PS services in the BSC service areas (Area 1, Area 2, Area 5, and Area 6) are routed to the
MSC pool for further processing. The routing policies are described as follows:
Routing by network load

For the newly-registered MS, the BSC selects an MSC by using the load balancing
algorithm based on the IMSI carried in the CMP L3 message, the status of MSCs in the
MSC pool, and the available capacity. Then, the BSC directs the traffic of the MS to the
selected MSC for processing.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

271
If the MS without the SIM card initiates an emergency call, the BSC selects the MSC
based on the IMEI, the status of MSCs in the MSC pool, and the available capacity and
then directs the traffic of the MS to the selected MSC for processing.
Routing by the NRI

After the MS is registered, the MSC allocates the TMSI containing the NRI to the MS.
The NRI is used for identifying an MSC in the MSC pool. During the call processing, the
MS sends the TMSI to the network side. On receiving the TMSI, the BSC resolves the
NRI from the TMSI and then directs the traffic to the MSC based on the MSC signaling
point corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data.
With this feature, the BSCs in the pool area share a group of MSCs. If heavy traffic
hours of each BSC are different, less CN resources are required compared with the
network where the MSC Pool feature is disabled. This saves the investment in the CN
equipment.
When an MSC in the MSC pool is faulty, the traffic of the newly accessed MS is
automatically directed to another normal MSC, enhancing the network reliability. When
some maintenance operations such as software upgrade are performed on an MSC in the
MSC pool, the traffic on this MSC can be easily directed to other MSCs. After the
operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original MSC. This reduces the
service interruption duration and therefore improves the user satisfaction.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
The MSC Pool feature in case of A over IP is supported.
GBSS9.0
MSC pool measurements supported: The service requests sent to each MSC in the MSC pool
are counted on the basis of the access method (IMSI, IMEI, or TMSI) used by the MSs. This
helps the operators learn the distribution of MSs using various access methods.
Dependency
None
The NSS must support this feature.
WOFD-230100 MSC Pool Management
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

272
4.7.2 GBFD-119701 SGSN Pool

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple SGSNs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers
belonging to one group of BSCs.
Benefits
The SGSNs in an SGSN pool share the traffic load and resources. This feature provides the
following benefits:
Increases the network capacity and saves the investment on equipment.
Implements redundancy backup and therefore improves the network reliability because
the addition or deletion of an SGSN does not affect the services.
Reduces handovers between the SGSNs because the SGSNs in an SGSN pool are
logically one SGSN and therefore improves the network performance.
Description
This feature, which is similar to the MSC Pool feature, enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to
form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs.
With this feature, one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. In addition,
the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network
resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle.
CS poolarea 2
CS poolarea 1
RAN
node
RAN
node
Area 1
RAN
node
Area 2
RAN
node
Area 3
RAN
node
Area 5
SGSN 2
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Area 4
RAN
node
Area 6
RAN
node
Area 7
PS poolarea 1
SGSN 1
RAN
node
Area 8
PS poolarea 2
SGSN 3
SGSN 6
SGSN 4
SGSN 5

273
The routing policies are described as follows:
Routing by network load

When an MS accesses the network for the first time, it generates a random TLLI and
sends it to the BSC because it does not have a local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC uses
the load balancing algorithm to select an SGSN for the MS according to the status and
available capacity of the SGSNs in the pool and routes the MS to the selected SGSN.
Routing by the NRI

After an MS accesses the network for the first time, the SGSN allocates a new local
TLLI that includes the NRI information associated with this SGSN to the MS. When the
MS processes services, it sends the NRI information to the network through the
local/foreign TLLI. Then, the BSC obtains the NRI from the local/foreign TLLI and
routes the services to the SGSN corresponding to the NRI in the configuration data.
Using the SGSN pool, the BSCs in the pool share a group of SGSNs. If peak hours of
traffic on each BSC are different, less CN resources are required in comparison with the
non-SGSN pool networking. This saves the investment in the CN equipment.
When an SGSN in the SGSN pool is faulty, the new services are automatically
transferred to another normal SGSN and therefore the network reliability is enhanced.
When some maintenance operations such as software upgrade are performed on an
SGSN in the SGSN pool, the traffic on this SGSN can be easily transferred to other
SGSNs. After the operation is complete, the traffic is reallocated to the original SGSN.
This reduces the service interruption duration and therefore improves the user
satisfaction.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The SGSN must support this feature.
WOFD-230700 SGSN Pool Management
4.7.3 GBFD-116601 Abis Bypass

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

274
Summary
In the case of chain topology, when the power supply to a BTS fails, this feature can bypass
this BTS (that is, this BTS is used only as the path) so that the signals of the lower-level BTSs
can be sent to the BSC.
Benefits
Chain topology is the main topology among the current networking modes. In the chain
topology, if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails, the transmission of the lower-level
BTSs cannot proceed properly. With this feature, the lower-level BTSs can work properly
even if the power supply to the upper-level BTS fails. Therefore, this feature provides higher
reliability for the network in the chain topology, especially in the areas where the power
supply fails frequently.
Description
To improve the working capability of the BSS system in the areas where the power supply
fails frequently, Huawei BTS provides the Abis Bypass feature. This feature is applicable in
the case of chain topology. When the power supply to a BTS fails, the BTS automatically
bypasses the Abis interface so that the lower-level BTSs in the chain network can work
properly. When the power supply is recovered, the BTS and the lower-level BTSs are reset
automatically.
Enhancement
In GBSS8.1, this feature is supported from the 3900 series base stations.
Dependency
GBFD-117301 Flex Abis(in TDM network, this feature is exclusive the Flex Abis feature only
when the Ring Topology feature is enabled)
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

275
4.7.4 GBFD-117803 Abis Transmission Backup

Availability
Summary
This feature applies to Abis over TDM or Abis over IP mode to improve network reliability.
In Abis over TDM mode, this feature switches services to standby satellite transmission links
if terrestrial TDM transmission links over the Abis interface become faulty due to an
exception caused by a natural disaster.
In Abis over IP mode, this feature allows users to configure two transmission links over the
Abis interface: an IP over E1 transmission link based on the existing TDM or SDH network
and an IP over FE transmission link based on the IP network.
Benefits
This feature improves the reliability of the Abis interface when TDM transmission or IP over
FE transmission is applied over the Abis interface.
Description
During a natural disaster, GBSS devices sometimes work properly; however, the GSM
network cannot provide services because of terrestrial transmission interruption. With this
feature, the standby satellite transmission links can be used for communication between the
BSC and the BTS so that GSM devices can provide services in emergency conditions.
When this feature is enabled, satellite transmission links are used as backup for terrestrial
transmission links. When a terrestrial transmission link is faulty, the GBSS automatically uses
a satellite transmission link, and the BTS is connected to the BSC using the satellite
transmission link. When the terrestrial transmission link recovers, the transmission link must
be manually switched back. When a satellite transmission link is in the standby state, no data
is transmitted, saving the satellite transmission bandwidth.
With this feature, no information is transmitted over the standby satellite transmission links.
This saves satellite link bandwidth.
The satellite transmission link switchover applies only to the Abis over TDM mode.
Enhancement
GBSS14.0
Standby Abis transmission links
In Abis over IP mode, this feature allows users to configure two transmission links over the
Abis interface: an IP over E1 transmission link based on the existing TDM or SDH network
and an IP over FE transmission link based on the IP network.
The two transmission links over the Abis interface work in active/standby mode, and services
are carried only on the active transmission link in normal conditions. The active transmission
link uses Link Access Procedure on the D channel (LAPD) detection and the standby
transmission link uses User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Ping detection. If the active
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

276
transmission link becomes faulty, the GBSS automatically switches all services over the Abis
interface to the standby transmission link. Services are interrupted for less than 1 minute
during the switchover. When the original active transmission link recovers, the GBSS
automatically switches all services back to it. If the standby transmission link becomes faulty,
services are not switched over but an alarm is reported, notifying that the standby
transmission link is faulty.
Standby Abis transmission links apply only when one transmission mode (IP over FE or IP
over E1) is used between the BTS and the BSC. Standby Abis transmission links do not apply
when the transmission mode is changed by a router over the bearer network. For example, the
transmission mode is changed from IP over E1 to IP over FE.
GBSS15.0
The Abis Transmission Backup feature supports eGBTS.
Compared with the GBTS, the eGBTS is different in network architecture and transmission
protocol stack used by the Abis interface. That is, the eGBTS is managed by the M2000. The
control plane of the Abis interface uses the Signaling Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP)
while the management plane uses Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Different backup schemes are provided for user plane, control plane, and management plane
during the implementation of the Abis Transmission Backup feature:
User plane: The active and standby IP paths are established between the BTS and the
BSC and carried on the Ethernet and E1/T1 links. The redundancy backup for the user
plane of the Abis interface is implemented based on the ping detection mechanism.
Control plane: The BTS and BSC support the SCTP multihoming function, and the SCTP
links are carried on the Ethernet and E1/T1 links. The redundancy backup for the control
plane is implemented based on the heartbeat detection and data expiry mechanism
defined in the SCTP.
Management plane: The active and standby O&M channels are established between the
BTS and the M2000 and carried on the Ethernet and E1/T1 links. By detecting the
channel status on the user plane between the BTS and the BSC, the BTS can switch over
the active and standby O&M channels, implementing the redundancy backup for the
management plane.
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

277

Satellite transmission link switchover depends on the following features:
GBFD-113901 Satellite Transmission over Abis Interface
Abis transmission link backup depends on the following features:
The feature enhancement in GBSS15.0 is mutually exclusive with the following feature when
the eGBTS is used:
GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy
None
4.7.5 GBFD-113725 BSC Node Redundancy

Availability
Summary
The BSC Node Redundancy feature improves the reliability and robustness of the network by
providing the 1+1 backup on the BSC level.
Benefits
The BSC Node Redundancy feature improves the reliability and robustness of the GSM
network, reduces the duration of service interruption caused by a single-point fault, and
therefore improves the service quality.
Description
The BSC controls the radio resources of every BTS. Once the BSC is faulty, all the BTSs
controlled by this BSC cannot access the network and the connection cannot be set up in the
coverage area of this BSC. In addition, the fault on the communication link between the BSC
and the BTS will hamper the functioning of the BSC. As a result, the network in this coverage
area of the BTS may break down.
The BSC Node Redundancy feature provides the backup scheme on the BSC level to avoid
the previous problems. The BSC supports the 1+1 backup mode. The principles of 1+1
backup are as follows:
A BTS is configured with two sets of transmission links, which are connected to the main
BSC and sub-BSCs respectively. All the data concerning the BTS, cell, neighboring cell is
backed up on the main BSC and sub-BSCs. The BTSs are generally controlled by the main
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

278
BSC. Once the main BSC is faulty, the BTS attempts to connect to the sub-BSC and continues
to provide services.
In this manner, a BTS has two sets of Abis interfaces (including two sets of control plane links,
user plane links, and OM links). In addition, two control BSCs are available to implement
cold backup (calls are not protected). Therefore, the system reliability is improved. The main
and sub-BSCs do not work in active/standby mode. In normal cases, they are both in
operation state, therefore the equipment can obtain maximal efficiency. If one BSC is faulty,
the other one can take over all the BTSs under the faulty BSC to prevent the BTSs from being
out of service and therefore avoid single-point faults on the BSC level. When one BSC
becomes faulty, the overall service processing capability (including CS Erlang and PS
throughput) of the pair of BSCs in 1+1 backup mode is decreased.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-118601 Abis over IP or GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1
GBFD-118602 A over IP, GBFD-118622 A IP over E1/T1, or GBFD-150201 A over IP Based
on Dynamic Load Balancing
GBFD-115301 Local Multiple Signaling Points
WOFD-231100 BSC Redundancy ManagementGBSS
4.7.6 GBFD-113726 TC POOL

Availability
Summary
With this feature, multiple BSCs share the same TC resources in the TC pool. This increases
the efficiency of the codec hardware.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

279
Benefits
The efficiency of the codec hardware is increased because multiple BSCs share the same
resources in one TC pool. For the small-capacity BSC, 20% to 30% TC codec resources
can be saved.
Saving room is possible. For example, three small-capacity GTCSs require three cabinets.
In TC pool mode, three GTCSs require only one cabinet. In this manner, 40% to 60%
area in the equipment room can be saved.
Description
In general, one GTCS belongs to only one BSC and is used to process the CS services of this
BSC. The GTCSs in different BSCs are not associated with each other. In this kind of network
topology, the TC resources cannot be multiplexed among multiple BSCs. In the scenario
where multiple BSCs with small capacity are grouped into a network, the TC resources are
greatly wasted.
In TC pool mode, multiple BSCs share a TC pool of large capacity. The typical network
topology is shown in the following figure.
Abis
BSC1 (main BSC)
MSC1
Ater
E1/ST
M
BSC3(sub BSC)
TM
-1
E1
/ST
M1
E1
/S
BSC2(sub BSC)
-1
TC(Pool)
MSC2
E1/STM-1
-1
E1/STM
TM
-1
TM
/S
E1
/S
E1
MSC3
BSC4(sub BSC)
The TC pool adapts to the mode that the GTCS is separated from the BSC cabinet and is
connected to the BSC on the Ater interface. The codec resources in the TC pool are shared by
the main BSC and sub-BSCs, which work in load sharing mode. When a voice processing
board is faulty, it will out of service automatically. In this manner, the subsequent CS services
are not affected, which improves the system reliability. The speech versions supported by the
TC pool are FR, EFR, HR, AMR-FR, and AMR-HR.
To synchronize the clock of the GSM network, the main BSC and sub-BSCs in a TC pool
should use the same clock source. In addition, a BSC can be connected to only one TC pool.
One TC pool supports a maximum of 16 BSCs.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

280
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-116902 Ater Compression Transmission
None
4.7.7 GBFD-113728 OML Backup

Availability
Summary
This feature supports configuration of the OMLs on two independent E1s. In this case, only
one OML works at one time. When the OML in working mode is faulty, the BTS uses another
OML. In this way, the BTS can work without being out of service.
Benefits
This feature provides better robustness for the BTS. When the OML is broken because the
transmission links are faulty, this feature ensures that the BTS is not reset and the cell is not
out of service.
Compared with the ring topology that requires twice the amount of resources, this feature
requires only a few timeslots. In addition, configuration of the OML on two E1s can ensure
the stable operation of the BTS system with a little consumption of the transmission
resources.
Description
The OML is the operation and maintenance link between the BSC and the BTS. When the
OML is faulty, the entire BTS cannot work. With this feature, two OMLs can be configured
on two independent E1s. When the OML in working mode is faulty, the BTS uses another
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

281
OML. Therefore, the BTS and cell can continue to work without being out of service due to
transmission fault or port fault.
When this feature is used, the BSC configures one OML on port 0 and another OML on port 1.
After the BTS is reset, it attempts to establish links on the two ports in turn. If the BTS
establishes the OML on one port, it always uses the OML on this port unless the BTS is reset
or the OML is broken. When the established OML is broken, the BTS attempts to establish an
OML on another port. If the establishment is successful, the BSC triggers the OML
switchover.
After the OML switchover, the RSL, TCH, idle timeslot, and monitoring timeslot are not
switched over. That is, for port 0 and port 1, if the transmission link or port where the working
OML is located is faulty, all the TRX channels, idle timeslots, and monitoring timeslots
become unavailable. The normal port, however, can continue to provide services. Therefore,
the BTS and cell can continue to work without being out of service.
The OM personnel can use the MML command to enable this feature.
This feature is supported by the BTS in TDM and HDLC modes. This feature is not supported
by the BTS in IP mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The BTS must support this feature
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

282
5 O&M
O&M
5.1 Power Saving

5.1.1 GBFD-117602 Active Power Control
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after
an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed.
Then, the network informs the MS of the calculated uplink power. The BTS and the MS
transmit signals at proper power. Therefore, power control is performed immediately.
Benefits
The power control of both the BTS and the MS reduces the system interference and improves
the service quality. In addition, as the power consumption of the BTS and MS is reduced,
energy is saved, and the MS service time is prolonged.
Description
With this feature, the uplink power and the downlink power are calculated immediately after
an MS successfully accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is successfully performed.
Then, the network informs the MS of the calculated uplink power. The BTS and the MS
transmit signals at proper power. Therefore, power control is performed immediately.
Active power control during MS access

When an MS accesses the network, the following power control procedures are
performed:
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Calculation of the path loss: According to 3GPP TS 45.005, the path loss is obtained
on the basis of the transmit power used by the MS during network access and the
uplink signal strength measured by the BTS.
Calculation of the transmit power: The transmit power of the MS and the BTS is
obtained on the basis of the path loss and the expected uplink and downlink signal
strength.

283
5 O&M
Execution of power control: Power control is performed immediately when the TCH
request is successful or when the MS accesses the network. This enables the BTS and
the MS to immediately transmit signals at proper power.
Active power control during an intra-BSC handover

During an intra-BSC handover, the path loss is obtained on the basis of the BCCH signal
strength of the target cell recorded by the source cell before the handover and the
transmit power of the BCCH TRX of the target cell.
The calculation of the transmit power and the execution of power control procedures are
the same as those of active power control during MS access.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
5.1.2 GBFD-111602 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

Availability
Summary
In the existing network, the cells are not busy all the time. When some cells are idle, some
TRXs can meet the current traffic requirements. In this case, you can disable the idle TRXs to
reduce the BTS power consumption and the operational expenditure of operators.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the BTS power consumption and therefore greatly reduces the
operational expenditure. The power consumption of TRXs constitutes a major part of the
power consumption of BTSs. In the existing network, however, the TRXs are not always
working. With this feature, the power amplifiers of some idle TRXs are shut down to reduce
the power consumption of the BTS and power costs of operators.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

284
5 O&M
Description
The TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown feature can be enabled in a specific period.
Idle TRXs can be shut down based on the prediction of traffic load and traffic volume to save
energy. Alternatively, the power amplifiers of the disabled TRXs can be switched on to ensure
that these TRXs are available for use at any time. Before shutting down a TRX, the BSC
initiates an intra-cell handover for the calls on the TRX and then instructs the BTS to shut
down the TRX when there is no call on the TRX. If some calls on the TRX cannot be handed
over to other TRXs, the BSC does not instruct the BTS to shut down the TRX.
Generally, the channel allocation optimization measure is used with this feature. That is,
channels are allocated to some centralized TRXs during the channel allocation. The channels
on the BCCH TRX are preferentially allocated to reduce the channel usage on the non-BCCH
TRX, reducing the power consumption of the BTS. In addition, the BTS allocates channels
based on the priorities of TRXs. That is, the channels are preferentially allocated to TRXs
with high priorities. In this way, the BSC centralizes busy channels on a few TRXs so that as
many idle TRXs as possible can be shut down.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (baseband hopping) when a frequency hopping group is
involved in baseband hopping
GBFD-113701 Frequency Hopping (RF hopping) when inter-module RF hopping is applied
GBFD-113703 Antenna Frequency Hopping (in only GBSS9.0 and former version)
GBFD-115901 PBT(Power Boost Technology)
None
It is recommended that this feature be used with the GSM power saving service.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

285
5 O&M
5.1.3 GBFD-111603 TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown

on Timeslot Level
Availability
Summary
The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the TRX power consumption,
which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. The TRX Power Amplifier
Intelligent Shutdown on Timeslot Level feature reduces the static power consumption by
controlling the power amplifier on timeslot level to make the idle timeslots consume no
power.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of the BTS and therefore greatly reduces the
operational expenditure. The power amplifier consumption constitutes a major part of the
TRX power consumption, which constitutes a major part of the BTS power consumption. In
the existing network, however, not all the timeslots are always working. With this feature, the
power amplifiers consume no power when the timeslots are idle, greatly reducing the power
costs of operators.
Description
The power amplifier is an important device used for transmitting power to the antenna system.
The power consumption of the power amplifier consists of static power consumption and
dynamic power consumption. The linear-shaped power amplifier requires a constant offset
voltage to enable power transmission at any time even when it does not transmit power. The
power consumption corresponding to the fixed offset voltage is called static power
consumption. The dynamic power consumption, however, refers to the power consumption
produced only when the power amplifier is processing services. The dynamic power
consumption increases with the output power of the TRX. When the power amplifier does not
process services, the dynamic power consumption is zero. In the industry, the static power
amplifier can be shut down only when all the TRXs process no service. When the dynamic
power consumption is zero, the power amplifier is shut down. Therefore, the total power
consumption of the power amplifier is zero.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

286
5 O&M
None
None
5.1.4 GBFD-111605 Active Backup Power Control

Availability
Summary
The Active Backup Power Control feature takes different measures to prolong the service time
of the BTS in case of mains power cut due to power off, snow disaster, and earthquake,
ensuring sufficient time for repairing the equipment and improving the network robustness.
Benefits
When the external power supply of the BTS is interrupted, this feature provides various
choices for operators to meet different requirements. For a configured BTS, the coverage
preferred strategy ensures sufficient coverage, the capacity preferred strategy ensures high
traffic capability, and the backup power time preferred strategy prolongs the service time and
provides diverse services. This greatly improves the service quality for operators.
Description
When the external power supply of the BTS is interrupted, a power-off alarm is generated on
the BTS. The BTS then uses the batteries to supply power. To save the backup power, the BTS
automatically shuts down some TRXs under the control of the timer and then gradually
reduces the TRX transmit power with a certain step until the BTS is powered off. When the
external power supply of the BTS recovers, the previously disabled TRXs are enabled and all
TRXs transmit at the normal power.
The Active Backup Power Control feature takes into account the coverage, capacity, and
backup power time. Therefore, three modes can be configured: coverage preferred, capacity
preferred, and backup power time preferred.
Coverage preferred: Shut down some TRXs and then gradually reduce the transmit
power of the remaining TRXs.
Capacity preferred: Gradually reduce the transmit power of all TRXs and then shut down
some TRXs.
Backup power time preferred: Shut down some TRXs and at the same time reduce the
transmit power of the remaining TRXs.
This feature reduces the coverage of a cell gradually and therefore the MSs at the edge of the
cell are gradually handed over to the neighboring cells. Therefore, this feature has no negative
impact on the network performance.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

287
5 O&M
Enhancement
GBSS 15.0
This enhancement enables the BTS to support non-Huawei wireless power, which is capable
of sending a mains power failure alarm to the BTS based on the Boolean. After identifying the
mains power failure alarm, the BTS starts the active backup power control.
Dependency
None
None
5.1.5 GBFD-111606 Power Optimization Based on Channel Type

Availability
Summary
Huawei GBTS equipment supports two modulation modes: 8PSK and GMSK. The working
voltage of the power amplifier varies with the modulation modes. When the 8PSK modulation
mode is changed to GMSK, the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature
accordingly adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to reduce the power
consumption of the TRX.
Benefits
This feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier based on the working mode of
MSs. The flexible adjustment of the working mode ensures that the BTS always works in
optimal state while maintaining the service quality. This minimizes the power consumption
and saves the power.
Description
The Power Optimization Based on Channel Type feature involves two functions: dynamic
voltage adjustment and dynamic PDCH voltage adjustment.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

288
5 O&M
The dynamic voltage adjustment provides different working voltages for the power amplifier
based on the modulation mode. If all channels on the TRX are configured as TCHs, the TRX
works in GMSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required in
GMSK mode. If some channels on the TRX are configured as dynamic or static PDCHs, the
TRX works in 8PSK mode and the BTS provides the TRX with the working voltage required
in 8PSK mode. In this way, the feature reduces the power consumption.
As the GPRS traffic increases, an increasing number of dynamic PDCHs are configured on
the TRX. When no data service is processed and a great number of speech services are
processed on a TRX, the dynamic PDCHs are converted into TCHs to provide speech services.
According to the dynamic voltage adjustment function, the 8PSK mode is adopted on the
TRX because the TRX is configured with dynamic PDCHs. In this way, the voltage is
adjusted to a very high value, increasing the power consumption. The dynamic PDCH voltage
adjustment function, however, can detect the channel status on the TRX. When all dynamic
PDCHs are converted into TCHs, the voltage adjustment function is enabled to provide the
working voltage required in GMSK mode. If the TCHs are converted back into PDCHs, the
working voltage required in 8PSK is applied again.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

289
5 O&M
5.1.6 GBFD-111608 PSU Smart Control

Availability
Summary
The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant
PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of
the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
Benefits
When the load is not heavy, the power system works with low efficiency, reducing the service
time of the power conversion modules. This feature flexibly adjusts the power supply
capability as required by controlling the number of working PSUs in real time. This avoids
the case that the power conversion equipment works under light load and prolongs the
working time of the equipment, reducing the costs of operation and maintenance.
Description
In certain BTS application scenarios, when the external power supply cannot provide the
working voltage of 48 V DC required by the BTS, the BTS power system should be added to
perform the power conversion such as conversion from 220 V AC to 48 V DC. The power
system consists of the PMU and PSUs. The PMU is responsible for the management of the
PSUs and the communication between the PSUs and the BTS. The PSUs are responsible for
power conversion.
In Huawei system, the PSUs are configured in N+1 mode according to the possible maximum
power consumption of the BTS. Generally, the power consumption of the BTS is lower than
its possible maximum power consumption. Therefore, the PSUs are usually in light load state.
This results in low efficiency of power conversion and shortens the service time of PSUs.
The PSU Smart Control feature switches on the required PSUs and shuts down the redundant
PSUs based on the required power consumption of the BTS. This improves the efficiency of
the power system and prolongs the service time of the power system.
For MBTS scenario, because MBTS of GSM, UMTS and LTE are sharing one PMU, only one
license of GSM, UMTS and LTE is required for MBTS, but if the corresponding network is
down, this function will be deactivated for MBTS.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

290
5 O&M

None
None
5.1.7 GBFD-111609 Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption

Optimization
Availability
Summary
The Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption feature reduces the power consumption of the BTS
by reducing the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
Benefits
The overall power consumption of the BTS is a major concern for operators.
This feature reduces the overall power consumption of the BTS and therefore saves the
power cost of operators.
This feature reduces the intra-network interference by reducing the transmit power to
enable the tighter frequency reuse.
Description
When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX are idle, this feature supports the
configuration of the transmit power of these timeslots.
When the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX are occupied, this feature supports the
power control on these timeslots. The power control range can be configured on the LMT.
This feature may affect the accuracy of measuring neighboring cells by the MS. Therefore, it
is recommended that this feature be enabled during low traffic hours at night.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

291
5 O&M

None
None
5.1.8 GBFD-111610 Dynamic Cell Power Off

Availability
Summary
The Dynamic Cell Power Off feature is used generally in a 900 MHz/1800 MHz dual-band
network.
In a specified period, if the traffic is low and a 900 MHz cell can carry all the traffic in the
coverage area of an 1800 MHz cell, then the 1800 MHz cell can be powered off to reduce the
power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
By powering off the idle network devices in low traffic hours, the consumption of resources
can be reduced. This also reduces the operational expenditure of the operators.
Description
The Dynamic Cell Power Off feature means that within a specified period, the cells in the 900
MHz/1800 MHz dual-band network are dynamically powered off on the basis of the network
traffic load. 900 MHz cells refer to the cells working on the 900 MHz or 850 MHz frequency
band, and 1800 MHz cells refer to the cells working on the 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz
frequency band. If the coverage area of an 1800 MHz cell is within the coverage area of a 900
MHz cell and no blind zone exists, then the 900 MHz cell is referred to as the same-coverage
cell of the 1800 MHz cell. Only 1800 MHz cell with same-coverage cells can be powered off.
When a cell meets the condition of dynamic cell power-off, the BSC hands over the MSs with
ongoing services to other cells. After the same-coverage cell is powered off, the BSC
periodically detects the load in the cell. When the load in the cell is constantly higher than the
cell load threshold, the cell is powered on again.
Cells are powered off dynamically based on cell configurations. Because dynamic cell
power-off affects network capacity, cells should be powered off only in specified periods of
low traffic, such as 00:00 to 6:00 in the morning. Cells cannot be powered off in other periods
so that the traffic absorption requirement is met.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

292
5 O&M
High Traffic
Low Traffic
Cell_A
900M
Cell_A
900M
Cell_B
closed
Cell_B
1800M
MS_A
MS_C
MS_B
MS_B
Enhancement
None
Dependency
GBFD-114401 Multi-band Sharing One BSC
None
5.1.9 GBFD-111611 TRX Working Voltage Adjustment

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

293
5 O&M
Summary
The TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power consumption.
The working voltage of the TRX is a major factor that affects the TRX power consumption.
Hence, to lower the TRX power consumption, the TRX should work under a suitable voltage
to ensure an efficient output power.
Benefits
Reduction in the TRX power consumption plays a key role in saving energy in a BTS system
because the TRX power consumption accounts for a large proportion of the BTS power
consumption. When the function of "TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" is enabled, the
efficiency of the output power of the TRX can be maintained, which helps reduce the
investment in power made by network operators on the base station equipment.
Description
The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output
power of the TRX. In actual application, however, the maximum output power of the TRX is
not always required. In this case, if the TRX still works under such a high voltage, extra
power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output
power. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX, Huawei developed the function of
"TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX
working voltage according to the output power. For example, in the DTRU that works under
different output powers of 40 W and 60 W, this function supports the intelligent adjustment.
In addition, this function supports the intelligent adjustment of the Power Amplifier (PA)
working voltage based on different power levels to reduce the TRX power consumption.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

294
5 O&M
5.1.10 GBFD-111612 Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage

Regulation
Availability
Summary
With this feature, the working voltage of the power amplifier of the multi-transceiver module
can be timely adjusted on the basis of its output power. This improves the working efficiency
of the power amplifier and reduces the power consumption of the BTS.
Benefits
With the advanced design structure applied, the multi-transceiver RF module of the 3900
series base station provides the operators with the benefits such as simplified configuration,
small space, and easy capacity expansion. When this feature is enabled, the multi-transceiver
RF module of the 3900 series base station can properly configure the working status of the
power amplifier and reduce the operation expenditure for operators without affecting the
network coverage.
Description
The power consumption of the TRX is a major part of the power consumption of the BTS.
The power consumption of the TRX is related to factors such as the number of actually
working TRXs, the traffic volume, output power, and working mode.
All the carriers in the multi-transceiver module share one power amplifier. When many MSs
access the same carrier, the output power of the carrier varies with the distance between the
MS and the BTS. From the perspective of the total output power of the multi-transceiver
module, in most cases, the output power is lower than the maximum output power of the
power amplifier. The power amplifier works most efficiently when it transmits at the
maximum power. The reduction of the output power affects the efficiency to some extent. The
flexible adjustment of working voltage of the power amplifier helps improve the working
efficiency of the power amplifier.
This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. When the total
output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period, this feature
adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a smaller value according to the related
algorithm. In this way, the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power
reduces, reducing the power consumption of the TRX.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

295
5 O&M

None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

296
5 O&M
5.2 PICO Management

5.2.1 GBFD-510601 PICO Automatic Configuration and Planning
Availability
Summary
The pico base station refers to BTS3900B. After the BTS3900B is installed and powered on, it
can connect to the BSC automatically with the network automatic detection function.
Operators do not need to configure radio parameters for cells. The M2000 obtains radio
parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results of the uplink and downlink level of
surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS3900B, and then performs the automatic
configuration and planning of the BTS3900B.
Benefits
Helps operators to rapidly deploy the network and flexibly adjust the network layout.
Reduces the workload of manual configuration.
Description
The BTS3900B is a new-generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and
light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. This feature provides
simple and easy installation of the BTS3900B for operators.
After being equipped with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900B automatically performs
the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is
complete, the BTS3900B automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission
and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the
BTS3900B reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the
available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequency bands
and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900B, and then sends the basic
parameters (including frequencies, BSIC, and CGI) to the BSC. After the basic parameters are
configured, the BTS3900B can work properly and process services.
After continued network operation, you can manually initiate the automatic planning
procedure of the BTS3900B using the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a
few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore,
the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any
exception during automatic planning.
Enhancement
None
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

297
5 O&M
Dependency
None
WOFD-180800 Pico BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS
5.2.2 GBFD-510602 PICO Synchronization

Availability
Summary
The pico base station is BTS3900B. The BTS3900B implements the frequency
synchronization on the Um interface by demodulating the signals on the frequency correction
channel (FCCH) and synchronization channel (SCH) on the main BCCH in the surrounding
macro BTSs and then adjusting the frequency offset.
Benefits
With this feature, operators need to provide neither the external clock source nor the GPS
hardware for frequency synchronization, saving the cost of deploying sites and O&M cost.
Description
In the GSM network, the frequencies must be synchronized on the Um interface among BTSs.
Otherwise, the network quality is affected. For example, the handover success rate drops. At
present, four solutions are employed to implement frequency synchronization on the Um
interface: external BITS clock, IPCLK, upper-level BSC clock, and GPS clock. All these four
solutions require the external clock source or the GPS hardware, and therefore are not
applicable to the indoor BTS3900B.
This feature, however, can implement frequency synchronization on the Um interface
between the pico base station and the surrounding macro BTSs by using software to provide
the 13 MHz synchronization clock.
The BTS3900B applies for frequencies of neighboring cells for synchronization and
modulates the FCCH and SCH to select a target frequency. Then, the BTS3900B calculates
the frequency offset to the target frequency and corrects its frequency to achieve frequency
synchronization on the Um interface.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

298
5 O&M
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
5.2.3 GBFD-510603 PICO Dual-band Auto-planning

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. Dual-band automatic planning is an extension of the
existing single-band automatic planning. The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature supports
automatic planning of the frequencies on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands or on
the 850 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency bands.
Benefits
The PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature enables more flexible and high-quality network
planning. Therefore, the site construction workload and the maintenance cost are reduced.
Description
After the PICO Dual-band Auto-planning feature is introduced, the BTS3900B supports not
only single-band automatic planning but also automatic planning of the frequencies on the
900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands or on the 850 MHz and 1900 MHz frequency
bands.
The BTS3900B scans the uplink and downlink frequencies specified by the operator and then
reports the frequency scanning result to the M2000. Based on the frequency scanning result,
the M2000 evaluates the interference to each frequency. The M2000 then considers the
neighboring relationships of the surrounding base stations to select the frequency with the
minimum interference as the working frequency of the BTS3900B.
The BTS3900B supports three frequency planning modes. The operator can select a proper
mode according to the actual conditions.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

299
5 O&M
1. Co-BCCH dual-band cell mode: The M2000 allocates the BCCH frequency on the low
frequency band, for example, the 900 MHz or 850 MHz frequency band, and then allocates a
TCH frequency on the low or high frequency band.
2. Band adaptive selection mode: Based on the dual-band frequency scanning result reported
by the BTS3900B, the M2000 selects the frequency with the minimum interference as the
working frequency. The frequency band of the selected frequency becomes the working band
of the BTS3900B. That is, the M2000 configures the BTS3900B as a single-band cell on the
working band.
3. Specified band mode: The BTS3900B scans the frequencies on the two frequency bands
and then reports the frequency scanning result to the M2000. The M2000 selects the working
frequency only from the specified frequency band. The M2000 then configures the
BTS3900B as a single-band cell on the specified frequency band.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
Only the BTS3900B supports this feature.
None
WOFD-180800 Pico BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS
5.2.4 GBFD-510605 PICO Access Control List (ACL)

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. The BTS3900B filters out illegal packets at the
receiving ports after packet analysis so that these packets do not enter the BTS3900B. In this
manner, the robustness and anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B are improved.
Benefits
The anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B in an IP transport network is improved.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

300
5 O&M
Description
In IP transmission mode, the BTS3900B can use an existing public IP transport network to
transmit data. Compared with a private transport network, the public transport network has
greater security vulnerabilities and is more vulnerable to hacker attack.
The ports of the BTS3900B can filter the received packets. These ports receive and process
only the ARP, DHCP, DNS, ISAKMP (IKE), ESP, TCP, and ICMP packets but discard the
packets of other types. The BTS3900B filters out illegal packets so that they do not enter the
BTS3900B. Therefore, the CPU usage of the BTS3900B is reduced. To some extent, the
stability and the anti-attack capability of the BTS3900B are also improved.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
5.2.5 GBFD-510606 PICO Sleeping Mode

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. In the specified period, the TRX power amplifiers of the
cell under a BTS3900B can be shut down to reduce power consumption.
Benefits
Power consumption is reduced by shutting down network devices during the period when
there is no traffic. Therefore, the OPEX is cut down.
Description
The BTS3900B is an industry-leading compact PICO base station. It features small size,
flexible site selection, and easy installation, enabling fast and cost-effective blind-spot
coverage. In some temporary blind-spot coverage areas, such as office areas, temporary
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

301
5 O&M
meeting rooms, temporary exhibition halls, and warehouses, wireless communication services
are not required in the period when there is no traffic, for example, at night.
With the PICO Sleeping Mode feature, the cell under the BTS3900B can be shut down in the
specified period to reduce power consumption. The operator can specify the period during
which a PICO cell is shut down, for example, between 0:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. During this
period, the power amplifiers of all the TRXs (including the BCCH TRX) in the cell are shut
down. In PICO sleeping mode, wireless communication services are unavailable within the
coverage area of the PICO cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The M2000 must support this feature.
5.2.6 GBFD-510607 PICO Automatic Optimization

Availability
Summary
A BTS3900B is a PICO base station. If the working frequency of an operational BTS3900B is
severely interfered, the BTS3900B can perform automatic frequency planning under the
control of the M2000.
Benefits
After this feature is introduced, the BTS3900B automatically improves the network QoS
when its working frequency is interfered. In this manner, the network optimization workload
and the maintenance cost are reduced.
Description
The M2000 periodically analyzes the uplink and downlink interference-related traffic
statistics of the BTS3900B. When the working frequency of the BTS3900B is found severely
interfered, the M2000 instructs the BTS3900B to restart uplink and downlink frequency
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

302
5 O&M
scanning. Based on the frequency scanning result, the M2000 selects the frequency with the
minimum interference as the working frequency of the BTS3900B.
Through automatic optimization of the working frequency, the BTS3900B avoids using the
frequency with severe interference so that the speech quality and traffic KPIs in the coverage
area are improved significantly. Accordingly, in the coverage area, the handover success rate
increases whereas the call drop rate decreases.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
WOFD-170100 Pico BTS Frequency Automatic Optimizing-GBSS
5.2.7 GBFD-510608 PICO Transceiver Redundancy

Availability
Introduction
A BTS3900B supports a maximum of two transceivers (TRXs). Usually, one TRX operates
and the other TRX is idle. After this feature is introduced, one TRX automatically starts
operating if the other TRX malfunctions.
Benefits
Reduced out-of-service duration
Decreased OM workload
Description
When one TRX configured for a BTS3900B malfunctions, the BTS3900B is reset
automatically. After the BTS3900B restarts, it reconfigures the data on the other TRX. Then,
the BTS3900B starts operating again.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

303
5 O&M
This type of switchover also can be performed manually in remote mode.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
None
5.3 Micro Management

5.3.1 GBFD-111613 Weather Adaptive Power Management
Availability
Summary
This feature checks the strength of solar radiation and estimates the power consumption of a
site using solar energy as its power supply. Based on the checking and estimation results, the
energy consumption behavior, serving time, and service quality of the site can be determined.
This feature helps prolong the serving time of the site and minimize the possibility of the site
running out of power, while ensuring the desirable service quality. Ultimately, this feature
optimizes the deployment of the energy equipment and consequently reduces the related costs.
Benefits
The power consumption of the sites is reduced. As a result, the emission of carbon
dioxide is decreased.
The deployment of the energy equipment is optimized, reducing the related costs and
enhancing the reliability of power supply.
Description
The administrator/operator configures the related parameters and enters the weather forecast
data on the M2000.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

304
5 O&M
The BTS obtains from the solar energy controller the information on the power generation
capacity of the solar panel, power consumption of the BTS, and remaining capacity of the
storage battery. It reports the collected information to the M2000 periodically. The M2000
adjusts the transmit power of the BTS to a proper value based on the estimated power
generation capacity (depending on the weather conditions), the actual power generation
capacity of the solar panel, and the remaining capacity of the storage battery. This prolongs
the battery life and reduces the possibility of the BTS running out of power.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
WOFD-170600 Weather Adaptive Energy Management-GBSS
5.3.2 GBFD-510701 Compact BTS Automatic Configuration and

Planning
Availability
Summary
The compact BTS refers to BTS3900E. After the BTS3900E is installed and powered on, it
can connect to the BSC automatically. Operators do not need to configure radio parameters
for cells. The M2000 obtains radio parameters based on frequency bands and scanning results
of the uplink and downlink level of surrounding frequencies reported from the BTS3900E,
and then performs the automatic configuration and planning of the BTS3900E.
Benefits
Helps operators to rapidly deploy the network and flexibly adjust the network layout.
Reduces the workload of manual configuration once the network is adjusted.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

305
5 O&M
Description
The BTS3900E is a new-generation pico base station launched by Huawei. It is small and
light, has the plug-and-play feature, and supports indoor installation. This feature provides
simple and easy installation of the BTS3900E for operators.
After being equipped with hardware and powered on, the BTS3900E automatically performs
the internal check to confirm that the hardware is properly installed. After the self-check is
complete, the BTS3900E automatically configures the parameters related to IP transmission
and establishes the encrypted IP transmission links with the BSC and the M2000. Then, the
BTS3900E reports its device configurations to the M2000. The M2000 calculates the
available radio parameters automatically based on the information about the frequency bands
and ambient radio environment reported by the BTS3900E, and then sends the basic
parameters (including frequencies, BSIC, CGI) to the BSC to configure based on the
parameters. After the basic parameters are configured, the BTS3900E can work properly and
process services.
After continued network operation, you can manually initiate the automatic planning
procedure of the BTS3900E using the M2000 if the network adjustment is required. Only a
few manual configurations are required during the automatic planning procedure. Therefore,
the BSC provides a mechanism of reporting event alarms to timely notify users of any
exception during automatic planning.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
WOFD-180900 Compact BTS Automatic Planning-GBSS
5.3.3 GBFD-510702 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning

Availability
Summary
The Compact BTS is BTS3900E. According to the traffic volume, the BSC adjusts the output
power of the TRX in real time to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage of the
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

306
5 O&M
network. A cell is initially configured with one TRX of 30 W power. With the increase of the
traffic volume, another TRX in the cell is automatically activated, and these two TRXs share
the 30 W power.
Benefits
With this feature, the network capacity and coverage can be automatically adjusted without
manual intervention, reducing the maintenance cost.
Description
At the early stage of site deployment, the traffic volume is low. Therefore, the BTS is
configured with one TRX, which transmits with 30 W on the GSM900 frequency band. With
the slow increase of the traffic volume, when the preset threshold is exceeded, the BSC
automatically configures two TRXs, with the total transmit power no more than 30 W. During
the operation of the BTS, the system adjusts the TRX transmit power in real time according to
the change of the traffic volume. In this way, the coverage is changed, achieving the optimal
network performance. This feature mainly applies to the scenario where there are few
neighboring cells and the network structure is simple, especially, where the network
experiences slow increase of traffic volume.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
WOFD-181000 Compact BTS Automatic Capacity Planning-GBSS
5.3.4 GBFD-510704 Compact BTS Automatic Neighbor Cell

Planning and Optimization
Availability
Summary
The compact BTS is also referred to as the BTS3900E. After this feature is enabled, the
M2000 analyzes the scanning information of the downlink frequencies reported by the
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

307
5 O&M
BTS3900E and therefore obtains the information about the neighboring cells. Based on the
obtained information, the M2000 performs the neighboring cell planning of the BTS3900E. If
the M2000 determines that the BTS3900E has redundant or missing neighboring cells by
analyzing the MRs, the M2000 triggers the automatic neighboring cell optimization to update
neighboring cell relationships.
Benefits
The network performance is improved without manual intervention. The handover

success rate is increased and the call drop rate is decreased.
The workload for manually configuring neighboring cells is greatly reduced to improve
the operation and maintenance efficiency.
Description
The BTS3900E is a new type of Huawei compact BTS. It is small, light, and has the feature of
plug-and-play. It is used in indoor spaces and rural areas. This feature facilitates the
installation of the BTS3900E.
The following events occur in automatic neighboring cell planning. The M2000 enables the
BTS3900E to scan downlink frequencies and then the BTS3900E reports the information
about neighboring cells to the M2000. After that, the M2000 adds the scanned cells to the
neighboring cell list of the cell under the BTS3900E and adds the cell under the BTS3900E to
the neighboring cell list of the scanned cells. Therefore, bidirectional neighboring cell
relationships are created. If the scanned cells are not controlled by the M2000, the M2000 can
create only unidirectional neighboring cell relationships.
If the M2000 determines that the BTS3900E has redundant or missing neighboring cells by
analyzing the MRs, the M2000 triggers the automatic neighboring cell optimization to update
neighboring cell relationships.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The following M2000 features must be activated:
WOFD-181100 Compact BTS Frequency Automatic Optimizing-GBSS
WOFD-181200 Compact BTS Automatic Neighboring Relation Optimization-GBSS
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

308
5 O&M
5.3.5 GBFD-510705 Compact BTS Timing Power Off

Availability
Summary
In rural areas, MS users habitually do not make phone calls at night. Therefore, the traffic of
the compact BTS (BTS3900E) is extremely light during such period. This feature allows the
BTS to be powered off and on at night as scheduled. In this manner, the power consumption
of the BTS can be reduced. The power-off and power-on times can be configured on the BSC.
Benefits
This feature helps reduce the power consumption of the BTS at night when there is little
traffic. It can reduce the CAPEX on deploying BTSs powered by solar energy, because the
reduced power consumption leads to fewer required solar panels, smaller footprint, and
decreased costs in site construction and auxiliary devices.
Description
This feature can be applied to rural coverage scenarios where MS users habitually do not
make phone calls at night. With this feature, the BTS can be powered off and on as scheduled
during the period. The feature is applicable to the following powering scenarios:
1. BTS3900E Powered By Electricity Grid
In such a powering scenario, the BTS is not powered by solar energy. Telecom operators can
specify the power-off and power-on times of the BTS3900E according to the habits of local
MS users, so that the BTS can sleep at night, for example from midnight to 5 o'clock. When
sleeping, the BTS shuts down some RF devices to reduce power consumption. After this
feature is applied to BTS3900E O2, the power consumption of the BTS can be reduced by
100 W.
2. BTS3900E Powered By Solar Energy
In this scenario, this feature can be used in combination with the solar controller. Telecom
operators can set the power-off and power-on times of the BTS3900E on the BSC. The
BTS3900E is then powered off and on by the solar controller as scheduled. After the
BTS3900E is powered back on, it automatically establishes the connection to the BSC and
resumes to the functional state. Compared with the BTS powered by electricity grid, the BTS
powered by solar energy will be completely shut down during the specified power-off period,
therefore not consuming any power.
Note that the BTS3900E cannot process any service during the power-off period. It cannot
automatically wake up or power on even if there are service requests.
In conclusion, this feature contributes a lot to the reduction of power consumption, especially
in the case of the BTS3900E powered by solar energy. It also helps reduce the number of solar
panels to a minimum without comprising the quality of service. In this way, the CAPEX on
the solar energy devices, which counts for a large percent of the total investment in a site, can
be reduced.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

309
5 O&M
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The M2000 needs to support this feature. The Power2000, an auxiliary power supply product,
is required.
5.3.6 GBFD-510706 Local User Management

Availability
Summary
This feature is applicable to a special business mode. In this business mode, the operator
contracts out the BTS3900E deployed in a remote rural area to an entrepreneur (hereafter
called "village chief"). The village chief then performs local user management. Local user
management involves the following aspects:
1.
User registration and deregistration
2.
Local services
3.
Public network services
4.
Local services in single-BTS3900E mode
Benefits
The Local User Management feature enables the operator to launch a new business mode to
develop a new market.
After the operator contracts out a BTS3900E to the village chief, the village chief gains
profits by providing local services for the users in the village. The village chief is
responsible for performing local user registration, working out the charging policy, and
charging local users for their communications.
Local user management in a remote rural area can be performed even if the transmission
between the public network and the local network is interrupted. In addition, calls can be
made between local users and the calls can be charged.
The BTS3900E purchased by the village chief can provide services for public network
users of the operator.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

310
5 O&M
In the case that the communication between the BTS3900E and the BSC is interrupted,
the BTS3900E attempts to meet the communication requirements of public network
users.
Description
The Local User Management feature involves the following aspects:
1. User registration and deregistration
The village chief that contracts for the BTS3900E purchases a set of SIM cards from the
operator. These SIM cards are registered in the operator's network but not registered in the
local network. The village chief then sells these SIM cards to the villagers while registering
the SIM cards in the local network. Subsequently, the villagers can use mobile phones with
these SIM cards to make local calls and external calls.
The MSs that are registered in the local network covered by the BTS3900E of the village
chief are called local users, whereas other MSs are called public network users.
The village chief uses a PC to perform user registration. The user information, such as the
MSISDN, IMSI, prepaid fee, and balance are stored on the PC.
When a public network user roams into the coverage area of the BTS3900E, the village chief
manually adds this user to the local network to meet the communication requirements of the
public network user.
2. Local services
When local user A and local user B camp on the network covered by the BTS3900E of the
village chief, the calls made by the two users and the short messages transmitted between
them are called local services. The charging of local services is performed at the PC. The
village chief uses this PC to print the call detail records (CDRs) of all local calls.
Regarding the prepaid users, the PC periodically updates the balance information. Currently,
only the monthly fee charging is supported.
With respect to local services, the CN neither participates in the service signaling procedure
nor records CDRs. Therefore, legal interception, authentication, and encryption cannot be
performed.
3. Public network services
All users except the local users are called public network users. The calls, such as a call made
by a local user after it moves to the coverage area of another base station, or a call made by a
public network user after it moves to the coverage area of the BTS3900E of the village chief,
are called public network services.
When a local user moves to the coverage area of another base station, all the charging and
calls of this user are processed by the MSC. The village chief combines the CDRs of local
calls and the CDRs generated by the public network to calculate the communication fee of the
local user. After charging the local user for the communication fee, the village chief makes fee
settlement with the operator.
4. Local services in single-BTS3900E mode
When the transmission over the Abis interface is interrupted, the BTS3900E enters the
single-BTS3900E mode. In this mode, the BTS3900E independently processes all local calls.
When the transmission over the Abis interface recovers, the BTS3900E automatically
switches from the single-BTS3900E mode to the normal work mode.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

311
5 O&M
If a non-local user enters the coverage area of the BTS3900E in single-BTS3900E mode and
the village chief does not register this user in the local network, the BTS3900E allocates a
temporary MSISDN to the user and notifies the user of the MSISDN through a short message.
Subsequently, normal communication services can be processed between the non-local user
and local users. The BTS3900E records the CDRs of all users, including local users and
non-local users. A CDR contains the fundamental information about a user, such as the IMSI.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
5.4 O&M
5.4.1 GBFD-510710 Intelligent Battery Management
Availability
Summary
With this feature:
The battery management mode automatically changes depending on the selected grid
type, which prolongs the battery lifespan.
The battery self-protection function is triggered under high temperature, which avoids
the overuse of batteries and the consequent damages to the batteries.
The runtime of batteries is displayed after the mains supply is cut off. According to the
runtime, users can take measures in advance to avoid service interruption due to power
supply cutoff.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

312
5 O&M
Benefits
Reduces the OPEX of operators with prolonged battery lifespan and less energy
consumption.
Prolongs battery lifespan under high temperature with the battery self-protection
function.
Displays the runtime of batteries, helping users take measures in advance.
Automatic change of the battery management mode:
Description
The PMU board records the number of times power supply is cut off and the duration of each
cutoff. Then, the PMU board determines which grid type is chosen and correspondingly
activates a specific power management mode. In grid types 1 and 2, batteries can enter the
hibernation state in which batters do not charge or discharge, which helps prolong battery
lifespan.
Power Supply
Cutoff
Duration
Within 15
Days (Hours)
Hibernation
Voltage (V)
Hibernation
Duration
(Days)
Estimated
Battery
Lifespan
Improvement
Rate
0.10 C
52
13
100%
Mode B
0.15 C
52
50%
Mode C
0.15 C
N/A
N/A
0%
Mode C
0.15 C
N/A
N/A
0%
Grid
Type
Charge and
Discharge
Mode
Current
Limitation
Valve
Mode A
5-30
30-120
120
Power supply cutoff duration within 15 days (Hours): This duration is measured when the
PMU board is powered on. When the PMU software resets, the value of this duration is not
cleared. When the PMU is powered off and then powered on, the value of this duration is
cleared.
Grid type: consists of four types according to the power supply cutoff duration.
Charge and discharge mode: consists of three types: A, B, and C. The values for battery
management items (including Current Limitation Valve, Hibernation Voltage, Hibernation
Duration, and Estimated Battery Lifespan Improvement Rate) vary according to the charge
and discharge mode.
Current limitation valve: indicates the battery charge current limited coefficient. This item
determines the maximum charge current for the battery, which is calculated as follows:
Maximum charge current = Current limitation valve x Battery capacity
Hibernation voltage: indicates the voltage when the battery is in the hibernation state.
Hibernation duration: indicates the number of days the battery remains in the hibernation state
within 15 days.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

313
5 O&M
Estimated battery lifespan improvement rate: indicates the percentage of prolonged battery
lifespan by changing the battery from the long-time floating charging state to the hibernation
state.
Automatic change of the battery management mode is controlled by a license. This function is
determined by the Battery Intelligent Management Switch parameter in the SET
BTSOTHPARA command. If this parameter is set to ON(On), this function is enabled. If this
parameter is set to OFF(Off), this function is disabled. By default, this function is disabled.
Self-protection under high temperature:
When batteries maintain a temperature exceeding the threshold for entering the floating
charge state for 5 minutes, they enter the state and no alarms are generated.
When batteries maintain a temperature exceeding the threshold for the self-protection function
for 5 minutes, they are automatically powered off or the voltage of batteries is automatically
adjusted.
Display of the battery runtime:
After the mains supply is cut off, the base station works out the runtime of batteries based on
the remaining power capacity, discharge current, and other data. This runtime can be queried
by running an MML command.
To calculate the runtime of batteries, use the following formula:
Runtime of batteries = (Remaining power capacity x Total power capacity x Discharge
efficiency)/(Mean discharge current x Aging coefficient)
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The PMU board must be upgraded to a version supporting this feature.
5.4.2 GBFD-113729 Adaptive Transmission Link Blocking

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

314
5 O&M
Summary
If the transmission quality of an E1 link over the Abis interface deteriorates, the BSC actively
blocks this E1 link, so that the link no longer carries new services. After the transmission
quality of the E1 link becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link.
Benefits
This feature ensures the service quality by not allocating calls to E1 links with
undesirable transmission quality.
This feature reduces the costs in network monitoring and maintenance.
Description
The transmission quality, especially the quality of microwave transmission, is vulnerable to
bad weather such as raining. Once an E1 link is faulty, all services carried on the link will be
affected, which leads to degraded service quality and increased call drop rate.
To prevent the preceding problem, the BSC monitors transmission quality in real time. The
BSC automatically blocks an E1 link if the transmission quality is lower than the specified
threshold. After being blocked, the E1 link no longer carries new services and ongoing
services on the E1 link are released.
After the transmission quality of the E1 link becomes desirable, the BSC unblocks the link.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
5.4.3 GBFD-114701 Semi-Permanent Connection

Availability
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

315
5 O&M
Summary
When the semi-permanent connection feature is enabled, some of the idle E1 timeslots in the
existing network can be used to transmit information such as service hall information, alarm
information on the BTS AC power supply, and other maintenance information.
Benefits
Using semi-permanent connection prevents the arrangement of new paths to transmit the
external maintenance information. As a result, the transmission networking is simplified,
the maintenance cost is reduced, and thereby the transmission cost is greatly reduced.
With this feature, the semi-permanent connections on multiple GMPS/GEPS converge

on one E1 through the timeslot switching on the interface boards. Therefore, the
investment in the transmission and timeslot switching devices (DXX devices) are saved.
Description
When some data that does not have a high requirement for the transmission bandwidth needs
to be transmitted from one terminal to another terminal, the idle transmission resources in the
GSM network can be used.
Semi-permanent connection refers to the situation that the information collected on the E1
timeslots of the receiver is exchanged to the E1 timeslots of the transmitter through the
intra-BSS timeslot switching function. The collected information is transparently transmitted
within the BSS. The transparent transmission path is retained permanently without change in
the link configuration. The timeslot switching process is shown in the following figure.
Huawei BSS supports the semi-permanent connection at four rates: 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32
kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s. The access points of all paths carrying the semi-permanent connections
into the BSS are E1 interface timeslots. The BSS switches over multiple semi-permanent
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

316
5 O&M
connections to one E1 and then exports the collected maintenance information to the devices
in the external network.
Huawei BSS supports two types of semi-permanent connections: common semi-permanent
connection and monitoring timeslot.
Common semi-permanent connection

In the case of common semi-permanent connection, the interface boards in the BSC are
used for input and output, and only the BSC is involved in the timeslot switching
function from the input timeslot to the output timeslot. With common semi-permanent
connection, the external information of the BSC equipment room can be sent to the CN
equipment room using the transmission resources over the A interface. In addition,
simple DXX devices can be used to combine multiple timeslots into one E1 for
transmission. As a result, the transmission cost is reduced and the DXX device
investment is saved.
Monitoring timeslot
With monitoring timeslot, the timeslot switching function is performed by the BTS and
the BSC. One end of the monitoring timeslot path is connected to the BTS port, and the
other end is connected to the interface board in the BSC. The monitoring timeslot is used
for transmitting external data (such as the information about the alarm of the power
supply) on the BTS side. In BTS cascading, the upper-level BTS is also involved in the
timeslot switching function to transparently transmit the monitoring timeslot data for the
lower-level BTS.
Enhancement
GBSS8.0
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

317
5 O&M
This application enhancement supports configuration of monitoring timeslots at the

transmission optimization site.
Dependency
When monitoring timeslots are used at the transmission optimization site, E1 connection paths
should be configured between the GEHUB and the GEIUB/GOIUB.
None
5.4.4 GBFD-510901 2G/3G Neighboring Cell Automatic

Optimization
Availability
Summary
By using the Nastar, a network optimization tool, you can find out the missing or redundant
neighboring 2G/3G cells of the GSM serving cell.
Benefits
This feature helps optimize the existing network, increase intra-system and inter-system
handover success rate, optimize the GSM network performance, and improve user experience.
Description
Assuming that the operator can provide both the 2G network and the 3G network, the 3G
network can be the WCDMA network or the TD-SCDMA network, if the 3G cells are
configured as the neighboring cells of the 2G cells and the neighboring cell relationships are
configured properly, the quality of the GSM network can be improved and the user can enjoy
abundant 3G services. If the neighboring cell relationships are configured improperly, there
are missing or redundant neighboring cells. The redundant neighboring cells make the MS
cannot quickly search for the useful cells. If the required neighboring cells are not configured,
some areas may not be covered, affecting the handover success rate.
This feature should be supported by the MS, BSC, M2000, and Nastar. The M2000 sends the
list of cells whose neighboring cells should be optimized, the list of neighboring 2G/3G cells
that should be measured by the cells, and the related measurement parameters to the BSC.
Then, the BSC regularly sends the information about the neighboring 2G/3G cells to the MS.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

318
5 O&M
After the MS measures a neighboring cell, the information about the neighboring 2G/3G cell
is sent to the BSC through the MRs. The BSC records the neighboring cell information to the
traffic statistics and sends the statistics to the M2000. The Nastar obtains the statistics from
the M2000 and analyzes the statistics to obtain the missing and redundant neighboring cells as
shown in the following figure.
Huawei BSS supports two types of neighboring 3G cells: neighboring WCDMA cells
(neighboring FDD cells) and neighboring TD-SCDMA cells (neighboring TDD cells). One
serving cell supports only one type of neighboring cell.
Enhancement
None
Dependency
None
The M2000 and Nastar must support this feature.
This feature can be enabled only when the related features of the GBSS and Nastar are
bought.
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)

319
6 Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and
Abbreviations
Numerics
3G
3 rd Generation Mobile Communication System
3GPP2
3rd Generation Partnership Project 2
8PSK
8 Phase Shift Keying
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
AAL
ATM Adaptation Layer
AB
Access Burst
AbisPC
Abis interface Port Control
ACCH
Associated Control Channel
ACS
Active Codec Set
AEC
Acoustic Echo Cancellation
AFC
Automatic Frequency Correction
AGCH
Access Grant Channel
AGT
Agent
AICP
A Interface Common Procedure
ALC
Automatic Level Control
ALM
Alarm
AMR
Adaptive Multi Rate
AMRFS
Adaptive Multi Rate Full Speed
AMRHS
Adaptive Multi Rate Half Speed
ANR
Automatic Noise Restraint

320
APM
Advanced Power Module
APN
Access Point Name
APP
Application
APS
Automatic Protection Switchback
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ARQ
Automatic Request for retransmission
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATT
Attach-Detach allowed
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
BA
BCCH Allocation
BAM
Back Administration Module
BBU
Baseband Control Unit
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel
BEP
Bit Error Probability
BER
Bit Error Rate
BFD
Bidirectional Forwarding Detection
BG
Border Gateway
BIU
Base station Interface Unit
BKP
Backplane Board
BM
Basic Module
BMACT
Basic Module Active Codec Type
BMRC
BM Resource Control
BOM
Bill Of Materials
BQ
Bad Quality
BR
Backward Reporting
BSC
Base Station Controller
BSCOM
BSC O&M
BSIC
Base Station Identity Code
BSSAP
Base Station Subsystem Application Part
BSSAP+
Base Station Subsystem Application Part Plus
BSSGP
Base Station System GPRS Protocol
BTS
Base Transceiver Station

321
BTSCP
BTS Common Processing
BTSOM
BTS O&M
BTSTRC
BTS Transmission Resource Control
BVC
BSSGP Virtual Connection
BVCI
BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
CACS
Common Active Codec Set
CAPEX
Capital expenditures
CBC
Cell Broadcast Center
CBCH
Cell Broadcast Channel
CBE
Cell Broadcast Entity
CBIP
Cell Broadcast Interface Process
CBSC
CDMA2000 Base Station Controller
CCB
Call Control Block
CCCH
Common Control Channel
CCU
Channel Codec Unit
CDB
Cell Broadcast Database
CDU
Combining and Distribution Unit
CECCM
CEll CCM process
CECHM
CEll Channel Management
CEGPRS
Cell GPRS Processing
CELP
Code-Excited LPC
CESP
Cell Service Process
CGI
Cell Global Identifier
CHR
Call History Record
CI
Cell Identify
CI
Cell Identity
CIC
Circuit identification code
CIU
Circuit Interface Unit
CM
Configuration Manage
CMI
Codec Mode Indication
CMR
Codec Mode Request

322
CPRI
Common Protocol Radio Interface
CPUX
XPU CPU eXtended
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRDLC
Call Radio Link Control
CS
Coding Scheme
CSD
Circuit Switched Data
CV
Countdown Value
CW
Call Wait
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
DACS
Distant Active Codec Set
DBAPI
DataBase API
DBG
Debug
DBMI
DataBase Management Interface
DBUS
Data-BUS
DCS 1800MHz
Digital Cellular System 1800MHz
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Diffserv
Differentiated Services
DOPRA
Distributed Object-oriented Programmable Realtime Architecture
DPU
Data Process Unit
DRFU
Double Radio Filter Unit
DRX
Discontinuous Reception
DSCP
DiffServ Code Point
DSPC
DSP for transCoder
DSPI
DSP for Integrated
DSPOM
DSP O&M
DSPOM_AGT
DSP OM Agent
DSPP
DSP for Pcu
DT
Debug Terminal
DTAP
Direct Transfer Application Part
DTCB
Distance To Cell Board
DTM
Dual Transfer Mode
DTM
Dual Transfer Mode

323
DTMF
Dual-Tone Multi-frequency
DTX
Discontinuous Transmission
E
ECSD
Enhanced Circuit Switched Data
ECT
Explicit Call Transfer
EDA
Extended Dynamic Allocation
EFR
Enhanced Full Rate
EFR
Enhanced Full Rate
E-GSM
Extended GSM-900 Band (includes Standard GSM-900 band)
EICC
Enhanced Interference Counteract Combining
EML
Extended Operation and Maintenance Link
EM-layer
Element Management-layer
eMLPP
Enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption service
EMR
Enhanced Measurement Report
ES
Errored Second
ESL
Extend Signaling Link
ESR
Errored Second Ratio
ETHERNET
OAM
ETHERNET OAM
ETRAU
EGPRS TRAU
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
FACCH
Fast Associated Control Channel
FAI
Final Ack Indicator
FBI
Final Block Indicator
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FDR
Frequency Domain Reflectometer
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FER
Frame Erase Ratio
FER
Frame Erase Ratio
FH
Frequency Hopping

324
FIR
Finite Input Response
Flex Abis
Flex Abis
FM
Forward Monitoring
FN
Frame Number
FR
Frame Relay
FR
Full Rate
FR AMR
Full Rate AMR
FS
Full Speed
FTP
FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL
FTPS
FTP Over SSL
FUC
Frame Unit Controller
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Gb
Gb interface
GBSC
GSM Base Station Controller
GBSS
GSM Base Station Subsystems
GDPUC
GDPU for transCoder
GDPUX
GDPU for eXtensible use
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GEHUB
GSM E1/T1 High level Data Link Control Unit for Abis
GEIUB
GSM E1/T1 Interface Unit for Abis
GEPUG
GSM E1/T1 Packet Unit for Gb
GFGUA
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for A
GFGUB
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Abis
GFGUG
GSM FE/GE electronic interface Unit for Gb
GGCU
GSM General Clock Unit
GGOUA
GSM GE optical interface Unit for A
GGOUB
GSM GE optical interface Unit for Abis
GMSK
Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (modulation)
GOMU
GSM Operation and Maintenance Unit
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GPS
Global Position System
GRFU
GSM Radio Frequency Unit

325
GRLM
GPRS Radio Link Management
GRRM
GPRS Radio Resource management
GSCU
GSM Switching and Control Unit
GSM-R
Railways Global System for Mobile Communication
GSN
Gigabyte System Network
GTMU
GSM Timing and Main control Unit
GTNU
GSM TDM switching network unit
GTRAU
GPRS TRAU
GTRAUE
GPRS TRAU Enhancement
GTRAUIP
GPRS TRAU IP transmission
GUI
Graphical User Interface
GXPUM
GSM eXtensible Processing Unit for Main service
H
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HLR
Home Location Register
HMC
High Multislot Classes
HR
Half Rate
HR AMR
Half Rate AMR
HS
Half Speed
HSCSD
High Speed Circuit Switched Data
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HubBTS
Hub Base Transceiver Station
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
IACS
Immediate Active Codec Set
IBCA
Interference Based Channel Allocation
ICB
Inner Combiner bypass
ICC
Interference Rejection Combining
ICMP
Internet Control Messages Protocol
IDC
Instance Distribution Control
IMEI
International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI
International Mobile Subscriber Identity

326
IP
Internet Protocol
IR
Incremental redundancy
ISI
Inter-Symbol Interference
IWF
Interworking Function
K
KPI
Key Performance Index
L
L3IF
Layer-3 Interface
LA
Link adaptation
LAC
Location Area Code
LACS
Local Active Codec Set
LAI
Location Area Identity
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPD
Link Access Protocol on D channel
LLC
Logic Link Control
LMT
Local Maintenance Terminal
LRM
Local Resource Management
LSP
Linear Spectral Pairs
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
M3UA
MTP3 User Adaptation Layer
MA
Mobile Allocation
MAC
Medium Access Control
MACS
Maximum number of Codes Modes in the Active Codec Set
MAIO
Mobile Allocation Index Offset
MCS
Modulation and Coding Scheme
MGW
Media Gateway
MML
Man-Machine Language
MNC
Mobile Network Code
MOS
Mean Opinion Scores
MPTY
MultiParty

327
MR
Measurement Report
MSC
Main Switching Center
MSIC
MS Instance Control
MSIP
MS Instance Processing
MSISDN
Mobile Station International ISDN Number
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTLS
Mapping and Transfer between LAPD entity and Service entity
MTP2
Message Transfer Part 2
MTP3
Message Transfer Part 3
MTSS
Mapping and Transfer between SCCP entity and Service entity
N
NACC
Network Assisted Cell Change
NAT
Network Address Translation
NCH
Notification Channel
NLN
Notification List Number
NM
Network Management
NMS
Network Management System
NRI
Network Resource Identifier
NS
Network Service
NSE
Network Service Entity
NSEI
Network Service Entity Identifier
NSS
Network Subsystem
NSVC
Network Service Virtual Connection
O
OACS
Optimized Active Codec Set
OMC
Operations & Maintenance Center
OML
Operation and Maintenance Link
OPEX
Operating Expense
P
PACCH
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
Packet Associated Control Channel

328
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
PAGCH
Packet Access Grant Channel
PARC
Platform of Advanced Radio Controller
Pb
PCU-BSC interface link
PBCCH
Packet Broadcast Control Channel
PBGT
Power Budget Handover
PBIP
Pb Interface Processing
PBT
Power Boost Technology
PCCCH
Packet Common Control Channel
PCH
Paging Channel
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCS 1900MHz
Personal Communications Service 1900MHz
PCU
Packet Control Unit
PDCH
Packet Data Channel
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDTCH
Packet Data Traffic Channel
PDU
Power Distribution Unit
PGC
Paging Control
P-GSM
Primary GSM-900 Band
PIU
Packet Interface Unit
PLMN
Public Land Mobile Network
PMU
Power Management Unit
PoC
Push to Talk over Cellular
PPCH
Packet Paging Channel
PQ
Priority Queue
PRACH
Packet Random Access Channel
PS
Packet Switch Domain
PSI
Packet SI Status
PSU
Power Supply Unit
PT
Payload Type
PTCCH
Packet Timing Advanced Control Channel
P-TMSI
Packet-Temporary Mobile Station Identity
PTP
Point-To-Point
PTRAU
Packet Transcoder/Rate Adapter Unit

329
PTT
Push-To-Talk
PTU
Packet Transmission Unit
PVC
Permanent Virtual Connection
Q
QoS
Quality of Service
QTRU
Quadruple Transmission Receiver Unit
R
RACH
Random Access Channel
RC
Resource control & Common procedure
RFC
Request for Comments
RFU
Radio Frequency Unit
RIM
Reference Information Manager
RLC
Radio Link Control
RNC
WCDMA Radio Network Controller
RPE-LTP
Regular Pulse Excitation-Long Term Prediction
RQI
Radio Quality Indicator
RR
Radio Resources
RRBP
Relative Reserved Block Period
RSL
Radio Signaling Link
RTCP
Real-Time Transport Control Protocol
RTP
Real-Time Transport Protocol
RX
Reception
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
SACCH
Slow Associated Control Channel
SAIC
Single Antenna Interference Cancellation
SAPI
Service Access Point Identifier
SCCP
Signaling Connection Control Part
SCH
Synchronization Channel
SCTP
Stream Control Transmission Protocol
SCU
Switch Control Unit

330
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SESR
Severely Errored Second Ratio
SGSN
Serving GPRS Support Node
SID
Silence Descriptor
SIGTRAN
Signaling Transport
SMC
Short Message Center
SMLC
Serving Mobile Location Center
SMS
Short Message Service
SMSCB
Short Message Service Cell Broadcast
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SP
Service Provider
SPHY
Single PHY
SSL
Security Socket Layer
STP
Signaling Transfer Point
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
TA
Timing Advanced
TBF
Temporary Block Flow
TC
TransCoder
TCEC
The TRAN Circuit Emulation Card
TCH
Traffic Channel
TCHF
Traffic Channel Full rate
TCP/IP
Transfer Control Protocol /Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA
Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access
TEI
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TFI
Temporary Block Flow Identifier
TFO
Tandem Free Operation
TGPU
TRAN GBTS Package Process Unit
THP
Traffic handle Priority
TLLI
Temporary link level identity
TLS
Transport Layer Security
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TMSI
Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identifier

331
TMU
Timing/transmission and Management Unit
TNU
TDM switching network unit
TOP
TDM Over Packet
TPEC
The TRAN Packet over E1/T1 Card
TRAU
Transcoder & Rate Adaptation Unit
TRAUE
TRAU Enhancement
TRAUIP
TRAU IP transmission
TRC
Trace
TrFO
Transcoder Free Operation
TRM
Transport Resource Management
TRU
Transmission Receiver Unit
TRX
Transceiver
TSU
TDM Switching network Unit
TSYN
TRAU Synchronization Unit
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
UOIP
User traffic Data Over IP
UOP
User Traffic Data Over Packet
USCU
Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit
USF
Uplink Status Flag
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
VAD
Voice Activity Detector
VBS
Voice Broadcast Service
VGCS
Voice Group Call Service
VISP
Versatile IP and Secure Platform
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VLR
Visitor Location Register
VoIP
Voice over IP
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VQI
Voice Quality Index

332
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
WBBP
WCDMA Baseband Processing unit
WCDMA
Wideband CDMA
WFQ
Weighted Fair Queuing
WMPT
WCDMA Main Processing Transmission unit
WRED
Weighted Random Early Detection
WRR
Weighted Round Robin
X
XPUX
Issue 01 (2013-2-18)
XPU eXtended

333

GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS15.0 Optional Feature Description 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GBSS15.

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential